Quarterlytics / Financial Services / Asset Management - Income / IG Design Group Plc

IG Design Group Plc

igr · LSE Financial Services
Claim this profile
Ticker igr
Exchange LSE
Sector Financial Services
Industry Asset Management - Income
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2020 Annual Report · IG Design Group Plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
I

G

D

e

s

i

g

n

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

N

N

U

A

L

R

E

P

O

R

T

A

N

D

F

I

N

A

N

C

I

A

L

S

T

A

T

E

M

E

N

T

S

2

0

2

0

IG Design Group plc
ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

2020

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONTENTS

What’s inside

Strategic report

Governance

A review of the Group’s strategy with a more 
detailed look at activity during the financial 
year together with its risk management.

Information on how the Group is governed 
and activities of the Board.

01  Our purpose and culture

58  Board of Directors

02  Delivering our commitment to shareholders

60  Chairman’s corporate governance review

04  At a glance

06  Business model

08  Stakeholders

10  Our strategy

24   Chief Executive Officer’s review

38  Chief Financial Officer’s review 

46  Risk management 

53  Social responsibility

68  Audit Committee report

71  Directors’ remuneration report

77  Directors’ report

80  Statement of Directors’ responsibilities

Financials – Group

Financials – Company

The Group’s consolidated financial statements 
and comprehensive notes covering the year 
ended 31 March 2020.

The Company’s financial statements 
and comprehensive notes covering  
the year ended 31 March 2020.

82   Independent auditor’s report

88   Consolidated income statement

142  Company balance sheet

143   Company statement of changes in equity

88    Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

144   Notes to the Company financial statements

89   Consolidated statement of changes in equity

91   Consolidated balance sheet

93   Consolidated cash flow statement

94   Notes to the consolidated financial statements

Alternative performance measures
This review includes alternative performance measures (‘APMs’) 
that are presented in addition to the standard IFRS metrics. 
The Directors believe that these APMs provide important 
additional information regarding the business including trends, 
performance and position of the Group. APMs are used to 
enhance the comparability of information between reporting 
periods and segmental business units by adjusting for exceptional 
or uncontrollable factors which affect IFRS measures, to aid 
the understanding of the Group’s performance. Consequently, 
APMs are used by the Directors and management for strategic 
and performance analysis, planning, reporting and reward setting. 

Adjusting items are items that are material and of an unusual 
or non‑recurring nature.

In order to show when such measures have been used, the APMs 
are highlighted in blue throughout the CEO and CFO reviews, 
collectively known as the executive review. 

The APMs are Adjusted EBITDA, Adjusted operating profit, 
Adjusted profit before tax, Adjusted profit after tax, and 
Adjusted earnings per share. The definitions of the APMs 
used are listed below:

• Adjusted EBITDA – EBITDA before adjusting items
• Adjusted operating profit – Profit before finance charges,

tax and adjusting items

• Adjusted profit before tax – Profit before tax and adjusting

items

• Adjusted profit after tax – Profit after tax, before adjusting

items and associated tax effect

• Adjusted earnings per share – Fully diluted earnings per share

before adjusting items and associated tax effect

Further detail can be seen on page 45.

OUR PURPOSE AND CULTURE

We are  
Design Group

Helping people celebrate life’s special  
occasions and inspiring individuals’ creativity.

Our goals are

Customers

Team

to be the ‘partner of 
choice’ across an 
increasing range of 
products and categories 
where our customers 
value our fast pace, 
innovation, market 
focus and flexibility

to have a creative 
and winning culture 
focused on developing 
a team that looks to 
accomplish great things

Suppliers

Investors

to build relationships 
with suppliers who 
provide capacity, 
enable us to compete 
profitably and share our 
passion for design and 
innovation

to continue to grow 
our Group and deliver 
returns well above 
market performance

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

01

DELIVERING OUR COMMITMENT TO SHAREHOLDERS

Delivering growth

Adjusted EPS

Adjusted EPS 
(pence)

3 year CAGR: 13%

29.1

26.9

Aim to deliver double digit three year 
compound annual growth

21.9

18.4

13.1

Through organic growth and acquisitions

2016

2017

2018

2019

2020

2020 reported diluted earnings per share 16.9p (2019: 15.9p)

Generating cash

Average leverage

Sustain long term average leverage between 
1.0x and 2.0x

Average leverage(a)

3.2x

2.3x

Provides capacity for future investment

1.5x

1.3x

0.9x

2016

2017

2018

2019

2020

Improving returns

Dividends 
(pence)

Dividend

Trend upwards until 2.5x covered (40% pay out)

8.5

8.75

6.0

4.5

Increased shareholder distributions

2.5

2016

2017

2018

2019

2020

Alternative performance measures: we use both statutory reported and adjusted measures in our strategic report. Adjusted measures in management’s view reflect the 
underlying performance of the business and provides a more meaningful comparison of how the business is managed and measured day-to-day. The definition of adjusted 
measures, along with a full reconciliation between our reported and adjusted results, is provided in our alternative performance measures section on page 45.

02

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTKPIs

Revenue

£494.2m +10%

2019: £448.4m

Adjusted profit before tax(a)

£29.1m

2019: £30.3m

Reported profit before tax

£0.3m

2019: £17.3m

Adjusted EBITDA(a)

Average bank debt

£48.1m +24%

2019: £38.7m

£34.6m 

2019: £48.8m

Adjusted EBITDA pre IFRS 16

£40.2m +4%

2019: £38.7m

Cash conversion(a)

84.4%

2019: 130.5%

Return on capital employed(a)

21.6%

2019: 24.3%

(a)  For definitions please refer to detailed financial review on page 45.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

03

AT A GLANCE

We’re all around 
the world

We’re truly international, 
with 11,000
customers selling 
our products through 
over 210,000
stores across more 
than 80 countries,
we enjoy considerable 
market presence 
around the world.

Revenue by customer destination

USA 
£289.5m
59%

UK
£84.5m
17%

Europe
£66.6m
13%

Australia
£31.9m
7%

ROW
£21.7m
4%

04

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTFocused on our five major product categories of 
Celebrations, Gifting, Craft & creative play, Stationery 
and ‘Not-for-resale’ consumables, we leverage our 
Group size and expertise whilst retaining local market 
knowledge and relationships through our local businesses.

Revenue by...

Season

Product

Source

Sourced
65%
Manufactured in-house
35%

Christmas
56%
Everyday
39%
Minor seasons
5%

Celebrations
75%
Gifting
11%
Craft & creative play
7%
Stationery
4%
‘Not-for-resale’ 
consumables
3%

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

05

BUSINESS MODEL

Designed 

to succeed

Our core 
strengths

Geographic 
diversity

Customer 
relationships

Passionate 
and 
innovative 
team

Award 
winning 
service

Broad 
product 
portfolio 
of trusted 
brands

What we do

Product Design & Development

Over 230 designers across four continents, producing thousands of designs a year

• We pride ourselves on always being at the
very cutting edge of design trends and
product development

• Our businesses can all access these great
designs through our global design hub

• Each business unit has a dedicated

design team

• We are continuously innovating fresh designs,
including generic, customer bespoke and
licensed branded offerings

Manufacturing & Sourcing

Over 75,000 SKUs manufactured and sourced annually

• We manufacture a number of our core
products in-house, including gift wrap,
crackers, gift bags, cards, sewing patterns,
ribbons and bows

• For categories that we source, we work with
carefully selected partners to manufacture
our products and designs to meet required
standards

• Sites in the UK, China, US, Mexico, India,

• Our manufacturing and sourcing network,

Netherlands and Poland

• We continuously invest in our manufacturing

process, resulting in some of the most
efficient production facilities in the industry

which is subject to regular ethical, quality and
technical audits, supported by our team of
manufacturing and sourcing experts, ensures
we deliver compliant and ethically sourced
products

Distribution & Fulfilment

Over 700 million units sold annually

• We offer everything from ‘free on board’,
where the customer handles shipping,
to merchandising solutions, where we deliver
items to stores depending on customer needs
In each business unit across the world
our logistics teams process each retailer’s
orders through our global infrastructure of
warehouses and fulfilment centres

•

• Our ability to deliver on time/in full is a critical

part of our service offering

• We work with our customers to improve
the process of getting stock to the shelf,
helping reduce store costs and improve
stock availability

Our values underpin all we do – reflecting Design Group culture 

• To strive for excellence in

• To behave ethically and

• To focus on our

everything we do

with integrity

customers and ‘go the
extra mile’

• To be open to feedback,
ideas and to positive
change and promote
fulfilment and fun

06

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTProducts and categories

• Celebrations

• Gifting

• Craft & creative play

• Stationery

• ‘Not-for-resale’
consumables

Value created for 
stakeholders

Employees

Direct employment of over  

4,250 employees worldwide

Customers

Global scale allows us to offer 

the best products and prices

Suppliers

Indirect employment engaging over 

400 suppliers across our business

Communities

Local initiatives supporting local  

communities and national charities

Shareholders

We have delivered long term growth 

in dividends and share price

• To be good citizens within
our communities and
take responsibility for our
impact on our planet

• To be innovative and
entrepreneurial

• To treat everyone with
dignity and respect

• To be a team that

succeeds together and
aims to be an ‘employer
of choice’

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

07

STAKEHOLDERS

In good  
company with  
our stakeholders

Section 172 statement
As a Board, collectively and as 
individual Directors, we recognise 
our obligations under the Companies 
Act and, in particular, our duties as 
Directors. 

Each Director is fully aware of their 
duty to promote the success of 
the Company for the benefit of its 
members as a whole, and in doing so 
each Director has regard (amongst 
other matters) to:

(a) the likely consequences of any

decision in the long term;

(b) the interests of the Company’s

employees;

(c) the need to foster the Company’s

business relationships with
suppliers, customers and others;

(d) the impact of the Company’s

operations on the community and
the environment;

(e) the desirability of the Company

maintaining a reputation for high
standards of business conduct; and

(f) the need to act fairly as between

members of the Company.

In the table on the right, we identify the 
key stakeholders set out in Section 172 
(b)-(d) and (f) and highlight the key
issues they face, how we engage with
them and examples of Board decisions
that have taken these important
stakeholders (and the other Section 172
factors) into account.

We were able to secure funding 
over the next three year period 
with multiple banks as opposed to 
maintaining the previous arrangement 
which required certain elements to 
be renewed annually. This gives us 
certainty over funding and aligns with 
our growth strategy.

When making decisions as a Board, 
we also evaluate the short term and 
long term consequences of each 
decision. This was evident when 
approving the refinancing of the Group 
in June 2019. 

Employees

Shareholders

Customers

Communities

Suppliers

08

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTOur  
stakeholders

Issues 
they face

How we 
engage

Effect on 2020 
Board decisions

Employees

Our teams across the 
Group include those 
who have been with 
the business for many 
years through to new 
recruits at the start of 
their careers.

Employees want a happy, safe 
working environment where they 
are rewarded fairly and where 
there are opportunities to gain 
fresh experiences, personal 
growth and career progression. 
It is important that employees 
feel respected and valued.

Customers

We are proud to serve 
the best retailers in 
the world.

The retail market is a dynamic 
and challenging environment 
and retailers are having to 
continuously evolve their 
propositions to meet consumer 
demand and changing 
expectations.

Margin pressures from the end 
customer require us to work 
with suppliers to ensure we can 
deliver a competitive offer while 
also dealing with the increased 
demand for ethical sourcing.

We invest in our people; from 
training and education offered 
throughout the Group, through 
to opportunities for career 
progression. The Group offers 
an environment in which our 
employees are encouraged to 
grow and deliver their very best. 
It is these same opportunities 
which allow the Group to attract 
and retain the brightest talent.

We recognise that each of our 
customers is unique and so 
requires a different service 
to satisfy their needs and 
expectations. We are skilled in 
delivering a range of product 
offerings from small, catalogue 
orders to large programmes for 
international retailers.

Where possible, our desire is to 
create long term collaborative 
relationships with key suppliers.

Recognising the growing size of 
the business, the Board takes a 
keen interest in ensuring that key 
positions are recruited and the 
correct organisation structure put in 
place. This was a key priority in the 
Board approving the CSS Industries, 
Inc. (‘CSS’) acquisition.

The Board approved a multi million 
capital investment in gift wrap machinery 
for our European business, enabling it to 
compete more effectively for high volume 
projects, particularly for customers who 
have seen strong growth over this period 
and require a quick turnaround in supply.

In order to strengthen its reputation for 
high standards of business conduct, the 
Board considered and approved a new 
Third Party Due Diligence policy and 
accompanying processes.

Suppliers

As well as our own 
manufacturing facilities, 
we utilise a global 
network of suppliers 
to ensure we can turn 
our designs into high 
quality products for our 
customers.

Communities

Each of our business 
units around the 
world has a role to 
play in supporting 
and improving the 
communities in which 
they operate.

Shareholders

Both institutional and 
retail investors are vital 
to our business.

Local people want to see 
tangible benefits from Design 
Group’s presence in their 
community.

Our businesses throughout 
the world undertake a variety 
of local initiatives to support 
their local communities and 
national charities.

They want to see us delivering 
growth while maintaining a 
strong financial position.

Our CEO, CFO and Chairman 
maintain regular contact with 
our institutional investors and 
our AGM gives us the ideal 
opportunity to meet with 
individual investors face-to-face.

In operating a global business, the Board 
recognises the different environments 
and communities in which each 
business unit operates. We are keen 
to promote schemes of sustainability 
and are supportive of local community 
initiatives. By way of example, the Board 
was pleased to agree the sale of the 
Shaoxing, China factory to a purchaser 
who plans to open a new factory in 
Shaoxing and offer employment to 
all current production employees.

The Board has worked closely with our 
nomad and broker, Canaccord, to ensure 
the view of shareholders is represented 
in key decisions such as those relating 
to remuneration, the performance of the 
businesses and M&A. Examples of this 
include discussions with the Remuneration 
Committee in relation to Executive pay and 
incentives; and in relation to M&A activity 
which led to the share raise in January 
being over-subscribed.

Link to QCA Principle 3 on pages 63 and 64

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

09

Our  
strategy

Our strategy is built 
on leveraging our 
core strengths and 
focusing on the market 
opportunities.

Working with 
the winners

Read our strategy 
in action section 
on pages 12-15

Increasing revenue through 
growth with the winning retailers 
of now and the future, in the 
growing channels and product 
categories

KPIs >

Level of business with 
our top 10 customers

Definition: Percentage of 
Group revenue from our top 
10 global customers

Sales by channel

Definition: Growing our 
revenues across different 
sales channels

Why chosen: We pride 
ourselves on having 
long‑lasting cross‑category 
relationships with 
the world’s leading 
retailers, and nurturing 
and maintaining these 
relationships allows us 
to grow as they do

Why chosen: Our ‘winners’ 
are a broad range of 
customers across various 
sales channels including 
national and regional mass 
and discount retailers, 
wholesalers, distributors, 
independents and 
e‑commerce specialists

10

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTDesign  
& innovation

Efficiency 
& scale

Read our strategy 
in action section  
on pages 16-19

Read our strategy 
in action section 
on pages 20-23

Developing in new channels and 
adjacent product categories 
while increasing our share in 
the growing number of events 
celebrated throughout the year

Driving margins through 
investment in processes 
and people
Accretive M&A opportunities to 
unlock synergies and strengthen 
our ‘one-stop-shop’ position with 
customers

New product category growth

Adjusted operating margin

Definition: New product 
category growth 
year‑on‑year

Why chosen: It is important 
to innovate and introduce 
new segments and 
products that complement 
our existing ranges. 
This helps the Group grow 
by diversifying our offering

Definition: Adjusted 
operating margin as a 
percentage of revenue

Why chosen: Delivering 
value to our customers 
is essential and we must 
ensure we can continue to 
compete in our marketplace 
and win against other 
suppliers

Diversifying seasonality

M&A and investment

Definition: Year‑on‑year 
growth in categories other 
than Christmas products

Why chosen: We have 
in the past been a heavily 
Christmas‑based business, 
and whilst this is still very 
important, we also want 
to focus on growing the 
non‑Christmas (being minor 
seasons and everyday) part 
of our business

Definition: Capital 
expenditure and corporate 
acquisitions

Why chosen: Our ability 
to invest in efficiency 
improving projects helps 
support our competitive 
position, while our ability 
to execute earnings 
accretive M&A ensures 
the Group continues to 
grow its scale and reach

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

11

Increasing revenue through growth with the 
winning retailers of now and the future, in the 
growing channels and product categories.

Why is this important?

How do we aim to deliver on this? 

Revenue growth is critical to the ongoing success 
and development of the Group. Our focus on 
working with the winners allows the Group to drive 
revenues with our key customers by being their 
partner of choice. As revenue grows, this further 
underpins our relationship with our customers.

We always aim to be our customers’ partner 
of choice and to be part of their success story. 
The retail market is dynamic and as it evolves we 
work closely with all of our customers to ensure 
we are right by their side as a trusted supplier. 

To ensure we are at the forefront of our 
customers’ minds, it is imperative that we 
have a diverse offering of products, in the 
form of a ‘one-stop-shop’ and ensure we have 
the capabilities as a manufacturer as well as 
leveraging our ever improving sourcing processes. 

Our businesses invest significant time in making 
themselves experts in their local markets and 
developing strong relationships with each of our 
winning customers. 

12

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTWorking with the winnersIG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

13

WORKING WITH THE WINNERS CONTINUED

Progress in 2020
Our strategy of working with the winners continues to help 
drive our business forward, with record revenues in 2020 
delivered from these winning partnerships. Our priorities for 
the 2020 financial year included growing our business with:

• our top 10 customers; and
• the winning channels.

The acquisition of CSS at the end of 2020 has embedded 
new customers into our portfolio, including JOANN stores, 
one of the largest craft retailers in the US. These customers, 
alongside Walmart, help further extend our footprint in the 
US and we are delighted to have them as part of the Design 
Group portfolio. 

Sales by channel continue to evolve positively and the 
acquisition of CSS helped the Group extend its online 
activity further. We have also benefitted from the growth 
of mass and discount retailers as they extend their market 
share in our key categories. 

Walmart remains our largest customer for the Group with 
revenues accounting for 22% in 2020 (2019: 18%). 

Priorities for 2021 and beyond
Our key priorities for 2021 continue to focus on the ‘working 
with the winners’ KPIs; growing our business with our top 
10 retailers and growing our business market taking within 
winning channels. 

As can be seen from the table below, we see extensive 
opportunities for the Group across our categories and our 
markets with our existing customers and we will continue 
to pursue these opportunities across all of the territories in 
which we operate.

Market opportunities matrix

Level of business with 
our top 10 customers
(% of total revenue)

48%

52%

39%

2018

2019

2020

Sales by channel
(%)

62%

77%

38%

2019

23%

2020

 Mass and discount retailers
 Other

AMERICAS

EUROPE

UK

AUSTRALIA

Gift wrap

Crackers

Décor

Partyware

Gift bags

Ribbons and bows

Cards

Stationery

Creative play

Art & Craft

Gifting

‘Not-for-resale’ consumables

Size of growth 
opportunity by 
region

Small

Medium

Large

14

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGY IN ACTION CASE STUDY

BUY ON  
IMPULSE

• In the US, we have a number
of customers with whom we
run ‘impulse’ programmes
• Multi-cycle sales programme
(6-9 per year), with everyday
and seasonal products
throughout the year

• Attractive, affordable, on

trend products on collective
display stands that seek
to inspire the consumer to
purchase on ‘impulse’

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

15

Design & 
innovation

Developing in new channels and adjacent 
product categories while increasing our share 
in the growing number of events celebrated 
throughout the year.

Why is this important?

How do we aim to deliver on this? 

Design and innovation are our life blood and are 
key to the success of the Group going forward. 
Consumers are constantly looking for exciting 
new products while our customers seek new, 
innovative ways to sell. Our design teams are 
focused on providing fresh, new ideas to enjoy 
our products in exciting retail environments.

Consumers want retailers to merchandise 
products that are high quality and on trend, 
whilst still being value for money. As such, 
our customers look to us to help them access 
the products that their customers want. 
These expectations continue to grow and 
product design and innovation is critical in this 
regard and we pride ourselves on developing the 
best designs for innovative and quality products. 

We also focus on developing new and adjacent 
products and our designers are some of the best 
in the industry, constantly developing ideas to 
stay ahead of the latest trends. 

Innovation also extends to how we as a business 
can develop and enhance ways in which we 
reduce our impact on the environment and this 
is a key area of focus for our teams. More detail 
about our progress on this can be seen on pages 
53 to 55. 

16

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTIG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

17

DESIGN & INNOVATION CONTINUED

Progress in 2020
Our priorities in 2020 were to achieve growth in new product 
segments alongside expanding our non-Christmas sales. 

Christmas sales are still a major part of our business and 
will continue to underpin our performance, but we are 
focused on diversifying our products through the likes of 
the ‘not-for-resale’ consumables and creative play products 
which we have introduced in recent years. Non-Christmas 
sales increased this year by 10% to £217.7 million 
(2019: £197.2 million). 

Furthermore, the acquisition of CSS will help to grow our 
non-seasonal sales through the addition of the Craft product 
category which significantly increases the everyday segment 
of revenues for the Group. More details on the acquisition 
can be seen on page 23. 

In the UK we invested in our second bag making machine 
and started production in January 2020. We are excited to 
ramp up the production of our retail collateral bags and are 
pleased with the revenue growth delivered in the 2020 year. 

Creative play products continue to be a focus for us, both 
in the US where our Anker Play Products (‘APP’) branded 
business is demonstrating good growth, but in addition 
this creates the cross-selling opportunities that we are also 
capitalising on around the Group.

Other new products introduced to our portfolio this year 
includes our sustainable products range from the UK, 
for which more detail can be seen in the social responsibility 
section of this report. 

Priorities for 2021 and beyond
The acquisition of CSS brings new product categories and 
a significant increase in everyday revenue. This will positively 
‘balance’ the business revenues in terms of seasonal 
diversity. As a result, our priorities for 2021 and beyond will 
focus on growing new product categories and capitalising 
on cross-selling opportunities of CSS products across 
the Group.

Retail collateral bags
(Revenue £m)

0.9

1.0

1.3

+37%

2018

2019

2020

Creative play products
(Revenue £m)

20.5

16.3

9.8

+26%

2018

2019

2020

Seasonal diversity
(Non-Christmas revenue £m)

217.7

197.2

158.6

+10%

2018

2019

2020

18

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGY IN ACTION CASE STUDY

SUSTAINABLE 
GREETINGS

• Consumers and retailers

care about the environment
and want the option of
eco-friendly products
• Design Group is providing
solutions with ongoing
initiatives to move
progressively to more
sustainable product ranges
• Our focus is on continuing to
create design-led products
with an eco difference,
including plastic-free
crackers, recyclable wrap
and packaging

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

19

Efficiency 
& scale

Increasing margins through investments in process 
and people while pursuing accretive M&A opportunities 
focused on unlocking synergies and strengthening our 
‘one-stop-shop’ position with customers.

Why is this important?

How do we aim to deliver on this? 

Driving efficiencies through capital and people 
investment will help strengthen our margins, while 
carefully selected acquisitions that complement 
our business help deliver synergies and drive the 
overall scale of the Group.

Investment in people and processes as well as 
unlocking synergies following acquisitions are 
an important focus as we continue to seek to 
increase operating margins.

Our ability to remain responsive to our customers’ 
needs requires us to remain competitive through 
investment in state-of-the-art manufacturing 
capabilities. Alongside this, investment in the 
teams around the globe ensure we have the right 
people operating our businesses on the ground. 

We actively review potential acquisitions on a 
regular basis. We look to combine our business 
with those we know will strengthen our business 
in the form of increasing adjacent product 
categories, accessing customer relationships, 
increasing our global scale and bringing the best 
people into the Design Group family. 

20

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTIG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

21

EFFICIENCY & SCALE CONTINUED

Progress in 2020
One of the most significant milestones for the Group in 2020 
was the acquisition of CSS in March 2020. 

The acquisition substantially increases our manufacturing 
platform in the US, which is more important than ever 
to our retail partners, as well as enhancing our product 
offerings and seasonal diversity.

We have restructured our US senior management team 
following the acquisition as follows: 

• Executive Chairman
• Chief Executive Officer
• Chief Financial Officer
• Chief Operating Officer
• Chief HR Officer

This team is leading the integration and synergy realisation 
plan as we combine our US business with CSS.

Priorities for 2021 and beyond
An immediate priority for the Group is to work swiftly to 
integrate CSS into DG Americas. We are aiming to unlock 
synergies of up to £10 million on an annual basis by 
2024 and we are already delivering savings ahead of our 
anticipated run rate. 

Our global scale and robust processes are also vitally 
important during the Covid-19 pandemic and we have no 
doubt that the Group will remain a strong and efficient 
business whilst the crisis continues. 

Whilst we respond to the impact of Covid-19 we will 
carefully manage our capital investments, but these 
will again become a focus once we are the other side 
of the crisis.

Adjusted operating margin 
(% of revenue)

7.1%

7.3%

6.8%

2018

2019

2020

Adjusted overheads 
(as % of revenue) 

14.3%

11.6%

11.6%

2018

2019

2020

M&A and investment (£m)
Corporate acquisitions

95.9

66.8

5.1

2018

2019

2020

Capital expenditure

11.1

9.4

7.9

2018

2019

2020

22

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGY IN ACTION CASE STUDY

CSS 
INDUSTRIES

• The CSS acquisition

substantially enhances
the Group’s offering with
increased everyday presence
in new product categories in
craft and floral packaging

• Increases our retail

footprint in the US, creating
opportunity for cross selling
and expanding the Group’s
‘one-stop-shop’ offering
• Target to deliver a minimum
of £10 million annualised
synergy savings by 2024

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

23

CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER’S REVIEW

CSS acquisition 
establishes us as 
a key player in the 
creative craft market

Paul Fineman
Chief Executive Officer

Despite this, the Group continued to 
focus on its strategy and in January 
2020 announced it had agreed to 
acquire CSS Industries, Inc. (‘CSS’) 
in the US, alongside a £120 million 
share placing. Just after completing 
this transaction in March 2020, the 
world experienced the rapid spread of 
Covid-19, which had an unprecedented 
impact on our business and our teams. 

Overview
This has been an extraordinary year 
for Design Group with our significant 
successes in the period impacted 
by truly unprecedented macro level 
economic, social and operational 
challenges. In May 2019, trade 
discussions between the US and 
Chinese governments worsened, 
resulting in the imposition of the largest 
ever wide-ranging set of trade tariffs 
across a substantial proportion of our 
US business’ product ranges which 
significantly impacted on the execution 
of the planned integration of our US 
manufacturing facilities into Memphis. 

24

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTCSS acquisition

establishes us as

a key player in the

creative craft market

Summary 2020 financial results 
During the year Group Revenue 
increased by 10% to £494.2 million 
(2019: £448.4 million) including the 
effect of nearly one month of sales 
from CSS, with Adjusted profit 
before tax broadly flat year-on-year 
at £29.1 million (2019: £30.3 million). 
When comparing our financial results 
with the prior year it is important to 
note the impact in 2020 of the adoption 
of IFRS 16 which reduced Adjusted 
profit before tax by £0.7 million on a 
like-for-like basis compared to the prior 
year. Adjusted diluted earnings per 
share was 26.9p (2019: 29.1p) which 
reduced, despite flat profit levels, 
because of the higher diluted share 
number following the share raise in 
the final quarter of the financial year. 

We finished the year with a positive net 
cash balance of £42.3 million (2019: 
£17.1 million) supported by the share 
placings as part of the CSS acquisition. 

Average leverage for the year was 
0.9 times (2019: 1.3 times) and once 
again is a reflection of our focus on 
cash management during the 2020 
year. Furthermore, following the CSS 
acquisition on 3 March 2020 and the 
associated increase in our banking 
facilities we have access to over 
£200 million of debt facilities with 
significant headroom.

The Group finished the year with 
a profit before tax of £0.3 million 
(2019: £17.3 million). As can be 
expected in a year with the degree 
of challenges that we have faced and 
during a period of such significant 
strategic development, the Group has 
incurred increased disruption, which 
is reflected in the increased size and 
numbers of Adjusting items which 
together total £28.8 million (2019: 
£13.0 million). The main Adjusting 
items relate to the coronavirus impact, 
the acquisition of CSS, the Covid-19 
impact of US tariffs with China and the 
costs associated with the significant 
restructure of the US business during 
the year. 

Diluted earnings per share is 
16.9p (2019: 15.9p) reflecting the 
benefit of CSS tax credits relating to 
changes in the US tax rules that were 
enacted following the acquisition. 
See the detailed financial review for 
more information. 

In March 2020, Covid-19 resulted in 
unshipped customer orders following 
lockdown and lost production activity 
which reduced our ability to absorb 
overheads into inventory. The Directors 
estimate that the Group was unable to 
book sales in the year of £6.9 million, 
which together with increased costs 
resulting from lower overhead inventory 
absorption hit our Adjusted profit 
before tax by an estimated £3.8 million. 

The Board is recommending a final 
dividend of 5.75p, reflecting the strong 
financial position of the Group after 
its 2020 year and its Q1 2021 trading. 
This delivers a full year dividend of 8.75p 
and maintains the Group’s progressive 
dividend policy. 

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

25

CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER’S REVIEW CONTINUED

Our teams have been amazing in 
their response to the Covid-19 crisis.

Covid‑19
The impact of Covid-19 on the world, 
our trading partners and the business 
has been significant and is envisaged 
to impact the Group in some capacity 
for some time to come. We have taken 
swift and decisive actions to ensure the 
business comes through the pandemic 
in robust shape and ready to take on 
the many opportunities we continue to 
see for the Group going forward. 

Most importantly, the Board would 
like to extend our gratitude to every 
individual in the Design Group teams 
around the world. Our businesses have 
had to react dynamically as events have 
unfolded and our teams have ensured 
the business remains in good health 
while at the same time maintaining the 
safety of all of our employees. 

Specifically, during the crisis our 
teams have acted responsibly and 
professionally to deal with the impact 
the virus is having on the Group. 

Our reaction to Covid‑19
The impact on the Group of Covid-19 
started in January 2020 when it 
became clear that our factory and 
many of our suppliers and distributors 
in China were going to be closed from 
February 2020 as a result of lockdown 
in regions of China. We quickly 
focused on working with customers 
and suppliers to ensure as best as 
possible the continuation of supply; 
however, in March 2020 with the global 
‘lockdown’ in full swing our response 
intensified with a focus on three 
main areas:

• Our employees and operations
• Our customers and suppliers
• Our financial strength

Employees and operations – 
Our main priority remains the health 
and wellbeing of our teams around 
the world. We continue to closely 
follow government working protocols 
regarding self-isolation, social 
distancing and personal hygiene in 
order that everyone remains safe 
and well. The vast majority of our 
office-based teams continue to work 
remotely while our warehouse and 
manufacturing teams have adapted 
to ensure that they abide by all the 
required procedures. 

Customers and suppliers – As a 
business that serves over 210,000 
stores for over 11,000 customers in 
over 80 countries worldwide we have 
sought to strengthen our relationship 
with all our trading partners and 
have successfully dealt with a mix 
of situations, including customers 
who remained open throughout the 
lockdown period to those that closed 
their doors completely. We have 
maintained our service to those who 
remained open, working to adapt to the 
new requirements while maintaining an 
efficient supply chain and developing 
new designs and products for the 
various 2020 seasonal and everyday 
programmes. 

Financial strength – The Covid-19 
crisis hit at a time when the Group 
had its highest ever net cash balance 
of over £42 million and having just 
completed the CSS acquisition, 
we also had secured extended 
banking facilities of over £200 million. 
Furthermore, this crisis hit ahead of 
the peak working capital period and as 
such we were able to adjust our plans 
to ensure our seasonal working capital 
cycle matches our updated customer 
orders and therefore our seasonal 

working capital cycle will be lower than 
in previous years, despite the addition 
of CSS.

Our financial priority in March was to 
produce a set of Covid-19 scenarios 
which focused on updated sales 
expectations. In developing these 
plans each business unit has taken a 
view on a range of outcomes for 2021 
based on the impact of Covid-19 in 
each region. This includes working 
with customers to understand their 
expectations, and importantly includes 
confirming orders, where possible, 
for the crucial Christmas 2020 trading 
period. In addition, we have focused on 
implementing strong cost management 
across the Group. These actions 
across the Group included freezing 
all annual salary reviews, stopping all 
new hires, waiving all existing bonus 
schemes, reducing all discretionary 
spend and ultimately reducing the 
size of our teams. We accelerated the 
process of integrating CSS into our 
existing US business to ensure we 
maximised the synergy opportunities 
as quickly as possible. Finally, 
we implemented additional cash 
management actions which aimed to 
conserve cash through robust working 
capital plans and a reduction in our 
capital investment programme.

Our financial scenarios reflect a 
material reduction in expected revenue 
but importantly continue to deliver a 
profitable business that has significant 
cash headroom and is also positioned 
to ‘bounce-back’ when we return to a 
more normal trading environment. 

26

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTCOVID-19
RESPONSE.

We’re in this together

Our facilities and offices around the 
world have now reopened, all operating 
within government guidelines.

Where it is possible for our employees 
to work from home we have maintained 
this set-up for those that want to.

Business response
• Design Group have had both customers
who have remained open as well as
those who have closed their doors
completely during the lockdown period
• We have maintained our service to those
who have remained open and worked
hard to adapt to the new requirements
• New products and programmes for 2021

still being designed

• We have worked closely with our

suppliers through the crisis to maintain
supply chain integrity

Balance sheet resilience
• Net cash was £42 million at the time the
crisis hit, with extended bank facilities
secured earlier in the year as a result of
the CSS acquisition

• Detailed review of 2021 budget plans to
focus on updated sales expectations in
light of Covid-19

• Severe but plausible stress testing of

these plans to ensure that the Group still
has sufficient headroom at peak times
across the year

• Mitigating actions taken in the short term
include freezing annual salary reviews,
recruitment pause, and waiving of
existing bonus schemes
• Focused on accelerating the
integration of CSS to unlock
identified synergies sooner

Our number one priority has 
always been the health and 
wellbeing of our teams around 
the world.

Communities
• The UK business designed a card for

Captain Tom Moore on his 100th birthday

• We have produced free downloadable
pdf patterns for medical clothing and
face masks along with free video
tutorials

• We donated over 12,000 pieces of elastic
ribbon to a local hospital so they could
make masks for their employees
• Design Group’s sewing division made
over 1,000 face masks for employees
working across all US manufacturing
sites

• We donated and shipped over 200,000

yards of face mask making materials for
healthcare workers

• We donated hundreds of packets of

Perler Beads to a family in California who
have been making heart shaped pins
to sell to raise funds to support those
suffering as a result of the virus

Timeline of events:

December

January

February

March

April

May

First cases detected 
in Wuhan, China with 
a flu-like virus

Covid-19 reaches 
Europe with first 
cases detected in 
the UK

Decision taken in 
Poland to delay 
standard reopening 
of factory from 
April to May

Facility in Juarez, 
Mexico in government 
mandated shutdown

Sites in the US slowly 
open up after three 
or more weeks of 
enforced closure

India facility reopens 
after weeks of closure

Factory in Huizhou 
closed post Chinese 
New Year after cases 
in local area for 
two weeks

On return, many 
employees prevented 
from accessing the 
area due to other 
localised lockdowns

Many sites across 
the US on mandatory 
government 
shutdown

Factory in the 
Netherlands actively 
decides to close its 
doors for two weeks 
to protect employees

Factory and 
distribution facilities 
in the UK close 
due to government 
enforced lockdown 
for three weeks

Manufacturing facility 
in India closed due to 
government enforced 
lockdown

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

27

CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER’S REVIEW CONTINUED

CSS integration is well underway 
with over $5 million synergies 
already achieved.

The CSS integration is well 
underway. We have fully integrated 
the management teams and already 
delivered $5 million of synergy savings 
with more to come in the year. 

Looking ahead, with the world set 
to ease the Covid-19 lockdown and 
hoping to avoid a major second wave, 
we still face a number of uncertainties, 
including how quickly more normal 
levels of working will return and how 
healthy the global economy will be 
going forward. Assessing the potential 
range of outcomes, the Directors 
believe that although revenues will 
remain ahead of 2020 as a result 
of the full-year effect of the CSS 
acquisition, there will be a reduction in 
Group revenue from our pre Covid-19 
expectations for 2021. This assumes 
no significant Covid-19 second wave. 

Following our Q1 performance the 
Directors are increasingly optimistic 
about the outlook for the full year. 
We enter our peak trading period 
from July through to November with an 
orderbook that substantially covers our 
Covid-19 adjusted revenue forecasts 
and is ahead of last year. However, 
we remain cautious, recognising 
there remain increased uncertainties 
this year in relation to the potential 
for a second Covid-19 wave and the 
economic outlook post the virus. 
As such the Board continues to focus 
on managing the business within 
its banking facilities with the priority 
being on maintaining significant 
covenant headroom across all our 
potential scenarios.

Furthermore, assuming a return to 
more normal sales volumes by the end 
of 2021 and based on the anticipated 
delivery of synergies following the 
CSS acquisition and opportunities for 
further margin improvement and cost 
management, the Board would expect 
significant year-on-year growth in both 
revenues and earnings in 2022.

Q1 trading update & 
full year outlook
The 2021 financial year has started 
strongly against our Covid-19 forecasts 
across all regions. Reported revenues 
are higher than the prior year, benefitting 
from CSS which was acquired in March 
2020. Like-for-like revenues (excluding 
CSS) were ahead of management’s 
Covid-19 adjusted expectations 
but were down 27.7% year-on-year 
reflecting the impact of Covid-19 
on the business. CSS revenues are 
11.7% down year-on-year but ahead 
of our updated forecasts, benefitting 
from strong demand for Craft product 
during lockdown. Despite the lower 
like-for-like revenues Group Adjusted 
profit before tax benefitted from sales 
margin mix, effective cost management 
in the period, together with the CSS 
results which overall delivered a Group 
outcome in line with the prior year and 
significantly better than our Covid-19 
plan. A focus on cash management 
in the first quarter has delivered a net 
cash position at 30 June 2020 which is 
significantly ahead of management’s 
Covid-19 expectations and $63 million 
better than prior year, supported by 
the incremental equity raise in January 
and February 2020 as part of the CSS 
acquisition. As a result, at the end of the 
first quarter to 30 June 2020 the Group 
has significantly improved its headroom 
in its banking facilities and covenants.

28

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTA PATTERN  
FOR SUCCESS.

We want to 
be part of our 
customers’ 
success stories

We aim to be our customers’ partner 
of choice and make long and loyal 
partnerships with global retailers.

38%of sales are with the top 10  

global retailers

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

29

CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER’S REVIEW CONTINUED

Our business continues to be successful in 
driving long term growth as a result of our 
focus on our three key strategic drivers.

Our strategy 
Despite the challenges of Covid-19, 
our business continues to be 
successful in driving long term growth 
as a result of our focus on our three key 
strategic drivers, which underpin the 
Group’s goals. These are: 

To continue our growth trajectory 
with our customers, we follow key 
market trends including the increase 
in consumer demand for mainstream 
mass and discount retailers, as well as 
specialist ‘experiential’ retailers and 
e-commerce opportunities.

Working with the winners 
We are focused on increasing our 
revenue and profitability through 
growth in both existing and new 
channels and markets by ensuring 
we maintain excellent relationships 
with our key customers, as well as 
developing relationships with new 
customers. We want to be part of our 
customers’ success stories. As the 
retail market evolves and progresses, 
we work closely with our key customers 
with the aim of being their partner 
of choice going forward. Our top 10 
customers now account for 52% of 
our global revenues (2019: 48%).

In order to do this, we need to have the 
capability to manufacture and/or source 
a broad range of products, leveraging 
from improved sourcing processes 
as our business grows. Many of our 
customers work across multiple 
territories and have global ambitions. 
As such, our geographic and channel 
diversity in key markets is essential to 
help support our customers as they 
grow. Our businesses are experts in 
their territories and categories and we 
ensure that we know what works well for 
our customers in each of those markets. 

Our focus on working with the winners 
helps ensure we are benefitting as our 
customers continue to grow. But it also 
requires us to decide who we will not 
work with and this has been especially 
important during a year that has 
witnessed challenging retail markets, 
with a number of high profile retailers 
facing financial troubles. 

The CSS acquisition has resulted in 
a strengthening of our relationship 
with Walmart, the largest retailer in 
the world, and they now account for 
approximately 22% (2019: 18%) of 
the Group’s revenue. 

Design & innovation
Our customers look to us to be at 
the forefront of product design and 
innovation. This means we look to 
develop the best designs for innovative 
and quality products, while maintaining 
a focus on value and consumer appeal. 

The Group has succeeded in growing 
revenues through developing new and 
adjacent category products as well as 
increasing revenues in existing product 
areas. The addition of CSS product 
categories has strengthened the 
Group’s ability to offer a complete 
‘one-stop-shop’ to customers, 
including products not previously 
forming part of the Group’s portfolio 
such as craft and specialist packaging 
for the floral industry. 

We also continue to diversify our 
product range by focusing on occasions 
other than Christmas and following 
the acquisition of CSS, we expect our 
Everyday and Minor Seasons business 
to account for c.51% of global sales.

Technological development is a key 
part of this strategy and this extends to 
adapting to changes in consumer habits 
and being dynamic in providing new 
channels to purchase our products. 

Coupled with innovation in product 
design, we have also increased our 
focus on developing more sustainable 
products and improved sourcing, 
manufacturing and distribution 
to reduce our global carbon 
footprint. We believe this focus is 
not only the right strategy to help 
the environment but can also be a 
source of competitive advantage. 
Recent successes include developing 
a recyclable cracker range for 
customers in the UK, removing plastic 
from a selection of product packaging, 
removing non-recyclable glitter from a 
number of wrap, bag and card ranges 
and reducing the size of wrap cores 
to further rationalise shipping volumes 
and cost. We are committed to 
continuously increasing our attention to 
the environmental impact of the Group 
and have established an Environmental 
Taskforce that is working with third 
party specialist organisations. We wish 
to ensure that we can be regarded 
by our customers as leaders in 
bringing improved sustainable product 
solutions to all product categories in 
the Group’s portfolio. 

30

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTEfficiency & scale
As we grow we remain intent on 
driving up operating margins through 
investment in processes and people 
as well as by unlocking synergies 
following acquisitions, using our global 
reach and capabilities to leverage 
Group economies of scale. 

The year has seen significant capital 
investment across the Group totalling 
£11.1 million (2019: £7.9 million). Key 
areas included investment in a new 
printing press in the US, further bag 
making equipment in the UK to support 
the growth of our ‘not-for-resale’ 
business, and an automated wrap 
solution for our business in the 
Netherlands. As ever, we look for 
projects with compelling payback that 
help increase our capacity, improve our 
efficiency and deliver a better service. 

In addition, we are building the 
capabilities of the team around 
the Group. In the US, following the 
acquisition of CSS, we integrated and 
strengthened the senior management 
team, introducing new roles including 
a US Executive Chairman and a Chief 
Operating Officer. These new positions 
help extend the strength of the 
capability of our teams, bringing new 
skills that will ensure we are properly 
resourced to deliver our strategy.

Furthermore, the acquisition of CSS will 
have a transformational impact on the 
scale of the Group. CSS is one of the 
leading suppliers of Craft products in 
the US, with long standing relationships 
with major US retailers. Following 
the acquisition in March 2020, the 
Group has proceeded quickly with the 
integration and we are already seeing 
the benefits from the synergies and the 
increased scale of the overall business. 

Shareholder commitments
Our key strategic priorities all 
focus on our three commitments 
to shareholders, which are:

• double-digit growth in Adjusted
diluted earnings per share on
a 3 year CAGR basis – over the
past three years we have averaged
growth of 13%, which is lower
than hoped due to the impact
of Covid-19;

• maintaining Average leverage

between 1.0 times and 2.0 times –
this year saw leverage move below
1.0 times; and

• targeting dividend cover of 2.5 times
Adjusted diluted earnings per
share – in 2020 our dividend cover
was 3.1 times and we envisage
achieving 2.5 times by 2024.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

31

CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER’S REVIEW CONTINUED

Overall growth in Revenue and 
Adjusted operating profit for the Group.

Regional highlights
Overall, the Group has seen growth in both Revenue and Adjusted operating profit which increased to £33.4 million 
(2019: £32.6 million). 

 Segmental 
revenue

 Adjusted operating 
profit

 Adjusted operating  
margin

% Group revenue 

2020  

2019 

% growth 

2020  

2019 

% growth 

2020  

2019

56% 

24% 

14% 

7% 

(1%) 

Americas

UK

Europe

Australia

Elims/Central costs 

100%  Total 

$m 

£m 

€m 

AU$m 

£m 

£m 

355.9 

117.5 

78.3 

60.1 

(6.6) 

289.9 

127.1 

73.0 

70.3 

(5.5) 

494.2 

448.4 

23% 

(8%) 

7% 

(15%) 

20% 

10% 

20.1 

6.9 

11.6 

5.5 

(3.2) 

33.4 

20.0 

8.1 

10.0 

7.7 

(4.1) 

32.6 

1% 

(15%) 

5.6% 

5.9% 

16% 

14.8% 

9.2% 

(29%) 

(22%) 

6.9%

6.4%

13.7%

11.0%

2% 

6.8% 

7.3%

Americas
2020 was a transformational year for 
the Americas business with revenues 
representing 56% of Group revenues, 
but following the acquisition of CSS the 
US will account, on a proforma basis, 
for over 70% of Group revenues. 

The last 24 months have seen 
a significant change for our US 
business. Following the acquisition 
of Impact Innovations, Inc. (‘Impact’) 
in August 2018 we doubled the size 
of our US operations and during the 
2020 financial year we continued 
the significant consolidation and 
restructure of our printing, production 
and distribution facilities in Memphis. 
In January 2020 we announced the 
acquisition of CSS, a deal which again 
doubled the size of the US group. 

All this while the US and China were 
engaged in a trade dispute that brought 
significant disruption in the form 
of tariffs and knock-on operational 
challenges. Despite these challenges 
Revenue grew significantly, up 
23% year-on-year to $355.9 million 
(2019: $289.9 million), which included 
$19.9 million of revenues from CSS 
for the last month of the financial year 
following completion of the deal on 
3 March 2020.

Adjusted operating profit at 
$20.1 million was in line with the prior 
year (2019: $20.0 million) and included 
$4.3 million contribution from CSS. 
Adjusted operating margin declined 
to 5.6% from 6.9% in 2019, reflecting 
in part a full year of costs in 2020 from 
the Impact acquisition as compared to 
the prior year and also the impact of 
Covid-19. 

Organic revenue growth was 
primarily fuelled by a 7% growth in 
our Celebrations category and 26% 
growth in our sale of Craft & creative 
play products. Furthermore, during the 
year we developed new programmes 
in our gift and décor product ranges 
which are to be rolled out in 2021.

32

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTCREATING 
GROWTH.

Simplicity

#1

in home sewing patterns

Establishing us 
as a key supplier 
to the creative 
craft market

The acquisition of CSS 
brings Design Group 
firmly to the top of the 
craft market, with craft 
sales forming 41% of 
CSS’ net sales in 2019.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

33

CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER’S REVIEW CONTINUED

2020 was a transformational 
year for the Americas.

As stated overleaf, the evolution of the 
US tariffs with China (s301 tariffs) to 
25% in just a few months and, without 
advance warning, becoming applicable 
to more of our product categories, 
resulted in margin challenges for 
customer and supplier contracts 
received prior to the imposition of 
tariffs. As such, it was not possible to 
mitigate the incremental cost impact 
which would normally be the case 
as part of the normal annual pricing 
discussions. The Group has therefore 
identified the tariff costs as an Adjusting 
item of $4.4 million. Going into 2021 
the Group has had time to work 
with our customers and suppliers to 
mitigate the impact of tariffs through 
a mix of reshoring production, product 
design and finding alternative supply 
solutions. Importantly, by satisfying 
customer requirements, we have further 
consolidated our position as a key 
supplier thereby providing incremental 
opportunities for the future. 

In March 2020, the Group acquired 
CSS. This acquisition significantly 
enhances the product portfolio of the 
Americas group, bringing a wide range 
of complementary products as well as 
a new product category for the Group; 
Craft (which we have combined with 
our existing Creative play category). 

Regional highlights continued
Americas continued
The integration of the Impact business 
saw a period of significant change 
for the Americas group during 
2020, specifically the moving of our 
converting business from Midway, 
Georgia to bring it under the same roof 
as the printing operations in Memphis, 
Tennessee. We moved the machinery 
in January 2019 and spent the second 
quarter of the 2020 financial year 
effecting the integration ahead of the 
peak manufacturing cycle during May 
through to October. Unfortunately, 
while this integration was underway 
the US government announced the 
significant extension of tariffs in 
relation to products sourced from 
China. The impact of this was that our 
customers delayed decisions in signing 
off product designs and final orders 
resulting in production in Memphis 
being ‘bottle-necked’ into a narrower 
time period than initially planned. 
As a consequence, the integration 
did not go as smoothly as expected. 
The Group has identified Adjusting 
items of $7.1 million in relation to the 
integration, including outsourcing 
and overtime costs and additional 
customer charges. As we look forward 
to the current financial year the 
Memphis facility is operating to plan 
and has already successfully fully 
commissioned its new state-of-the-art 
printing press, ensuring the Americas 
group delivers on the final phase of 
the Impact integration and synergies 
realisation.

The acquisition doubles the size of 
the Americas group and brings with 
it many benefits, including providing 
customers with a substantially 
enhanced ‘one-stop-shop’ through 
their leading presence within the US 
craft market. The acquisition also:

• reinforces the Group’s position as
the global industry leader in gift
packaging;

• rapidly scales the Group’s

‘Everyday’ product category, online
revenues and presence within the
floral decorative packaging industry;
and

• substantially increases the

manufacturing and distribution
capability of the Group.

Furthermore, it is anticipated that 
operational and financial synergies 
of a minimum of £10 million per 
annum by 2024 are achievable 
following the acquisition. Since the 
acquisition completed in March 2020 
we strengthened and integrated our 
US senior management team and 
they are working alongside our third 
party project management office to 
oversee the integration of the business 
and the delivery of the synergy 
plans. In the first month following 
acquisition over $5.0 million of annual 
savings were achieved through a mix 
of headcount and public company 
listing cost reductions. We have 
included within 2020 Adjusting items 
$3.0 million relating to the severance 
costs associated with the headcount 
reductions. The progress in terms of 
delivering the synergy plans to date is 
ahead of schedule.

34

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTAustralia
Our performance in Australia has 
been in line with expectations 
and as previously communicated. 
Revenues declined 15% year-on-year 
to AU$60.1 million compared to 
AU$70.3 million in 2019. Adjusted 
operating profit was AU$5.5 million 
(2019: AU$7.7 million) with Adjusted 
operating margin falling to 9.2% 
from 11.0% in 2019. 

The decline in Revenues and 
Adjusted operating profit is a result 
of lost business with certain national 
retailers during the year and the active 
decision by the Australia team to not 
continue to do business with some 
customers whose recent performance 
has been volatile. 

Ongoing investment in capital projects 
improving efficiency across the Group.

Europe
Europe had another excellent year with 
Revenues of €78.3 million, 7% up on 
the prior year (2019: €73.0 million) and 
Adjusted operating profit growing 
by 16% to €11.6 million compared 
to €10.0 million in 2019. Adjusted 
operating margin grew year-on-year 
to 14.8% (2019: 13.7%). 

The European business continues 
to benefit from its excellent trading 
relationships with key leading and 
growing retailers across Europe – 
as they grow, our business grows 
with them. 

Given the efficiencies that the business 
in Europe have derived from their 
state-of-the-art printing press that 
came online in 2019, they were able 
to support the Americas business in 
the latter part of the year, printing and 
shipping gift-wrap product. The Group 
will continue to maximise cross-Group 
opportunities over the coming years. 

In 2020, our European manufacturing 
facility also upgraded its converting 
lines to deliver an automated 
end-to-end production line taking the 
product from conversion all the way 
to packing. This facility came online at 
the end of the financial year and we are 
anticipating efficiency benefits from 
this production process fully in 2021. 

UK
The UK business accounts for nearly 
one quarter of the Group’s business 
and as anticipated Revenues for 
the UK business were down on the 
prior year at £117.5 million (2019: 
£127.1 million). Adjusted operating 
profit at £6.9 million was lower than 
in 2019 as a result of the impact of 
Covid-19. 

Further unification of our UK 
businesses continued in 2020 with 
a move of our Trade business under 
one roof into our Newport Pagnell site 
during the year. This, together with 
other required reorganisation, has 
resulted in redundancies. These costs 
of £0.4 million are Adjusting items in 
the year. 

We have continued to invest in our 
‘not-for-resale’ bag activities with 
a second production line going live 
during the year. We are encouraged 
by increased demand for these 
sustainable products, albeit demand 
is anticipated to be reduced going 
forward as a result of Covid-19. 
As such, we have impaired the 
residual value of the two machines by 
£0.4 million in light of reduced future 
cash flows in the coming years and 
taken the cost of this impairment 
through Adjusting items in the year. 

Following the exit of the UK from the 
European Union on 31 January 2020, 
the Group has seen minimal impact 
to date on the business. We remain 
prepared for Brexit in whatever form 
it will take and continue to monitor the 
situation as negotiations in relation to 
the final exit deal are concluded. 

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

35

CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER’S REVIEW CONTINUED

Newly formed Craft & creative play product 
category is a key driver of future growth.

Our products and brands
Amongst the factors creating our Group’s success is our well diversified, yet complementary, product portfolio, underpinning 
our ‘Working with the winners’ strategy. Our range of products enables us to provide a compelling portfolio of products and 
services, making us an attractive ‘Supplier of choice’ for our retail partners. 

Revenue by product category

Celebrations

Craft & creative play

Stationery

Gifting

‘Not-for-resale’ consumables

Total

2020

2019

75% 

£371.7m 

77% 

£345.5m

7% 

4% 

11% 

3% 

£30.2m 

£21.3m 

£54.7m 

£16.3m 

£494.2m 

4% 

4% 

11% 

4% 

£16.3m

£20.7m

£46.1m

£19.9m

£448.4m

Our product offering was further enhanced this year as a result of the acquisition of CSS, enabling us to introduce a 
new Craft product category throughout the Group. This includes needlecraft and sewing products and a particularly 
strong position in the sewing patterns market. CSS is a market leader in the US craft market as well as being active in 
complementary Design Group categories. Design Group can further leverage this whilst strengthening our ‘one-stop-shop’ 
offering. Following the establishment of the Craft category, the Group has re-evaluated our product offering as follows: 

• Celebrations including gift packaging, greeting cards, crackers and partyware
• Craft & creative play is the new category this year and includes creative play products, sewing patterns, general and

kids craft products, and buttons

• Gifting includes our design-led giftware products and photo frames
• Stationery includes home, school and office stationery items
• ‘Not-for-resale’ consumables include branded store bags, point of purchase products and also floral packaging,

which is a new product line acquired with CSS

36

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORT 
Our design teams pride themselves 
on creating innovative designs which 
are both appealing and affordable 
to our customers and, in turn, their 
customers. This core strength is a key 
focus for the Group as we believe it 
underpins our success. 

Our focus on product diversification 
and continued development of 
attractive and innovative products has 
driven growth in the sales of the Group, 
across all consumer categories. 

By virtue of our focus on design and 
innovation, this year the UK team have 
launched an ‘Eco Nature Range’ which 
includes gift packaging, crackers, 
stationery and giftware that is proudly 
100% designed and manufactured 
in the UK. This sustainable range 
supports a circular economy using only 
recycled materials and resulting in a 
fully recyclable product range.

Further detail on our environmental 
developments can be seen on pages 
53 to 55.

Our teams in America have also been 
demonstrating cutting edge innovation 
in response to the global pandemic 
by using our skills and materials 
to produce face masks within our 
New York facilities, mask components 
from Design Group materials (such as 
ribbon) and face shields in our factory 
that produces point of purchase 
products. By deploying existing 
expertise to create new product ranges 
in short time scales, we are proud to 
be contributing to communities in the 
face of the Covid-19 crisis. 

The Group’s ‘in-house’ manufacturing 
facilities in the UK, US and the 
Netherlands enable us to have locally 
produced product in each of these 
regions, supporting local economies 
and reducing adverse effects on the 
environment. Overall, 35% of the 
Group’s revenue was manufactured 
in-house, up from 30% last year. 
Outsourced products are provided by 
a broad base of carefully selected and 
compliant suppliers with the Group 
being one of the world’s largest buyers 
across the categories that we sell. 

In the last year, we estimate that 
more than 700 million items and over 
75,000 SKUs have been delivered to 
our customers.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

37

CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER’S REVIEW

The Directors 
are increasingly 
optimistic about 
the outlook for 
2021 and beyond

Giles Willits
Chief Financial Officer

Detailed financial review
The Group financial performance in 2020 has been impacted by a number of factors which together have had a material 
impact on the full year results of the Group. These factors are Adjusting items and IFRS 16 accounting standard adoption. 

As part of the presentation of the results each of these factors is highlighted to provide a detailed explanation of its impact 
on the performance of the business year-on-year. The summary income statement below details the Adjusting items:  

Revenue

Gross profit

Overheads

Operating profit

Finance charge

Profit before tax

Tax

Profit after tax

2020

2019

Reported  Adjusting items
£m

£m 

Adjusted  

£m

Reported  Adjusting items 
£m

£m 

494.2 

75.1

(70.5)

4.6

(4.3)

0.3

14.5

14.8

— 

494.2 

448.4 

15.8

13.0

28.8

—

28.8

(20.4)

8.4

90.9

(57.5)

33.4

(4.3)

29.1

(5.9)

23.2

82.9

(63.1)

19.8

(2.5)

17.3

(4.0)

13.3

— 

1.7

11.1

12.8

0.2

13.0

(3.1)

9.9

Adjusted  

£m

448.4

84.6

(52.0)

32.6

(2.3)

30.3

(7.1)

23.2

38

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORT 
Revenue for the year of £494.2 million 
grew 10% over the previous year (2019: 
£448.4 million) of which 7% relates 
to organic growth, with the balance 
relating to CSS post acquisition sales. 
At like-for-like foreign exchange rates 
revenue grew 9%. Adjusted operating 
profit increased by 2.4% to £33.4 
million (2019: £32.6 million) and 3.3% at 
like-for-like exchange rates. Adjusted 
operating margin remained largely 
flat at 6.8% (2019: 7.3%). Gross margin 
fell in the year, largely as a result of 
customer and product mix, to 18.4% 
(2019: 18.9%). Adjusted overheads 
as a percentage of revenue remained 
constant at 11.6% year-on-year. 
Overall Adjusted profit before tax 
was broadly flat at £29.1 million (2019: 
£30.3 million) after taking into account 
the impact of IFRS 16 which reduced 
2020 profit by £0.7 million and despite 
the impact of Covid-19. 

The Group finished the year with a 
profit before tax of £0.3 million (2019: 
£17.3 million). As can be expected in 
a year with the degree of challenges 
that we have faced and during a 
period of such significant strategic 
development, the Group has incurred 
increased disruption, which is reflected 
in the increased size and numbers of 
Adjusting items which together total 
£28.8 million (2019: £13.0 million). 
Further details of the Adjusting items 
are detailed below. Adjusted profit 
after tax was £23.2 million (2019: 
£23.2 million) with profit after tax 
for the year at £14.8 million (2019: 
£13.3 million).

Impact of Covid‑19
In March 2020, Covid-19 resulted in 
unshipped customer orders as a result 
of the lockdown of our facilities across 
the Group and lost production activity 
which reduced our ability to absorb 
overheads into inventory. 

The Directors estimate that the Group 
was unable to book sales in the year 
of £6.9 million which together with 
increased costs resulting from lower 
overhead inventory absorption hit our 
Adjusted profit before tax by an 
estimated £3.8 million.

Finance expenses
Finance costs of £4.3 million are 
higher compared to the prior year 
of £2.3 million (excluding adjusting 
finance charges). This primarily 
reflects the impact of IFRS 16 which 
added £1.6 million to the full year 
charge. In addition, arrangement fees 
of £0.3 million were incurred in 2020 
relating to the additional facility taken on 
for the purposes of the enlarged Group 
facilities as part of the CSS acquisition. 
Adjusting for these factors, the charge 
would have been £2.4 million, which 
is in line with prior year. Adjusted 
interest cover after stripping out IFRS 
16 was 12.0 times in 2020 compared to 
14.1 times in the prior year. 

Adjusting items
The Group has incurred Adjusting items in the year to 31 March 2020 totalling £28.8 million (2019: £13.0 million). 

Adjusting items

Losses/(gains) and transaction costs relating to acquisitions and disposals of businesses 

Acquisition integration and restructuring costs 

Impairment of assets

Covid-19 costs

US tariffs

Amortisation of acquired intangibles

LTIP (credit)/charges

Total

2020

£3.3m 

£9.4m 

£9.5m

£0.5m

£3.5m

2019

£2.4m

£6.0m

—

—

—

£2.8m 

(£0.2m) 

£1.6m

£3.0m

£28.8m 

£13.0m

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

39

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER’S REVIEW CONTINUED

Adjusting items continued
Adjusting items are material items of 
unusual or non-recurring nature which 
represent gains or losses which are 
separately presented by virtue of the 
nature, size and/or incidence. These 
items are as follows: 

Losses/(gains) and transaction 
costs relating to acquisitions 
and disposals of businesses – 
£3.3 million
During the year ended 31 March 2020 
the Group incurred a net cost of 
£3.3 million in relation to the acquisition 
and disposal of businesses. The main 
areas of expenditure relate to £3.9 million 
of due diligence, legal and adviser fees 
associated with the acquisition of CSS 
which was completed on 3 March 2020. 
In addition, £0.9 million of acquisition 
related employee payments from the 
Impact transaction in 2019 which lock 
in and incentivise legacy talent. 

These costs were offset by a profit 
of £1.5 million relating to the disposal 
of our Shaoxing factory facilities 
in China which was completed on 
24 February 2020. This facility, which 
was acquired as part of the Impact 
transaction, completed in August 2018 
and the disposal formed part of the 
planned integration programme. 

Acquisition integration and 
restructuring costs – £9.4 million
For the years ended 31 March 2020 
and 31 March 2019 the acquisition 
integration and restructuring costs 
relate to the ongoing UK unification 
initiative (£0.4 million), the integration 
of manufacturing facilities in the US, 
following the acquisition of Impact, 
which lead to the combination of 
printing and converting processes 
into one site in Memphis (£5.5 million), 
transition and retention costs 
(£1.1 million) and costs relating to 
the CSS integration (£2.4 million).

The costs associated with the 
Memphis project were calculated 
by evaluating the expense associated 
with the operating challenges in the 
manufacturing environment created 

as a result of the integration alongside 
the delays to productions plans as 
a result of the rapid development of 
US tariffs with China and customers 
delaying sign off on artwork and 
packaging. 

All these costs arise directly as a 
result of integrating processes for 
the first time during the peak period. 
The costs include expenditure for one 
time outsourcing to meet production 
demands, additional warehousing 
to store inventory due to tariff driven 
delayed production and shipping and 
the subsequent knock-on customer 
related penalties. 

The CSS integration and restructuring 
costs were incurred following the 
acquisition of CSS and primarily relate 
to severance costs of redundant roles 
in the legacy CSS business.

Covid‑19 related costs, 
including impairment of assets – 
£10.0 million
As part of the review of the impact 
of Covid-19 we have undertaken a 
detailed review of the potential impact 
on assets within the business alongside 
incremental costs we have incurred 
as a result of the virus. The review 
of receivables, fixed assets and 
inventories identified the need for higher 
than usual provisions/impairments at 
the year end as a result of the virus. 

£9.5 million of provisions/impairments 
were identified and are split as follows: 
£5.9 million of additional inventory 
provisions recognising the lower 
than expected sales activity in 2021, 
£3.1 million in relation to receivables as 
at 31 March 2020 to reflect increased 
credit risk amongst our customer base 
resulting from Covid-19 and £0.5 million 
in relation to inventory asset and fixed 
asset impairment. 

In addition, £0.5 million of incremental 
costs have been identified relating 
primarily to direct labour costs that 
are considered abnormal following 
the forced closures of manufacturing 
facilities across the Group. Certain of 
these costs will also continue into 2021. 

US tariffs – £3.5 million
US tariff costs incurred in the year had 
a significant impact on our business. 
The rapid evolution of tariffs became 
applicable to more of our product 
categories with no advance warning. 
The timing of the introduction of tariffs 
meant a majority of our purchase 
orders had already been agreed with 
customers and suppliers, effectively 
creating a situation where the US 
business was locked into commitments 
that could not be renegotiated. 

This impact is not repeated going 
forward as the business is able to 
mitigate the effect of tariffs in future 
years as part of the negotiation of 
contracts with customers and suppliers. 

LTIP credit – £0.2 million 
As part of our senior management 
remuneration, the Group operates 
a Long Term Incentive Plan (‘LTIP’) 
in the form of options for ordinary 
shares of the Group. In accordance 
with accounting principles, despite 
this plan not being a cash cost to the 
business, a share-based payments 
charge is taken to the income 
statement. We consider that these 
charges and the associated social 
security charges do not form part of 
the underlying operational costs and 
therefore include these as Adjusting 
items. In the year ended 31 March 2020 
there was an IFRS 2 credit due to the 
lowered expectations in respect of 
future schemes vesting.

Amortisation of acquired 
intangibles – £2.8 million
The Group has trade names and 
brands acquired as part of the 
acquisition of The Lang Companies, 
Inc., Impact Innovations, Inc., CSS 
Industries, Inc. and Biscay Pty 
Greetings Ltd which are amortised 
over their estimated useful lives. 
Amortisation of £2.8 million has 
been incurred in the year ended 
31 March 2020.

40

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTTaxation
The Group aims to manage its tax 
affairs in an open and transparent 
manner, including being fully compliant 
with all applicable rules and regulations 
in tax jurisdictions in which it operates. 
We have not entered into any tax 
avoidance or otherwise aggressive 
tax planning schemes and the Group 
continues to operate its tax affairs in 
this manner. 

The tax credit for the year ended 
31 March 2020 is £14.5 million 
compared to a £4.0 million charge 
in the prior year. The significant 
year-on-year change is driven by 
the US Coronavirus Aid, Relief, 

and Economic Security (CARES) 
Act which came into effect on 
25 March 2020 which, as part of the 
stimulus package, extended the time 
period for which Net Operating Losses 
(NOLs) could be carried back against 
profits in US businesses. As part of 
the acquisition of CSS, the Group 
inherited substantial NOLs in the CSS 
Group which were then able to be 
carried back against historical profits. 
This has resulted in the recognition of a 
$17 million future cash inflow as a result 
of the NOL carryback claims currently 
being filed. We expect these to be paid 
during 2021. 

The effective tax rate on Adjusted 
profit before tax is 20.1% (2019: 
23.4%). The reduction is a reflection of 
the UK tax rate remaining at 19% rather 
than reducing to 17% as previously 
enacted which has resulted in deferred 
tax assets being revalued at the higher 
rate, the recognition of overseas tax 
losses in China and Asia along with 
the release of an uncertain tax position 
in relation to our European business 
following the adoption of IFRIC 23. 

Overall tax paid in comparison to the 
prior year increased to £4.7 million 
(2019: £3.7 million) largely as a result 
of the growth in the Group. 

Earnings per share
Adjusted earnings per share are 26.9p (2019: 29.1p) reducing year-on-year by 8% as a result of the flat profit levels over a 
higher diluted share number following the share raise in early 2020 and the impact of Covid-19. Diluted earnings per share 
are 16.9p (2019: 15.9p). The reconciliation between Reported and Adjusted earnings per share can be seen below:

Earnings attributable to equity holders of the Company 

Adjustments 

Adjusting items (net of non-controlling interest effect) 

Tax charge/(relief) on adjustments (net of non-controlling interest effect) 

Adjusting item – tax credit (US loss carryback) 

Adjusted earnings

Weighted average number of shares  

Basic weighted average number of shares outstanding 

Dilutive effect of employee share option plans 

Diluted weighted average ordinary shares 

Basic earnings per share

Impact of Adjusting items

Basic adjusted earnings per share

Diluted earnings per share

Diluted adjusted earnings per share 

Dividend
The Board are recommending a final 
dividend of 5.75p, reflecting the strong 
financial position of the Group after its 
2020 year and its first quarter trading in 
2021. This delivers a full-year dividend 
of 8.75p and maintains the Group’s 
progressive dividend policy.

Return on capital employed
Improving the Return on capital 
employed continues to be a key 
target for each of the business units. 

Overall, the Group saw the Return 
on capital employed reduce 
year-on-year to 21.6% in 2020 from 
24.3% in 2019, which reflects the 
higher level of capital employed 
following the acquisition of CSS.

2020

2019

£14.1m 

£11.9m

£28.6m 

£12.9m

(£6.5m) 

(£3.0m)

(£13.8m)

—

£22.3m 

£21.8m

82.6m 

0.5m

83.1m 

17.0p 

10.0p 

27.0p 

16.9p 

26.9p

73.6m

1.3m

74.9m

16.2p

13.4p

29.6p

15.9p

29.1p

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

41

 
 
CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER’S REVIEW CONTINUED

Cash flow and net cash
The Group finished the year end with a significantly higher cash balance compared to 31 March 2019, of £42.3 million  
(2019: £17.1 million) showing cash improvement of £25.2 million. This was primarily a result of the incremental fundraise in 
the last quarter of the financial year which supported the acquisition of CSS. Cash conversion was 84.4% (2019: 130.5%) 
with Adjusted cash generated from operations of £40.6 million (2019: £50.5 million) down year-on-year reflecting working 
capital movements. Adjusting items reduced cash generated from operations by a further £13.1 million to £27.5 million  
(2019: £44.8 million).

Cash flow

Adjusted EBITDA

Movements in working capital

Adjusted cash generated from operations

Adjusting items

Cash generated from operations

Capital expenditure (net of disposals of property, plant and equipment) 

Business acquired (including cash on acquisition) 

Tax paid

Interest paid (including Adjusting items) 

Payments of lease liabilities

Dividends paid (including those paid to non-controlling interests) 

Proceeds from issue of share capital 

FX and other

Movement in net cash 

Opening net cash

Closing net cash

2020

2019

£48.1m 

£38.7m

(£7.5m) 

£11.8m

£40.6m 

£50.5m

(£13.1m) 

(£5.7m)

£27.5m 

£44.8m

(£10.7m) 

(£2.6m)

(£87.7m) 

(£65.6m)

(£4.7m) 

(£4.0m) 

(£6.6m)

(£3.7m)

(£2.1m)

—

(£7.1m) 

(£5.7m)

£116.9m 

£48.3m

£1.6m 

(£0.7m)

£25.2m 

£12.7m

£17.1m 

£42.3m 

£4.4m

£17.1m

Working capital 
The net working capital outflow in the 
year of £7.5 million (2019: inflow of 
£11.8 million) has been impacted by 
the timing of the acquisition of CSS in 
March 2020 in a similar manner to the 
effect the Impact acquisition had in 
the prior year. In 2020, post acquisition 
working capital movements in relation 
to CSS resulted in a £7.5 million cash 
inflow, while in 2019 the Impact post 
acquisition working capital cash inflow 
was £24.6 million. 

Stripping out the effect of the 
acquisitions on working capital 
movements there was an underlying 
outflow of £15 million in 2020 
(compared to £12.8 million in 2019) 
primarily reflecting the need for 
additional working capital to support 
the growth of the core businesses. 

In the current Covid-19 environment 
the Group continues to actively track 
debtors and credit risk profiles of all 
of our customers to ensure we try 
to mitigate as far as possible any 
additional exposure to credit risk. 
Doubtful debt write off in the year was 
less than 0.2% of revenue (2019: 0.1%), 
a continued testament to our proactive 
approach to dealing with credit risk. 

Capital expenditure 
During the year we invested 
£11.1 million (2019: £7.9 million). 
The key projects included a new, 
state-of-the-art printing press in the 
US, the automated converting line 
project in the Netherlands, the second 
bag line in the UK and ongoing costs 
in relation to a new ERP system in the 
Americas operations. 

CSS acquisition and 
associated share capital issue
In March 2020 the Group acquired 
100% of the equity of CSS Industries, 
Inc. The deal completed for a total 
consideration of $122.8 million 
including the repayment of the 
CSS debt at the date of acquisition. 

The consideration represented 
$9.40 per share for CSS shareholders. 

The acquisition was funded through 
the proceeds of an equity share 
placing which took place over two 
tranches in January and February 
2020, in total raising £116.9 million 
of net proceeds. Full details of the 
assets acquired, including inventory 
and brands, can be found in note 28 to 
the consolidated financial statements. 

42

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Average leverage and 
banking facilities
Our business is seasonal in nature, 
requiring the build of inventory 
and receivables ahead of the peak 
Christmas trading period. As a result, 
despite starting and ending the 
financial year with net cash we trade for 
a period of our financial year with a net 
debt position. 

As such, Average leverage is the 
key measure the Group adopts in 
relation to cash and working capital 
management. We seek to maintain 
our average leverage position in the 
range between 1.0 times and 2.0 
times over the long term. Average 
leverage for the year to 31 March 2020 
was 0.9 times, down from 1.3 times 
in the prior year. This reflects an 
improvement in the Adjusted EBITDA 
compared to the prior year but also a 
year-on-year reduction in the average 
bank debt from £48.8 million in 2019 
to £34.6 million in 2020.

Our measure of Average leverage 
excludes the impact of IFRS 16 and 
therefore we exclude lease liabilities 
from our measurement of debt and 
also reduce Adjusted EBITDA for 
lease payments. This mirrors the 
approach taken by the banks in 
measuring leverage for the purposes 
of the banking facilities and therefore is 
considered the most relevant measure 
for management to adopt.

Banking facilities renewed 
and extended during the year
On 5 June 2019, the Group entered into 
a new three year Group facility with a 
club of five banks chosen to reflect and 
support the geographical spread of 
the Group. The banks within the club 
are HSBC, NatWest, BNP Paribas, Sun 
Trust and PNC. On 17 January 2020, 
the facility was increased to support 
the acquisition and working capital 
requirements of CSS which completed 
in March 2020. 

The facilities, which run to May 2022, 
comprise:

• a revolving credit facility (‘RCF A’)

of $95.0 million;

• a further flexible revolving credit
facility (‘RCF B’) with availability
varying from month to month of
up to £130.0 million. This RCF is
flexed to meet our working capital
requirements during those months
when inventory is being built within
our annual business cycle and is £nil
when not required, minimising carry
costs; and

• an invoice financing arrangement
in Hong Kong, maximum limit
$18.0 million, but dependent on
level of eligible receivables.

In total, the accessible facilities at 
approximately £212.0 million are more 
than sufficient to cover our peak 
requirements. Being partially framed 
in US dollars the facilities also provide 
a hedge against currency movements. 
The facilities, which do not amortise 
with time, include an additional 
uncommitted amount to help finance 
potential acquisitions.

Invoice financing arrangements are 
secured over the trade receivables that 
they are drawn on. The RCF facilities are 
secured with a fixed and floating charge 
over all other assets of the Group. 

There are financial covenants 
(measured on pre IFRS 16 accounting 
definitions), tested quarterly, attached 
to the existing facilities as follows:

1. interest cover, being the ratio of

adjusted earnings before interest,
tax, depreciation and amortisation
(EBITDA) as defined by the banking
facility to interest on a rolling twelve
month basis; and

2. leverage, being the ratio of debt
to adjusted EBITDA as defined
by the banking facility on a rolling
twelve-month basis.

There is a further covenant tested 
monthly in respect of the working 
capital RCF by which available asset 
cover must not fall below agreed levels 
relative to amounts drawn.

We also have access to supplier 
financing arrangements from certain 
customers which we utilise at certain 
times of the year. 

Foreign exchange 
exposure management 
Our foreign exchange (‘FX’) exposure 
is split into two areas:

Translational FX exposure – 
this exposure is the result of the 
requirement for the Group to report its 
results in one currency. 

This necessitates the translation of our 
regional business units’ local currency 
financial results into the Group’s 
adopted reported currency. The overall 
impact on revenue and profits from 
currency movements in 2020 when 
compared to 2019 is not significant. 
Revenue in 2019 would have been 
£4.9 million higher if translated at 2020 
FX rates, with 2019 Adjusted profit 
before tax £0.3 million higher. 

Following the CSS acquisition in 
March 2020 and the significant 
increased concentration of the Group 
revenues and earnings to the US 
dollar, it was announced as part of 
the acquisition that the Group would 
be switching the Group’s reporting 
currency from sterling to US dollars. 
This will significantly reduce the 
potential exposure of the Group to 
translational currency movements 
going forward.

Transactional FX exposure – this FX 
exposure is managed carefully by the 
Group as it can result in additional cash 
outflows if not managed appropriately. 
In response to this risk the Group 
adopts an active hedging policy to 
ensure further foreign exchange 
movements remain mitigated as far 
as possible. In addition, a reasonable 
proportion of this hedging is achieved 
through natural hedges whereby our 
purchases and sales in US dollars are 
offset. The balance of our hedging is 
achieved through forward exchange 
contracts and similar derivatives.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

43

CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER’S REVIEW CONTINUED

New accounting standards
IFRS 16 ‘Leases’ is effective for accounting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2019 and as such the Group has 
adopted the standard in the year to 31 March 2020. The Group has used the modified retrospective approach resulting 
in a gross right-of-use asset as at 31 March 2020 of £66.7 million and a corresponding lease liability as at the same date 
of £76.9 million, therefore reducing net current assets by £10.2 million. This includes the right-of-use assets and lease 
liabilities in relation to CSS which were £31.8 million and £37.0 million respectively on acquisition. 

The Group has elected not to recognise right-of-use assets and lease liabilities for short term leases or low-value assets and 
will continue to expense the lease payments associated with these leases on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease. 
The effect of IFRS 16 on our key metrics can be seen below:

Adjusted EBITDA 

Depreciation (including software amortisation) 

Adjusted operating profit 

Finance expenses

Adjusted profit before tax 

Adjusted diluted earnings per share

2020

IFRS 16
impact 

Pre IFRS 16 

Adjusted

£40.2m 

£7.9m 

£48.1m

(£7.7m) 

(£7.0m) 

(£14.7m)

£32.5m 

£0.9m 

£33.4m

(£2.7m) 

(£1.6m) 

(£4.3m)

£29.8m 

(£0.7m) 

£29.1m

27.6p 

(0.7p) 

26.9p

These forecasts, which have been 
produced and reviewed in detail by 
the Board and take into account 
the significant seasonal working 
capital cycle of the business, have 
been sensitised to reflect severe but 
plausible adverse downturns in the 
current assumptions including the 
potential for a second wave of the 
pandemic later in the year.

Management has also produced 
a maximum stress forecast which 
has been deliberately engineered to 
challenge the Group’s liquidity position 
and covenant performance (as detailed 
above in the banking facilities section) 
during the forecast period. 

These forecasts and additional analysis 
demonstrated that the Group has 
sufficient excess headroom for the 
Group to meet its obligations as they 
fall due for a forecast period of more 
than twelve months beyond the date 
of signing these accounts. As such, 
the Directors do not see any practical 
regulatory or legal restrictions which 
would limit their ability to fund the 
different regions of the business as 
required to the extent of the Group’s 
available resources.

Accordingly, the Directors have 
continued to adopt the going concern 
basis of accounting in preparing the 
financial statements. 

Financial position and 
going concern basis 
The Group’s net assets increased 
by £127.5 million to £303.1 million at 
31 March 2020 (2019: £175.6 million) 
primarily reflecting the acquisition of 
CSS within the 2020 financial year.

In light of the ongoing Covid-19 
pandemic, the Directors have paid 
particularly close attention to their 
assessment of going concern 
in preparation of these financial 
statements. The Group is well 
capitalised at the year end with a 
net cash position of £42.3 million 
(£67.1 million of cash and £24.8 
million of bank overdraft excluding 
loan arrangement fees). The Group 
is currently ahead of forecasts which 
were reviewed in detail during the 
year end process in light of Covid-19 
and the likely change in consumer 
behaviours that could drive our 
customers to change their spending 
with us. 

44

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORT 
  
 
  
 
Alternative performance 
measures
This review includes alternative 
performance measures (‘APMs’) 
that are presented in addition to the 
standard IFRS metrics. The Directors 
believe that these APMs provide 
important additional information 
regarding the adjusted performance 
of the business, including trends, 
performance and position of the 
Group. APMs are used to enhance the 
comparability of information between 
reporting periods and segmental 
business units by adjusting for 
exceptional or uncontrollable factors 
which affect IFRS measures, to aid 
the understanding of the Group’s 
performance. Consequently, APMs are 
used by the Directors and management 
for strategic and performance analysis, 
planning, reporting and reward setting. 
APMs reflect the results of the business 
excluding Adjusting items, which 
are items that are material and of an 
unusual or non-recurring nature. 

The APMs and the definitions used are 
listed below: 

• Adjusted EBITDA – EBITDA before

In addition, the Group uses APMs 
in order to calculate other key 
performance metrics, including:

Adjusting items

• Adjusted operating profit –
Profit before finance charges,
tax and Adjusting items

• Adjusted profit before tax –

Profit before tax and Adjusting items

• Adjusted profit after tax –

Profit after tax before Adjusting
items and associated tax effect
• Adjusted earnings per share –
Fully diluted earnings per share
before Adjusting items and
associated tax effect

• Average leverage – Average bank
debt (being average debt measured
before lease liabilities) divided by
Adjusted EBITDA reduced for lease
payments

• Cash conversion – Adjusted cash
generated from operations divided
by Adjusted EBITDA

• Adjusted operating margin –

Adjusted operating profit divided
by revenue

• Return on capital employed –

Adjusted operating profit divided
by monthly average net capital
employed (excluding cash and
intangibles)

• Adjusted interest cover – Finance
charges divided by Adjusted profit
before tax (excluding IFRS 16)

Adjusting items 
Further details of the items categorised as Adjusting items are disclosed in more detail in note 3 to the financial statements.

A full reconciliation between our adjusted and reported results is provided below: 

Adjusted EBITDA

Adjusting items

EBITDA 

Adjusted operating profit

Adjusting items

Reported operating profit

Adjusted profit before tax

Adjusting items

Reported profit before tax

Adjusted profit after tax 

Adjusting items

Reported profit after tax

Adjusted earnings per share

Adjusting items

Reported diluted earnings per share 

2020

2019

£48.1m 

£38.7m

(£25.7m) 

(£11.3m)

£22.4m 

£27.4m

£33.4m 

£32.6m

(£28.8m) 

(£12.9m)

£4.6m 

£19.7m

£29.1m 

£30.3m

(£28.8m) 

(£13.0m)

£0.3m 

£17.3m

£23.2m 

£23.2m

(£8.4m) 

(£9.9m)

£14.8m 

£13.3m

26.9p

(10.0p) 

16.9p 

29.1p

(13.2p)

15.9p

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

45

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK MANAGEMENT

Risk is an inherent part of business, especially as 
Design Group aim to continue delivering growth around 
the world. The Group actively monitors the risk related to 
its business and the environment in which it operates. 

Our risk management framework
Governance 
Design Group operates a well-established structure for the 
management of risk, where responsibilities and ownership 
are clearly defined:

The Board
• Ownership and monitoring of risk management

• Set objectives and risk appetite

Audit Committee
• Responsible for advising the Board on risk exposures

• Review of internal controls that help manage risks

Executive Committee
• Responsible for the overview of management of key risks at

business unit level

• Assessment of materiality of key risks

Business units
•

Identification, assessment and mitigation associated with
key risks

• Day-to-day management of risks within the business units

with focus on considering risk as part of decision making and
management of external relationships

Group risk function
• Monitoring and collation of risks and actions by business unit

management from across the Group

• Review and oversight of the Group’s risk

management process

Risk strategy and appetite
• The risk management process is aligned to our Group

strategy and each principal risk, as identified in the next
few pages, is considered in the context of achieving
the Group’s strategic objectives of delivering growth,
generating cash, and improving returns through our
strategic focus on: working with the winners, design
and innovation, and efficiency and scale.

• Risk appetite is an expression of the types and amount of

risk that the Group is willing to take or accept to achieve its
objectives. Our risk appetite is set to balance opportunities
for growth and increased return, whilst maintaining
our reputation and robust risk mitigation strategies.
Determining our risk appetite allows us to make consistent
and informed decisions across the Group in relation to key
risks and helps ensure that they are managed within our
tolerated levels of risk.

Risk management approach
• Design Group operates a decentralised model where
risk management is embedded within strategic and
operational decision making. An overarching role is
played by the Group team and the Board to ensure
oversight in the risk management process.

• Every year we review our approach to the Group’s risk

management framework, especially given the significant
growth we have experienced over the previous few years.

• Design Group’s approach to risk management is

bottom up, with each of our business units maintaining
standardised risk registers for their territories, identifying
key risks, monitoring them and determining mitigation
plans for their businesses, whilst measuring against their
risk tolerance level.

• The risks are scored using a risk impact matrix which

considers both financial and non-financial assessments
to determine an overall score for each risk. The localised
risks feed into the Group risk summary where the
resulting rating governs the positioning of the risk on the
Group’s risk map. Each principal risk is also evaluated
against the Group’s risk appetite and considered in
the context of the Group’s strategic objectives. All of
this focuses the Group on where the higher risks sit
and prioritises additional mitigation strategies that may
be required.

• The principal risks were reassessed this year end to

consider the impact of Covid-19 and ensure that each risk
score is representative of the current environment, as well
as to ensure that effective mitigation plans are in place
around the Group.

46

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTEmerging risks 
• Design Group’s continuing success is influenced by
how well we understand and manage our risks. Each
year we review emerging risk areas in order to determine
whether they should be considered as principal risks
and be actively monitored as part of the risk management
process going forward.

• This year we have identified two emerging risks:

– sustainability: this has been included as a principal
risk this year. It is emerging as a key area of focus
for our business, as our customers and the retail
consumer become more focused on their own impact
on the environment and modify their spending habits
accordingly; and

– cyber security: this has been highlighted by all

our business units as an increased risk due to the
increasing sophistication and frequency of cyber
hacks across a myriad of other businesses around
the world. This, coupled with the General Data
Protection Regulation (GDPR), has elevated the risk
on the Group’s register. It is not deemed to be a
principal risk due to the Group’s appropriate safety
mechanisms in place and the Group will continue to
monitor this, in particular as we continue to grow our
e-commerce offering.

Covid‑19
• The Covid-19 pandemic quickly emerged as a risk in the
final quarter of our financial year. The Group, like many
businesses around the world, has been quick to react to
mitigate the impact of the virus on both our employees
and the business, as we saw a rapid escalation of
government enforcements including social distancing
and non-essential business closures.

• Whilst we are still in the midst of this global crisis, it is
difficult to determine the full extent of the impact the
virus has had on the Group. Our businesses have worked
to ensure the safety and wellbeing of our employees
and their families. They are also doing their very best to
mitigate the long term impact of the virus on our business
in the short term, while ensuring the Group is well
positioned to emerge from the virus period as a healthy
business ready to deliver growth.

• The pervasive nature of Covid-19 has had an impact
on many of our identified principal risks, though in
varying magnitudes, due to the increased uncertainty
of the global market and economy. The duration of this
heightened risk due to Covid-19 is unknown and will
depend on the length of the pandemic and the recovery
of economies around the world. The potential short,
medium and long term impact of this uncertainty has
been incorporated into forecasting sensitivities to ensure
that the Group can be confident of our abilities to meet
obligations as they fall due.

• Set out below are how the Group’s principal risks are

affected by Covid-19 in the short to medium term, along
with mitigating actions that have been put in place to
manage the consequences on the business. Principal
risks with heightened risk due to Covid-19 have also been
identified within the principal risks section. Risks, and
business outlook, will continue to be actively monitored
as the global pandemic situation evolves and develops.

Current impact of Covid-19 on 
principal risks

Current mitigating actions

Business continuity and supply 
chain integrity

Covid-19 affected almost all of our operations around the world, 
with each business dynamically responding to the evolving crisis

The risk of a second outbreak which could impact Christmas 
orders and deliveries

The recovery from the crisis underpins business resilience

As the severity of the pandemic escalated, rapid responses and 
business continuity plans allowed for many divisions to work from 
home and, where government guidelines allowed, socially distanced 
factory and warehouse operations to function. These procedures will 
continue to be monitored for the foreseeable future 

Regular operational, financial and strategic updates are provided 
to the senior management team, Executive Committee and 
Board to allow for informed decisions and close monitoring 
of business performance

Careful monitoring of order book levels is ongoing during this time 

Contingency planning around the risk of a second outbreak 
has been undertaken, and relationships with key suppliers and 
customers maintained

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

47

RISK MANAGEMENT CONTINUED

Covid‑19 continued

Current impact of Covid-19 on 
principal risks

Current mitigating actions

Economic uncertainty

The global economy has been significantly affected by Covid-19 
and the outlook for the short term future is unknown. Design Group 
revenues and margins are at risk

Regular monitoring of the global pandemic is ongoing as it continues 
to evolve in each of our jurisdictions

Response plans have been put together to enable quick response 
to changes in the economic environment

Liquidity and treasury management

The closure of non essential businesses and factories affected the 
Group’s trading results. If sustained over a long period of time there 
is a risk of bank covenants breach 

Customer default

An already challenging retail environment, coupled with the difficult 
conditions of Covid-19, will increase the risk of customer default 

People

Increased risk of disengagement and demotivation of employees, 
as well as labour shortages due to the pandemic

Detailed stress scenario planning has been undertaken to measure 
the impact on cash flow forecasting and bank covenants to ensure 
no breach

We are working closely with our lending partners to ensure 
transparency

There has been quick enactment of a freeze on any discretionary 
spend and planned capital expenditure 

Government schemes, such as furlough payments in the UK, 
have been utilised where possible

We are closely monitoring outstanding debts with the revision of 
payment terms where necessary

We are reviewing inventory levels with increased provisioning where 
required given the seasonality and fashion element to our products 
alongside dated goods 

Additional receivables and inventory provisions are being carried 
at the year end where customers have been identified as ‘at risk’

There have been clear and regular communications to employees 
for transparency

We have developed guidelines and implemented protocols to 
safeguard staff in line with government social distancing guidelines. 
Examples include the use of personal protective equipment and 
the altering of shift patterns to ensure no employee interaction at 
shift crossovers

Cyber security

We are following cyber policies and best practice as advised by 
IT teams based in each of the businesses 

Increased risk of cyber threat or security breach with updated ways 
of working around the Group

Key

Working with the winners

Efficiency & scale

Design & innovation

Covid-19 risk

48

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTPrincipal risks 

Risk

Mitigation

Change

Acquisitions 
Failure to successfully 
integrate an acquisition, 
or the loss of potential 
acquisition opportunities, 
could affect the attainment 
of the Group’s growth 
strategy

Maintain an active M&A pipeline and ongoing review of market 
opportunities 

Operate strict evaluation criteria including using third party due-diligence 
professionals for technical areas

Appropriate and effective modelling and sensitivity analysis and risk 
evaluation along with synergy target analysis

Overseen by one or more senior management team members with 
regular reports to the Board

Engage third party integration specialist, as required, to support critical 
integration processes post acquisition

Increased

Increased risk following 
the acquisition of CSS and 
ongoing integration of Impact

Pre-mitigation impact:
High

Post-mitigation impact:
Medium

Link to strategy:

People 
Failure to attract, develop, 
motivate and retain talent 
and skilled individuals 
could affect the Group’s 
ability to meet its strategic 
objectives

A focus on succession planning and building strong teams around key 
individuals in each business unit

Ensuring we review all aspects of executive and senior management 
remuneration and appropriate remuneration packages, alongside a 
standardised grading and benefits structure for all positions

Appropriate policies around hiring key team members focusing on 
qualifications and appropriate experience for the relevant role

A focus on management development to improve competencies across 
the business

Implementation of cross-learning programmes to ensure all the senior 
management team understand other roles

Pre-mitigation impact:
Medium

Post-mitigation impact:
Low

Competitive 
advantage

Loss of significant 
customers

Profit erosion due to pricing 
from competitors

Customers going directly 
to our suppliers

Failure to maximise 
e-commerce opportunity

Continued focus on design, innovation, product quality and exceptional 
service 

Maintain a blended and diversified portfolio of products and customers, 
both by market segment and geography

Close management of costs and margin on a product-by-product basis 
consistent with strategic pricing plan 

Maintain close relationships with all of our key customers, leveraging our 
strengths, such as showrooms, wherever possible

Continued investment in capital expenditure to drive improved efficiency 
and infrastructure to maintain a competitive advantage

Development of the e-commerce strategy for the Group

Unchanged

Remains low risk with 
continued focus and further 
investment in our management 
teams

Increased risk of 
disengagement and 
demotivation of staff 
due to Covid-19 

Link to strategy:

Increased

Increased risk as global retail 
environment becomes more 
challenging

Pre-mitigation impact:
High

Post-mitigation impact:
Medium

Link to strategy:

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

49

RISK MANAGEMENT CONTINUED

Principal risks continued

Risk

Mitigation

Change

Margin erosion 
Rising inflationary cost 
pressures, coupled with 
competitive pricing risk 
eroding margins further 
on already low margin 
products

Seasonality and fashion 
driving inventory 
obsolescence

Continued investment in operations and improvement of production 
processes to maximise efficiency

Utilisation of market intelligence and ongoing product and supplier 
benchmarking to maximise awareness of market conditions

Regular and careful review and management of product costings 
with senior management approval for lower margin products

Regular monitoring of inventory obsolescence ensuring the business 
has sufficient provisions

Concept selling to boost margins

Unchanged

Ongoing integration of 
operation and investment 
in efficiency improvements 
offsetting commercial pricing 
pressures

Pre-mitigation impact:
High

Post-mitigation impact:
Medium

Link to strategy:

Business 
continuity and 
supply chain 
integrity 

Policies and procedures to efficiently manage and safely maintain 
continuity of supply

Monitor production and key performance indicators against plan 
closely to give advance warning of any disruption to operations

Carefully selected suppliers whose performance is monitored 
closely with alternative routes of supply as back up

Disruption of manufacturing 
operations during peak 
season

Regular supply chain audits along with internal audits of 
manufacturing facilities 

Group insurance policy for a range of operational risks

Leveraging our sourcing offices in Asia to manage and maintain 
supply relationships 

Failure of suppliers 
to deliver

Problems with product 
quality or integrity of 
supply chain

Pre-mitigation impact:
Medium

Post-mitigation impact:
Low

Unchanged

Group wide insurance 
programme continues to 
provide effective cover 
alongside increased focus on 
managing robust supply chain

Covid-19 affected almost all 
of our operations around the 
world, with each business 
dynamically responding to 
the evolving crisis

Link to strategy:

Key

Working with the winners

Efficiency & scale

Design & innovation

Covid-19 risk

50

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTRisk

Mitigation

Change

Regular monitoring of the economic conditions in which we operate

Impact analysis and response plans for significant changes to trade 
agreements utilising external specialists where necessary

Brexit mitigation plans 

Economic 
uncertainty 
Changes to the global 
economy, such as a 
pandemic, significantly 
affecting business trading 
and operations 

Changes to international 
trade terms between core 
territories of operation 
having a significant effect 
in our main cost areas of 
raw materials, freight and 
people

Pre-mitigation impact:
High

Post-mitigation impact:
Medium

Customer 
default 

Significant customer default

Tight credit control procedures, with regular review of credit limits

Insuring credit risk where possible

Close monitoring of debts and inventory levels taking provisions 
where required

Pre-mitigation impact:
High

Post-mitigation impact:
Medium

Increased

Brexit and US tariffs on China 
sourced products increase risk 
for the Group

The global economy has 
been significantly affected 
by Covid-19 and the outlook 
for the short term future is 
unknown

Link to strategy:

Increased

Retail environment continues 
to be challenging 

Covid-19 increased the fragility 
of the retail environment, 
which was an already 
challenging market place

Link to strategy:

Sustainability

Loss of revenue due to 
failure to react to market 
trends and develop 
environmentally friendly 
products and supply chain 
alternatives

Dedicated teams and meetings to develop new initiatives

Close working relationship with key customers to be “ahead of the curve” 
on trends they are implementing 

Focus on design, product quality and service delivery

Leverage Group understanding of trends to share knowledge and ideas 

New risk

New principal risk due to 
higher customer and consumer 
awareness of sustainability 
matters 

Pre-mitigation impact:
High

Post-mitigation impact:
Medium

Link to strategy:

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

51

RISK MANAGEMENT CONTINUED

Principal risks continued

Risk

Mitigation

Change

Currency 
exposure

Purchases, sales and 
funding in a mixture of 
currencies

Translation of overseas 
businesses

Natural hedges where possible across businesses as well as spot 
purchases, forward contracts and other similar instruments

Ensuring financing facilities have appropriate headroom to 
accommodate fluctuations in currencies

Unchanged

Ongoing management focus 
maintains effective hedge to 
currency risk where possible

Pre-mitigation impact:
High

Post-mitigation impact:
Low

Link to strategy:

Governance 
and compliance

Non-compliance with legal 
and tax regulations in the 
jurisdictions in which we 
operate

Augmentation of the Group legal team in the US to aid with managing 
the Group’s compliance globally

Utilisation of specialist advisers where appropriate and necessary, 
as well as an outsourced internal audit function

Open dialogue with relevant parties (e.g. tax authorities)

Pre-mitigation impact:
Medium

Post-mitigation impact:
Low

Regular cash budgeting, forecasting and monitoring across the 
Group and senior management

Updated facility with multiple lending partners to enhance borrowing 
capabilities with a range of maturities sufficient to cover funding 
requirements

Working closely and transparently with our lending partners ensuring 
the cash flow cycle is understood and monitored by all parties 

Liquidity 
and treasury 
management

Failure to raise funds 
through debt or share 
issues

Loss of support from 
principal banking partners

Failure to comply with 
banking covenants

Pre-mitigation impact:
High

Post-mitigation impact:
Medium

Key

Working with the winners

Efficiency & scale

Design & innovation

Covid-19 risk

Unchanged

Regulatory environment 
continually changing 
but stronger teams to 
ensure we are meeting our 
compliance requirements

Link to strategy:

Unchanged

Ongoing focus on cash 
management supported 
by refinancing with banks 
on 5 June 2019 and then 
subsequently on 17 January 
2020 to aid the acquisition 
of CSS

Careful monitoring of Group 
financials impacted by 
Covid-19, to ensure covenants 
complied with

Link to strategy:

52

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTSOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY

THERE IS NO 
TIME LIKE THE 
PRESENT.

As a Group with an ever-expanding 
reach, we understand that our 
impact and responsibilities extend 
beyond our immediate surroundings, 
into the lives of our employees, 
the environment, and our local and 
global communities. We take seriously 
these responsibilities, as reflected in 
our products, processes and actions. 

At every level of our business, we drive 
for the highest standards of ethical 
behaviour, to protect and support our 
employees, our communities and our 
planet. In upholding these standards, 
it is our aim to foster the relationships 
we have with all of our stakeholders to 
continue building a considerate and 
sustainable company. 

Though our Group companies are 
varied in many ways, each part of 
Design Group globally is committed 
to operating in a responsible and 
sustainable way, with a driving focus 
of having a positive impact in every 
interaction we make.

What’s in this section 

Environment

pages 54 and 55

People and 
community

pages 56 and 57

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

53

SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY – ENVIRONMENT

We believe that every 
one of us has a shared 
responsibility to protect 
and preserve our planet 
and its environment, 
for this and future 
generations. That is 
why, in all areas of our 
Group, we have made 
significant steps this 
year to further improve 
our environmental 
credentials and 
offset the impact 
of our operations.

WRAP 
Waste and Resource 
Action Programme
In our UK business, we have 
engaged the support of the Waste 
and Resources Action Programme 
(WRAP) UK, who are leading a global 
change in the way plastic is made, 
consumed and disposed of. WRAP 
has given Design Group access to a 
range of influential parties including 
government organisations and 
suppliers, plus offered advice as we 
continue to redesign products to 
reduce waste, increase recycling and 
raise awareness with our customers. 

Our work with WRAP aims to reduce 
the amount of single use plastics 
throughout the business. As part 
of this commitment, Design Group 
has contributed towards WRAP’s 
Plastic Pact targets, which aim to 
tackle ‘problem plastics’ and swap 
them for alternative materials and 
reusable options. 

Examples of our sustainable 
products and packaging in action 
can be seen on page 19. 

Recycling 
handy hint
“Scrunch test: wrapping paper 
can be recycled if, when it 
is scrunched up into a ball, 
it stays scrunched”

Sustainable sourcing
As a mark of success in our efforts to 
source our products in a sustainable 
way, our UK business was awarded 
the WWF 3 Trees biennial award in 
2019. This award from the World 
Wide Fund for Nature recognised our 
commitment to using paper sourced 
exclusively from sustainable forestry 
and from responsible suppliers in our 
UK operations.

Design Group are FSC accredited 
and we are shifting to the sole use 
of FSC paper in our products. The 
FSC recognises that Design Group 
ensures that our timber and timber 
products are legally harvested and 
sourced, and wherever possible, 
certified or recycled material is 
purchased.

Recycling 
handy hint
“A common way to recycle 
gift bags is to reuse them 
when giving a present to 
a friend or relative”

54

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTCrackers for 
conscientious consumers
Understanding the changing focus 
of consumers in recent years, Design 
Group was able to offer customers 
a range of Christmas crackers with 
a low environmental impact in the 
Christmas 2019 season. By removing 
glitter, embellishments and plastic 
content from a range of our cracker 
products, we helped thousands of 
consumers keep alive their Christmas 
tradition in a more sustainable way. 

Tom Smith, one of Design Group’s 
premium brands, is leading the way 
on sustainable solutions without 
compromising on design or quality. 

In order to minimise our impact on 
the environment, a fully recyclable 
cracker range been launched in which 
the plastic window from the cracker 
packaging has been removed. 
The cracker contains keepsake 
wooden content and is made from 
soya based inks and paper ties. 
In addition, all Tom Smith branded 
products no longer use glitter as 
a finish.

Sustainable by design
Throughout our entire business, 
we are on a continuous journey to 
minimise the impact we have on 
the environment and drive positive 
change. This extends from product 
design right through to operations 
and logistics.

We have successfully removed 100% 
of solvent-based materials from our 
paper printing processes, completely 
eliminating the damaging effects 
these processes would otherwise 
have had on the environment. 

Additionally, we continue to reduce 
our logistics carbon footprint, by 
optimising packaging and processes 
to fit more products onto every truck, 
reducing the number of vehicles and 
journeys used by the Group each year. 
This has already and will continue to 
lead to significant reductions in the 
carbon emissions released into the 
atmosphere due to our operations. 

Furthermore, our focus on investing 
in new machinery to improve 
our efficiency and capacity also 
continues to have a positive effect on 
the environment by lowering wastage, 
reducing importing from overseas and 
focusing on local suppliers for raw 
materials and services.

Other areas of improvement 
underway include: 
• the development of shrink

film-free gift wrap packaging
which eliminates the plastic film and
replaces it with recyclable sealing
labels;

• the removal of the plastic window on
Christmas cracker and boxed cards
packaging;

• introducing plastic-free packaging
of single use greetings cards by
using stickers to seal instead; and

• acetate-free board packaging is
being phased across stationery
ranges.

We aim to continually challenge 
ourselves to make our operations, 
our suppliers and our impact more 
sustainable, helping to preserve and 
protect the environment for generations 
to come.

Recycling  
handy hint
“Most greetings cards and 
envelopes can be recycled, 
any extras such as glitter 
or bows just need to 
be removed first”

Recycling 
handy hint
“Before recycling gift 
wrap, remove sticky 
tape and decorations 
such as ribbons 
and bows”

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

55

SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY – PEOPLE AND COMMUNITY

WE ALL  
PLAY A PART.

The many talented individuals 
and teams inside of Design Group 
make us the successful business 
we are. We understand the value 
and importance of creating an 
open, comfortable and progressive 
environment to invest back into the 
people who give us so much. 

The communities where our Group 
businesses are based, and where 
many of our team members call 
home, are important to us. We aim 
to give more than we take in all of the 
communities where Design Group is 
active, continuously taking actions 
and promoting initiatives to leave a 
positive impact. 

Throughout the Group, this year 
was another one packed full of local, 
national and international schemes 
and initiatives to help our people bond, 
grow and support themselves and their 
wider communities. 

56

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

Design Group head office staff 
supporting Willen Hospice

STRATEGIC REPORTIn the Americas, teams have been 
proactively helping to support their 
communities during the emergency 
response to the Covid-19 pandemic, 
by launching the ‘commUNITY’ 
campaign. The campaign invites 
everybody to display a turquoise 
blue ribbon as a show of support 
during this crisis, with participants 
encouraged to post their 
support online with the hashtag 
#wereinthistogether. 

As part of the pandemic 
response, the US sewing pattern 
team created free-to-download 
guides on how to produce medical 
gowns, scrub caps, unisex scrub 
tops and face coverings, whilst the 
seasonal teams mass-produced 
face shields for use by frontline 
healthcare workers.

Elsewhere, the US has engaged in a 
number of other positive community 
contributions, including providing 
coats for the homeless and food 
for local food banks in Midway, 
Georgia, and provided supplies to 
children in a local elementary school 
in Memphis.

In the UK, teams have been 
engaged in a number of charitable 
activities, including raising over 
£1,000 for the Movember cause, and 
donating £2,000 to Velindre Cancer 
Care Hospital through the Royal 
Warrant Holders Association Charity 
Fund, and taking part in Macmillan 
Cancer Support’s ‘World’s Largest 
Coffee Morning’.

Additionally, Design Group UK’s 
trading company Polaris presented 
a cheque for over £30,000 to the 
Trussell Trust, generated through 
the sale of co-branded ‘Catering 
Crackers’ in support of the charity.

Elsewhere, a team from Design 
Group’s head office supported 
Willen Hospice by volunteering 
time and manpower at the charity’s 
donated clothing warehouse. 
During the volunteering, 127 bags of 
recycled clothing were processed, 
generating the charity £571.50 in 
funding. 

In Australia, Design Group has 
donated in excess of AU$120,000 to 
causes close to the hearts of team 
members. These include AU$80,251 
and AU$32,140 paid to the Kmart 
Wishing Tree Appeal and Salvation 
Army respectively, generated from 
the sale of selected items.

Design Group Australia’s studio 
team hosted a bake sale to raise 
funds for the Gippsland Emergency 
Relief Fund, generating AU$587.50. 
The business matched this amount, 
resulting in AU$1,175 being donated 
to the fund to help those affected by 
natural disaster events.

In Europe, teams spent their 
annual ‘We Make You Smile!’ 
day at Wildlands Adventure Zoo, 
meeting the animals and taking part 
in challenges. The business also 
hosted its very first ‘Family Day’, in 
which team members’ families were 
invited to tour the facilities and learn 
more about Design Group. More 
than 400 people visited. 

For those who do not speak Dutch 
as their first language, Design Group 
Europe has been hosting ‘Dutch 
on the Work Floor’ sessions in 
co-operation with the Municipality of 
Hoogeveen. The sessions allow team 
members to spend time learning the 
Dutch language during work hours, 
to broaden their skills and help them 
bond with their colleagues.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

57

The Board is responsible for overseeing the management of 
the business and for ensuring high standards of corporate 
governance are maintained throughout the Group.

Audit Committee

Remuneration Committee

Nomination Committee

Chair

58

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

BOARD OF DIRECTORSGOVERNANCEJohn Charlton
Non‑Executive Chairman

Paul Fineman
Chief Executive Officer

Giles Willits
Chief Financial Officer

Date of appointment: John joined the 
Board in April 2010 and was appointed 
Chairman of the Board on 
7 September 2011. 

Experience: In his executive career, 
John was previously Senior Vice President 
International of American Greetings 
Corporation and Chief Executive of UK 
Greetings Ltd. He was also Chairman of 
Amscan International Ltd. Prior to that John 
was the CEO of a number of public and 
private multinational companies.

External appointments: John is 
Chairman of SA Greeting (Pty) Ltd, 
a South African company.

Skills: In-depth knowledge of the 
international greetings card, gift packaging, 
stationery and social expression gift market.

Committees:

Date of appointment: Paul joined the 
Board in May 2005 as Chief Executive 
Officer of Anker International plc. He was 
appointed Group Managing Director in 
January 2008 and then appointed Group 
CEO in January 2009.

Experience: Paul has over 40 years’ 
experience in the card, gift wrap and 
stationery industry having developed 
knowledge within his family’s business, 
Anker International, prior to its acquisition 
in 2005. He has led the transformation 
and growth of Design Group as CEO since 
2009. Paul was awarded Chief Executive 
Officer of the Year by the Quoted Company 
Awards 2017.

Skills: Business and team development.

Innovation and entrepreneurship.

Date of appointment: Giles joined the 
Board in January 2018.

Experience: Giles has more than 
20 years’ experience in senior leadership 
and financial roles in multiple household 
name businesses. He was most recently the 
CFO of Entertainment One Ltd (LSE: ETO), 
having joined prior to its IPO on AIM in 2007. 
Giles was also formerly Director of Group 
Finance at J Sainsbury plc and Woolworths 
Group plc and qualified as a chartered 
accountant at PricewaterhouseCoopers.

External appointments: Giles sits on 
the Board of Shearwater Group plc as a 
Non-Executive Director.

Skills: Particular skills and 
experience in M&A, as well as 
being a Chartered Accountant.

Lance Burn
Executive Director

Mark Tentori
Non‑Executive Director

Elaine Bond
Non‑Executive Director

Date of appointment: Elaine joined the 
Board as a Non-Executive Director on 
1 February 2012.

Experience: Elaine was previously Group 
Operations Director of UK Greetings Ltd, 
the UK subsidiary of American Greetings.

External appointments: Non-Executive 
Director at Sandgate Systems Limited.

Skills: Operational skills and experience 
gained over many years in the card, 
gift wrap and stationery industry.

Committees:

Date of appointment: Mark joined the 
Board as a Non-Executive Director on 
1 January 2016. 

Experience: Mark has held a number of 
CFO and COO roles in public and private 
companies operating in a wide range 
of sectors and geographic locations. 
These include a Portfolio Partner within 
Charterhouse Capital Partners LLP, 
CFO of Deb Group Ltd and LINPAC 
Group Ltd and CFO and COO of United 
Coffee. Mark also spent ten years with 
PricewaterhouseCoopers where he 
qualified as a Chartered Accountant.

External appointments: Mark sits on the 
Advisory Board to the Duchy of Lancaster 
as well as several committees.

Skills: Wide experience in finance 
and a Chartered Accountant.

Committees:

Date of appointment: Lance joined the 
Board in October 2012.

Experience: Lance has been Managing 
Director of IG Design Group UK 
Limited since 2009 and the Group’s 
subsidiary operation in China since 2011. 
Lance’s previous roles included directing 
businesses for Rank Hovis McDougall 
plc, Saint Gobain Solaglas UK and also 
international overseas-based roles for 
PepsiCo International in Africa and India.

Skills: Managing businesses both in 
the UK and abroad across a number 
of industry sectors. 

Business integration and 
overseas operations.

Anders Hedlund
Founder and Non‑Executive 
Deputy Chairman

Date of appointment: Anders was 
appointed as Nominee Non-Executive 
Director in 2007.

Experience: Anders founded the Group in 
1979 and was joint Chief Executive Officer of 
the Group until December 2007.

Skills: Significant industry knowledge.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

59

CHAIRMAN’S CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REVIEW

A transformational 
year following the 
CSS acquisition, but a 
challenging year ahead 
as we navigate through 
the impact of Covid-19.

John Charlton
Chairman

Gender

6  Male

1  Female

1  Chair

Role

3  Executive Directors

3  Non-Executive 
  Directors

Length of
tenure

2  2-5 years

2  5-10 years

3  10+ years

Dear Shareholder

We are pleased to be able to report 
a further year of progress for our 
Group during the year ended 
31 March 2020. In the very challenging 
retail environment, as the world 
responds to the impact of Covid-19, 
we remain focused on ensuring 
the Group is positioned to emerge 
stronger and ready to take on the many 
opportunities that we see in the future.

Our acquisition of CSS in March 2020 
is an excellent example of how this year 
we were able to make a step change in 
the scale of our Group.

We shall continue to put considerable 
effort into strengthening our position as 
one of the world’s leading designers, 
manufacturers, importers and 
distributors of each of the core product 
categories on which we focus.

60

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

GOVERNANCEThe Board remains focused on 
developing the Group for the long 
term benefit of all shareholders, with 
well-informed and effective decision 
making. As part of this, the Board 
takes corporate governance seriously, 
continuing its commitment to the 
QCA Corporate Governance Code 
(‘Code’) and meeting the new reporting 
requirements under the Companies 
(Miscellaneous Reporting) Regulations 
2018 (see page 8).

I am pleased to share with you 
our governance structure and the 
improvements that have taken place 
over the past year. For ease, we have 
structured this report to align with the 
principles of the Code. 

Finally, let me take this opportunity 
to thank our teams around the 
globe, our shareholders, customers, 
suppliers, bankers and advisers 
for their support and contributions. 
As always, we are very appreciative 
of the strong working relationship and 
partnership that we continue to enjoy 
with you all.

John Charlton
Chairman 

27 July 2020

Governance framework

Board

Accountable to 
shareholders for 
sustainable financial 
performance 
and long term 
shareholder value

Executive 
Board

Consists of 
business unit CEOs 
responsible for the 
execution of the 
strategy, governance 
and business 
performance

Nomination 
Committee

Audit 
Committee

Remuneration 
Committee

Responsible for 
reviewing and 
recommending 
changes to the 
composition of 
the Board and its 
committees

Responsible 
for overseeing 
financial reporting, risk 
management, internal 
controls and external 
audit

Responsible for 
overseeing the 
remuneration strategy 
for the Group and 
remuneration policy 
for the Directors

Read the Committee 
report on page 
68 to 70

Read the Committee 
report on page 
71 to 76

Principle 1: 
Establish a strategy and business 
model which promote long term 
value for shareholders

The Group continues to operate 
under a governance structure, which is 
designed to be flexible and efficient in 
creating sustainable long term growth 
in shareholder value. 

Our key focus is to continue to drive 
the Group forward and keep us 
reaching for the high standards and 
targets we set ourselves. We do this by 
leveraging our strengths and the many 
opportunities to grow in the market. 
Our strategy focuses on:

• Working with the winners –

increasing revenue through growth
with the winning retailers of the
future, in the growing channels and
product categories.
• Design & innovation –

developing in new channels and
adjacent product categories while
increasing our share in the growing
number of events celebrated
throughout the year.

• Efficiency & scale – driving

margins through investment in
processes and people. Accretive
M&A opportunities to unlock
synergies and strengthening our
‘one-stop-shop’ position with
customers.

In May 2019 we were pleased to be 
a winner of the Transatlantic Growth 
Awards 2019 in the category of ‘UK 
Launch or Expansion in the US’ 
following the acquisition of Impact. 
The aim of the Transatlantic Growth 
Awards is to highlight and celebrate 
the commitment of businesses to 
trade, investment and jobs between 
the UK and US, showcasing the best 
examples of foreign direct investment 
going both ways across the Atlantic.

Further detail on the Group’s strategy 
and business model, as well as the key 
challenges faced by the Company in 
achieving its goals, can be found on 
pages 6 to 23.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

61

CHAIRMAN’S CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REVIEW
CONTINUED

Principle 2:
Seek to understand and meet 
shareholder needs and expectations

This year has been particularly noteworthy with the Group, as part of the 
acquisition of CSS, raising £120 million from investors to support the financing of 
the deal. This was significantly oversubscribed and a good indication of the strong 
relationship between the Company and its shareholders.

We continue to maintain a strong relationship with our Nomad and Broker, 
Canaccord Genuity (‘Canaccord’), who were a key player in running and 
executing the fundraising activities for the CSS acquisition. Canaccord has a wide 
international reach and is well placed to support the Group’s ambitions for growth 
in the future.

Our CEO and CFO have maintained regular contact with our institutional investors 
as can be seen in the timeline below:

Shareholder engagement calendar 2019/2020

02 April 2019 

15 April 2019 

11-25 June 2019

John Charlton met with certain investors

Trading Update

 Full Year results announcement followed by 
investor roadshows in London, Edinburgh  
and the US

22 August 2019 

28 August 2019 

Investor Day

Trading Update

04 September 2019 

Investor Day

11 September 2019 

Annual General Meeting

03 October 2019 

08 October 2019 

17 October 2019 

26-29 November 2019

Investor Day

Investor Day

Trading Update

 Interim results announcement followed 
by investor roadshows

03 December 2019 

16 December 2019 

Investor Day

Investor Day

08-15 January 2020 

Investor Roadshow (Placing)

11 February 2020 

04 March 2020 

General Meeting

Trading Update 

Following investor meetings, the full Board receives feedback on the views 
and concerns of investors and regularly receives copies of investment reports 
from analysts.

Individual investors
In addition to our focus on institutional 
investors, we aim to engage with 
individual and retail investors on a 
regular basis.

Our AGM gives us the ideal opportunity 
to meet with individual investors face 
to face. It is important that all investors 
have a platform to raise questions or 
make comments whilst also enabling 
us to give visibility of, and interaction 
with, the Board.

All our investors are regularly kept up 
to date with announcements, circulars, 
videos and reports, all of which are 
available on the Company’s website.

Nikky Geairns is primarily 
responsible for shareholder 
liaison and can be contacted at  
ngeairns@thedesigngroup.com. 
Contact details for the Company’s PR 
Advisers, Brokers and Registrars are 
also set out in the ‘Contact’ section of 
the Company’s website.

62

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

GOVERNANCEPrinciple 3: 
Principle 3: 
Take into account wider stakeholder and 
Take into account wider stakeholder and 
social responsibilities and their implications 
social responsibilities and their implications 
for long term success
for long term success

In addition to our shareholders, all of 
our stakeholders – our employees, 
customers, suppliers and communities 
– are vital to the success of the Group.
On page 8 we set out our Section
172 statement as required by the
Companies (Miscellaneous Reporting)
Regulations 2018 showing how the
needs of these important stakeholders
are assessed and considered by the
Board when making key decisions.

Employees
We invest in our people; from training 
and education offered throughout the 
Group, through to opportunities for 
career progression. The Group offers 
an environment in which our employees 
are encouraged to grow and deliver 
their very best. It is these same 
opportunities which allow the Group to 
attract and retain the brightest talent.

Training
All our business units provide relevant 
and up-to-date training for employees. 

The Design Group Academy operating 
in our Celebrations business in Europe 
continues to be a powerful tool to train 
employees in the skills needed for 
their roles, as well as rolling out key 
compliance initiatives. The purpose 
built classroom provides a relaxed 
and comfortable environment in which 
employees can focus on their learning 
away from their usual work stations. 
In addition, this year has seen the 
launch of the self-titled Design Group 
University which invites employees 
to attend evening sessions, with 
presentations from external speakers 
on a variety of inspirational topics. 
Two events have taken place so far with 
40 attendees at each and the feedback 
has been very positive.

In Australia, HR employees have been 
reallocated to fully concentrate on 
training and workers’ compensation. 
In addition to using information already 
gathered as part of the annual review 
process regarding training, they are 
adding in annual training reviews 
with each business leader as well 
as compliance obligations. This is a 
continually developing area with the 
next step to develop a skills matrix to 
assist in the training programme.

Talent 
Our ‘Stars of the Future’ programme 
initially identified 20 ‘stars’ across the 
Group. The intention is for each person 
to have a personalised development 
programme, sponsored by the leader 
of each business. 

In the UK we run a twelve month 
development programme in conjunction 
with an external provider for individuals 
who demonstrate the desire and 
capability for future promotion. This is a 
tailored training programme which also 
includes a dedicated mentor from the 
senior leadership team and one-to-one 
coaching.

Engagement
Our business units use a variety of 
methods to enable effective two-way 
communication with employees. 
These range from semi-annual 
all-employee meetings (with video 
conference facilities for remote team 
members) to smaller scale weekly 
catch ups. Comment boxes and staff 
surveys are also used and various 
alternatives in between. 

Each location recognises birthdays 
and service anniversaries. The US 
holds employee picnics and monthly 
employee events often linked to 
key celebrations in that month 
e.g. Super Bowl and Valentine’s day

in February. Similar events are held 
in Australia where teams within the 
business are tasked with running the 
special events to ensure that everyone 
is involved.

In the UK, this year, the business 
started running a calendar of wellbeing 
events, including Healthy Eating, 
Know Your Numbers and Safety During 
the Festive Season. They supported 
the Mental Health World campaign 
and will continue to communicate 
important wellbeing initiatives across 
the business to promote a positive 
work environment. 

Furthermore, during the challenges 
presented by Covid-19, the Group 
has always prioritised the health and 
safety of employees. In all locations 
procedures and communication have 
been put in place to ensure that our 
teams observed the necessary social 
distancing protocols required.

Customers
Through recognising that each of our 
customers is unique and so requires a 
different service to satisfy their needs 
and expectations, we work hard to 
build deep and lasting relationships 
with our customers.

An example of this during the year 
was in America where we engaged 
with Kroger in creating an ‘impulse’ 
programme consisting of pallet 
displays in prominent store locations 
with new products which are updated 
regularly throughout the year. This 
has been a successful collaboration 
involving Kroger’s buying and product 
planning team in conjunction with 
DG America’s Sales Lead, Creative 
Director and Product Development 
manager. The programme is in 1,448 
stores across the US, with a view to 
potentially growing this to more stores 
in 2021.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

63

CHAIRMAN’S CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REVIEW
CONTINUED

Principle 3 continued: 
Take into account 
wider stakeholder and 
social responsibilities and their 
implications for long term success

Principle 4: 
Embed effective risk management, 
considering both opportunities 
and threats, throughout the 
organisation

Suppliers
We are committed to engaging with 
our suppliers fairly and lawfully and 
that we source responsibly. We expect 
our supply base to do the same.

Our businesses meet with our key 
suppliers periodically to maintain a 
regular open dialogue and to share 
priorities both from the Group’s 
perspective but also those of our 
suppliers. Our Purchasing Managers 
have daily interaction with our supplier 
base covering a variety of topics such 
as quality, service levels, sourcing of 
raw materials etc.

This year saw the creation of a new 
Third Party Due Diligence Policy and 
accompanying processes to ensure 
that we are engaging with legally and 
financially compliant third parties. 

Communities
Our businesses throughout the world 
undertake a variety of local initiatives 
to support their local communities 
and national charities. See our social 
responsibility section on pages 56 
and 57 for some examples.

Further detail on how our business 
model identifies the key resources and 
relationships on which the business 
relies can be found on pages 6 and 7.

The Board has overall responsibility for 
the establishment and oversight of the 
Group’s risk management framework. 
The Group’s risk management 
systems, policies and procedures are 
established to identify and analyse 
the risks faced by the Group, to set 
appropriate risk limits and controls, 
and to monitor the risks and adherence 
to limits.

With the recent corporate acquisitions 
the Group has made, we are cognisant 
of the challenges that a larger Group 
faces and we will be reviewing our 
governance structures over the next 
year to ensure they remain fit for 
purpose.

Risk management processes are 
reviewed regularly by the Audit 
Committee to reflect changes in 
market conditions and the Group’s 
activities. The Board’s oversight 
covers all controls, including financial, 
operational and compliance controls 
and general risk management. 
It is based principally on reviewing 
reports from management to consider 
whether significant risks are identified, 
evaluated, managed and controlled and 
whether any significant weaknesses 
are promptly remedied and indicate the 
need for more extensive monitoring.

Following the successful roll out 
of the Code of Business Conduct, 
Anti-bribery & Corruption policy 
and Whistleblowing policies to all 
employees in 2019, attention has 
turned to the on-boarding of third 
party suppliers. A new Third Party 
Due Diligence Policy has been adopted 
by the Board and is gradually being 
introduced across the business. It is 
accompanied by an online on-boarding 
tool which defines the engagement, 
reasons for termination, time lines, 
life cycle, contacts and owners of 
third parties. Importantly the tool also 
allows us to screen and continuously 
monitor third parties for adverse media, 
sanctions lists, politically exposed 
persons, beneficial ownership and 
government watch lists.

Further detail on the principal risks 
faced by the Group and the mitigating 
actions taken in respect of those risks 
can be found on pages 46 to 52.

64

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

GOVERNANCEPrinciple 5: 
Maintain the Board as a 
well‑functioning, balanced team 
led by the Chair

Principle 6: 
Ensure that between them the 
Directors have the necessary 
up‑to‑date experience, skills 
and capabilities

Principle 7: 
Evaluate Board performance based 
on clear and relevant objectives, 
seeking continuous improvement

The Board consists of three Executive 
Directors and four Non-Executive 
Directors (including the Chairman). 
For the biographies of the Board 
see page 59.

The Board is kept informed on a regular 
basis by the Company Secretary about 
their duties and any update in relation to 
legal and governance requirements for 
the Group.

In addition, the Board has access to 
the Deloitte Academy which gives each 
Director (Executive and Non-Executive) 
access to a wide-ranging programme 
of technical briefings, education, 
bespoke training and peer-to-peer 
networking opportunities. This is a 
useful resource to ensure that they 
keep abreast of market trends in board 
governance, legislative reform and 
keep their skills up to date.

The Board has access to external, 
specialist advice when necessary. 
An example of this is when 
the Remuneration Committee 
recently appointed Deloitte LLP 
and MM&K Limited to provide 
advice on LTIP schemes.

There were no changes to the 
composition of the Board during 
the year.

The Board met formally ten times 
during the 2020 financial year. Lance 
Burn was absent for two meetings 
and Elaine Bond was absent for one 
meeting but otherwise all Directors 
were present. 

The Audit Committee met four times 
and the Remuneration Committee met 
three times, all were fully attended.

Independence
Anders Hedlund, who founded our 
Group, is a Nominee Non-Executive 
Director. Mr Hedlund is considered 
not to be independent, because as 
founder, he has served on the Board 
since the Company’s inception, his 
family hold significant interests in 
the shareholding of the Company 
and he also fulfils a consultancy role 
within one of the Group’s businesses. 
As reported in the financial statements, 
there are also some related party 
transactions between certain of the 
subsidiaries within our Group and 
companies under the ultimate control 
of the Hedlund family.

Following a review by the Board, all of 
the other Non-Executive Directors are 
considered to be independent.

In November 2019 the 
Remuneration Committee conducted 
a self-assessment based on an 
external template which was adapted 
to incorporate the guidance contained 
in the QCA Remuneration Committee 
Guide. Members were asked to rate 
the performance of the Remuneration 
Committee based on their own 
perceptions of the Committee as 
a whole. 

Topics covered were: 

• roles and responsibilities;
• terms of reference and planning;
• meetings – content and running of;
• skill set of members; and
• shareholder interaction.

Responses were collated, reviewed 
and compared with last year’s results 
– no significant concerns were raised.

In February 2020 the Board conducted 
a self-assessment. The questionnaire 
was split into ten sections with each 
section based on the principles set 
out in the QCA Corporate Governance 
Code. There was an additional section 
allowing the Directors to give their 
thoughts on areas such as the main 
achievements of the Board over the 
previous twelve months, and the 
main strengths and weaknesses of 
the Board. The results of this review 
will be discussed later in the year.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

65

CHAIRMAN’S CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REVIEW
CONTINUED

In the UK, the team have developed 
their ‘4 Ps’ framework: Purpose, 
Pace, Passion and People. These 
core principles guide the way they 
do business and help define what 
the UK business stands for as the 
company grows and develops. 
The ‘4 Ps’ have been incorporated 
into the behavioural competencies to 
be factored into the new online team 
appraisal system.

Our performance management 
systems and processes are designed 
to direct and influence behaviours. 

We encourage our employees to get 
involved in local community initiatives – 
see page 57 for some great examples.

In recognising the decentralised 
structure of our international Group, 
we do not seek to impose strict 
guidelines around the adoption of a 
specific corporate culture but instead 
allow each business to adapt the 
principles as is most appropriate 
to them. For example: 

In Australia the newly established 
corporate culture initiative is called 
#Be EPIC – Ethical, Passionate, 
Inspiring and Creative. This will be 
used for the entire employment life 
cycle from recruitment, performance 
management to reward and 
recognition. They are including it in 
the on-boarding process and have 
developed videos to promote the key 
aspects of the programme. The plan 
further expands this by ensuring staff 
‘make their mark’ on the organisation. 
Asking staff to assess how they ‘made 
their mark’ on the business allows for 
praise and constructive self reflection 
and management feedback. 

Principle 8: 
Promote a corporate culture that 
is based on ethical values and 
behaviours

The Board desires to promote a culture 
of respect, integrity, openness, honesty 
and fulfilment within each of the 
businesses in our Group. We believe 
strongly in these objectives and we 
endeavour to practise these in the 
way that we communicate with our 
customers, suppliers, shareholders, 
advisers and of course all our teams 
employed in the Group.

Feedback from all stakeholders in the 
business, as set out in Principle 3, 
allows the Board to assess the state 
of its corporate culture, as well as 
performance against the Group’s 
internal targets.

The Group Values Statement is 
as follows:

Our Values

• To strive for excellence in all we do
• To behave ethically and with

integrity

• To focus on our customers and to

‘go the extra mile’

• To be open to feedback, ideas and
to positive change and promote
fulfilment and fun

• To be good ‘citizens’ within our

communities and take responsibility
for our impact on our planet

• To be innovative and entrepreneurial
• To treat everyone with dignity and

respect

• To be a team that succeeds
together and aims to be an
‘employer of choice’

66

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

GOVERNANCEPrinciple 9: 
Maintain governance structures 
and processes that are fit for 
purpose and support good 
decision‑making by the Board

There is a distinct and defined division 
of responsibilities between the 
Chairman and the CEO.

The Chairman is primarily responsible 
for the effective working of the Board in 
conjunction with management, and the 
CEO is responsible for the operational 
management of the business and for 
the implementation of the strategy 
agreed by the Board.

The Board is responsible for setting 
the vision and strategy for the Group, 
working closely with the executive 
management team to deliver a 
successful business model for our 
shareholders and other stakeholders.

The Group Delegation of Authority 
policy sets out the matters that are 
reserved to the Board for approval. 
These include:

• matters relating to the Company’s
legal purpose and position and its
status as a public listed company;

• changes in governance, strategy

and significant changes in internal
controls; and

• significant financial or contractual
commitments and decisions.

The Board has three committees – 
Remuneration, Audit and Nomination. 
Each of these committees comprises 
the Non-Executive Chairman and 
our two independent Non-Executive 
Directors; Elaine Bond and Mark 
Tentori. Elaine chairs the Remuneration 
Committee, Mark the Audit Committee, 
and John Charlton the Nomination 
Committee.

The Nomination Committee is 
responsible for filling Board vacancies, 
reviewing the Board composition and 
the roles of Board members.

The Audit Committee satisfies itself 
on the integrity of financial information 
and that controls and risk management 
systems within our businesses are 
robust and defensible. The Committee 
meets as required during the year and 
at least twice with the Group’s external 
auditor. Its role is to review the interim 
and final financial statements for 
approval by the Board, to ensure that 
operational and financial controls are 
functioning properly, and to provide 
the forum through which the Group’s 
external auditor reports to the Board. 
Further details about the activities 
undertaken by the Audit Committee 
this year can be found on pages 68 
to 70.

The Remuneration Committee 
determines appropriate levels of 
remuneration and compensation for 
Executive Directors. The Committee 
meets as required during the year 
and is closely involved in agreeing 
the positions within our senior 
management team that should 
participate in our Long Term Incentive 
Plan (‘LTIP’), together with the level of 
awards. The Remuneration Committee 
is also responsible for agreeing 
the performance criteria for annual 
bonuses and LTIP for Executive 
Directors and senior management. 
Further details about the activities 
undertaken by the Remuneration 
Committee this year can be found 
on pages 71 to 76. 

The Terms of Reference for each 
committee are reviewed annually 
and can be found on the Group’s 
website.

The Board keeps all aspects of 
corporate governance under review, 
with the governance framework 
developing further as the Group 
continues to grow.

Principle 10: 
Communicate how the Company 
is governed and is performing 
by maintaining a dialogue with 
shareholders and other relevant 
stakeholders

During 2020, the Board (itself or via 
the Board committees) worked hard to 
strike that essential balance between 
achieving the Group’s short term 
objectives and longer term growth and 
development. Key activities included:

• monitoring and review of the

financial performance of the Group
on an ongoing basis including
capital expenditure proposals
and significant projects;

• review of the interim and annual
results including supplementary
papers;

• review of the effectiveness of the

Group’s internal financial controls,
general internal controls and risk
management systems;

• monitoring and review of the
effectiveness of the Business
Assurance function;

• overseeing the relationship with the

external auditor;

• approval of the strategy, three year

plans and budget;

• review of the Group risk register;
• approval of changes to remuneration
for the Chairman, CEO and CEO
direct reports;

• approval of 2019-2022 LTIP scheme;
• approval of annual bonus payments

and targets for the following
financial year;

• assessing and approving the

acquisition of CSS; and

• approval of the bank refinancing

arrangement.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

67

AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT

2020 has been an 
eventful year in light of 
significant M&A activity, 
a change in auditor, new 
accounting standards 
adopted and operational 
and financial challenges 
faced as a result of 
Covid-19.

Mark Tentori
Chair of the Audit 
Committee

The role of the Audit Committee is 
to assist the Board in fulfilling its 
corporate governance responsibilities 
in relation to the Group’s financial 
reporting, internal control and risk 
management systems as well as 
internal and external audit functions. 
The Committee also provides advice 
to the Board as to whether the annual 
report and financial statements 
taken as a whole are fair, balanced 
and understandable and provide 
the necessary information for 
shareholders to assess the Company’s 
position and performance, business 
model and strategy.

The Committee is made up of 
Non-Executive Directors: me, 
as the Chair, with Elaine Bond and 
John Charlton. We regularly invite 
the CEO and CFO to attend our 
meetings as well as the external 
auditor, PwC. Over the year we 
all met on four occasions.

The Board is satisfied that I, as Chair 
of the Committee, have recent and 
relevant financial experience. I am a 
chartered accountant, qualifying at 
PwC and recently retired as Portfolio 
Partner at Charterhouse Capital 
Partners LLP.

Dear Shareholder,

On behalf of the Board I am pleased to 
present the Audit Committee report for 
the year ending 31 March 2020. 

It has been an eventful year as the 
Group changed auditor, adopted 
IFRS 16, undertook a transformational 
acquisition alongside the operational, 
financial and audit logistical challenges 
faced as a result of Covid-19. 

As with most businesses, Design 
Group has been affected by the 
Covid-19 pandemic. While this has 
not had the severe adverse impact 
on the Group suffered by many, it has 
nevertheless brought challenges both 
operationally and administratively. The 
Audit Committee has been particularly 
focused on the impact on year end 
results preparation and the external 
audit process, especially as it is the first 
year in which PricewaterhouseCoopers 
LLP (‘PwC’) have undertaken the audit; 
and I am pleased to say that whilst there 
have been some challenges in relation 
to remote working, the year end process 
has run as well as we could have hoped. 

Covid-19 obviously features heavily in 
our principal risks and uncertainties 
section on pages 46 to 52, and the Audit 
Committee has also paid particular 
attention to risk sensitivities on the 
Group risk register.

The main duties of the Committee include: 

• providing oversight and challenge

to the financial reporting;

• ensuring the Group operates with
an appropriate internal controls
framework and adopts appropriate
risk management systems;

• ensuring the Group has suitable

arrangements and policies in place
to prevent fraud, bribery and other
compliance concerns (and to enable
employees to report such matters);

• monitoring and reviewing the

effectiveness of the Group’s Internal
Audit (Business Assurance) function
in the context of the Group’s overall
risk management framework; and

• overseeing the relationship with

the external auditor including their
appointment, remuneration, terms of
engagement, and annual audit plan.

The Terms of Reference set out the 
duties in more detail and can be found 
on our website and incorporate the 
relevant elements of the QCA Corporate 
Governance Code. This report highlights 
the key discussions, decisions and 
actions that have taken place this year.

Mark Tentori
Chair of the Audit Committee

27 July 2020

68

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

GOVERNANCE3) The use of alternative performance

5) The restatement and representation

of prior year comparatives as
detailed in the basis of preparation
accounting policy note on pages 94
to 95. The Committee is comfortable
that a robust review of the accounts
(and methodology where necessary)
has been undertaken by the Group
finance function, alongside the new
auditor, PwC, to ensure that the
financial statements are materially
accurate.

6) The decision as a Group to

change reporting currency from
1 April 2020 from pounds sterling
to US dollars. This decision was
taken by the Board at the time of
the CSS acquisition announcement,
in the knowledge that a significant
majority of the Group’s earnings
going forward will be denominated
in US dollars. The Committee
believes that the presentation
currency change will give investors
and other stakeholders a clearer
understanding of the Group’s
financial performance over time
by reducing the volatility of the
Group’s earnings to the risk of
foreign currency movements
and the impact these will have
on the translation of earnings in
non-US currency.

measures (‘APMs’) to present
adjusted profit alongside its
statutory counterpart. This involved
the exclusion of costs referred to
throughout as ‘adjusting items’ that
are considered by the business to
prevent the reader of the financial
accounts from obtaining an accurate
appreciation of the underlying
performance of the business. These
included costs that are considered
by the Directors to be material and
exceptional in nature, share-based
payment costs (also known as
LTIP costs) and the amortisation
of acquisition intangibles.
The Committee is satisfied that
this approach, together with the
narrative, gives a clear and balanced
view of the Group’s underlying
performance. In addition, the
rationale and explanations behind
the use of APMs is clearly disclosed.
4) The adoption of the new accounting
standard IFRS 16 Leases. As per
the detail on pages 96 to 98 of the
accounting policies note, and as has
been seen amongst many adopters,
this has had a significant impact
for the Group. The Committee
has reviewed and understood
the approach taken in respect of
the assessment of the impact of
the standard and agree with the
decision of the business in respect
of the methodology of adoption
being ‘modified retrospective’.
As part of the adoption of IFRS 16,
the Group’s lease accounting policy
was reviewed and updated.

Key activities and actions 
over the year:
Financial statements
The Audit Committee reviewed 
and approved the unaudited interim 
financial statements for the period 
ending 30 September 2019 and the full 
year audited statements for the period 
ending 31 March 2020. In reviewing 
the financial statements the Committee 
considered reports from the Group 
finance function as well as the 
external auditor. 

As discussed overleaf, an important 
aspect of the work completed 
in relation to the year ended 
31 March 2020 financial statements 
has been to consider the various 
impacts that Covid-19 has had on the 
Group, including considering asset 
valuation, increased incremental costs 
directly associated with the virus and 
the going concern basis for preparation 
of the accounts. As such, additional 
disclosure has been incorporated as 
required throughout the annual report.

Significant accounting matters
The significant reporting matters and 
judgements the Committee considered 
during the year included: 

1) The acquisition accounting

2)

for CSS under IFRS 3 Business
Combinations, which has created
intangible assets in relation to the
customer relationships, brand name
and goodwill.
In addition to the CSS acquisition,
as part of our year-end processes,
the carrying value of all CSS
acquisition related intangibles, as
well as already existing intangibles
and goodwill resulting from previous
acquisitions, have been assessed
to determine whether there is any
impairment. The Committee has
concluded, based on appropriate
assumptions on future cash flows,
discount rates used and long term
growth rates, that there is sufficient
headroom available resulting in
no impairment requirement.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

69

AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT
CONTINUED

Key activities and actions 
over the year continued:
Internal controls
The Committee continually reviews the 
effectiveness of the Group’s internal 
controls. As a decentralised business, 
each business unit has its own 
finance function, which is responsible 
for managing the processes and 
procedures, including financial 
controls and accounting policies 
within its jurisdiction. Importantly, 
the Group dictates a set of minimum 
financial controls that each business 
unit is expected to adhere to, along 
with Group accounting policies to 
which each business unit is aligned 
to. This forms part of the Group’s 
financial control framework. 

Each business unit confirms, with 
every monthly accounts submission, 
that they are adhering to this minimum 
set of controls. Bi-annually a more 
comprehensive Self-Assessment 
checklist is required to be completed 
by each business unit. This provides 
the Group finance function, and 
therefore the Committee, with comfort 
that appropriate financial controls are 
in place around the Group. 

To gain further comfort, the Group 
operates an internal audit function, 
which is outsourced to Mazars LLP 
(‘Mazars’). They have undertaken 
baseline control reviews around 
each of the business units (with the 
exception of CSS given its recent 
addition to the Group), identifying areas 
of weakness, that subsequently have 
been addressed with oversight from 
the Group function. 

An additional layer of review is 
provided by the Group finance function, 
including detailed balance sheet and 
working capital reviews for each of the 
business units annually. The reviews 
have continued this financial year 
facilitated through onsite visits by the 
Group team, including understanding 
the business units’ approach to 
balance sheet reconciliations as well 
as a detailed review of the working 
capital process. 

Internal Audit/Business 
Assurance
This year has seen Mazars revisit our 
US business to assess progress on 
baseline controls along with a baseline 
control review at Impact following the 
anniversary of the acquisition; Mazars 
have also undertaken a Business 
Continuity Planning review around all 
key manufacturing sites in the Group. 

We also commissioned an external 
firm to undertake a Group-wide cyber 
security review which has commenced 
this financial year, starting with the 
largest part of our business, being 
the US. 

Risk function
The Committee oversees the Group’s 
risk management framework, 
monitoring and reviewing the risk 
assessment process and advising the 
Board on risk exposures. This year 
the Committee worked with Mazars 
to identify improvements in the risk 
processes to ensure they remain robust 
and adhere to the latest FRC guidance. 
As a result we have reassessed our 
processes and the monitoring of risk 
around the Group. Risk registers 
have been updated to capture more 
information on both financial and 
non-financial impacts of identified risks 
and the risk framework in which the 
Group operates has been refined. 
This is especially important given the 
significant growth the Group has seen 
over recent years. 

External audit
The Audit Committee announced last 
year the intention to re-tender the 
external audit work to ensure the Group 
is getting the best service and value for 
money. This process was undertaken 
ahead of the AGM in September and 
the formal appointment of PwC as 
the Group’s auditor for this financial 
year onwards was announced at our 
AGM. Since then, the Committee and 
Group finance function have worked 
closely with PwC. They started their 
engagement by performing a review 
of our interim financial statements in 
November 2019 and provided us with 
a review opinion in respect of these – 
the first time the Group has obtained 
an external opinion at the interim 
stage. This was an active decision by 
the Group, especially in light of our 
seasonal business, to provide us with 
further comfort in relation to our interim 
results.

The Committee monitors the 
Company’s relationship with the 
external auditor to ensure that external 
independence and objectivity are 
maintained. As part of its review the 
Committee monitors the provision of 
non-audit services by the external 
auditor. From the end of this calendar 
year, the Group will move all non-audit 
services away from PwC, in line with 
the Revised Ethical Standards as 
published by the FRC in 2019 which 
deems AIM listed companies to be 
‘Other Entities of Public Interest’ 
and subject to non-audit services 
restrictions.

The Committee has recommended 
to the Board that PwC are re-appointed 
as external auditor for the forthcoming 
financial year. This will be put to 
shareholders at the AGM in September.

Update to Group policies
In recognising the growing size and 
complexity of the Group, the Audit 
Committee oversaw the update and 
roll out of a new Group-wide Third 
Party Due Diligence policy. 

70

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

GOVERNANCEDIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT

The impact of Covid-19 
has been significant. 
Our focus is to 
ensure we continue 
to incentivise our 
management teams 
appropriately during 
these challenging times.

Elaine Bond
Chair of Remuneration 
Committee

Part 1: Chair statement
Covid‑19
As detailed in the strategic report, 
the Group has delivered robust 
results in what was a challenging year. 
The key financial objectives were profit 
growth and the associated increase 
in earnings per share alongside cash 
generation. The impact of Covid-19 on 
the Group has resulted in a number 
of these objectives being missed and 
as such the Remuneration Committee 
has worked with the executive team 
to determine the most appropriate 
actions to take in relation to executive 
remuneration. The following decisions 
have been taken: 

Executive Director salary reviews
For 2020, executives have waived their 
annual salary review. As such, salaries 
will remain as follows:

• Paul Fineman £400k per annum;
• Giles Willits £325k per annum; and
• Lance Burn £240k per annum.

Annual bonus
The impact of Covid-19 on the business 
is significant and we can advise that 
the Executive Directors will not receive 
their bonus entitlement for the year 
ended 31 March 2020. 

LTIP awards
This year’s results result in the 
2017-2020 LTIP awards vesting 
at 76% of the total award.

The Remuneration Committee 
recognise that it is essential through 
the challenging times ahead of the 
Group following Covid-19, particularly 
in the 2021 financial year, that the 
executives and wider management 
teams are suitably incentivised to 
ensure the Group emerges from this 
unprecedented situation healthy and 
ready to continue its growth story. 

Dear Shareholder,

On behalf of the Board I am pleased 
to present to you the Remuneration 
Committee’s report for the year ended 
31 March 2020.

The Committee is chaired by me and 
the other members are Mark Tentori 
and John Charlton. We met three 
times formally during the year, with 
full attendance by the members.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

71

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT
CONTINUED

Part 1: Chair statement continued
Covid‑19 continued
LTIP awards continued
As such, the Remuneration Committee 
and management have focused 
on balancing the remuneration of 
key individuals toward long term 
share-based incentives, while reducing 
cash-based performance rewards. 

For LTIP awards due to vest in future 
years, the Committee is reviewing, 
with our external advisers, the existing 
metrics with a view to considering 
changes to the performance targets. 
At the time of writing, no decision has 
been made.

Other key activities of the 
Committee during the year
• Reviewed the Committee’s Terms

of Reference

• Undertook a self-evaluation of

the Committee. See page 65 for
further detail

• Reviewed the Business Expense

Policy

• Reviewed training requirements

of Committee members

• Approved remuneration section
of Company annual report and
financial statements

Assistance to the Committee
During the period the Committee 
received input from the CEO, the 
CFO and the Company Secretary. 
In addition, it engaged Deloitte 
LLP and MM&K Limited to provide 
remuneration advice.

Payments made to former 
Directors and payments for 
loss of office
No payments were made to former 
Directors during the year and no 
payments for loss of office were made.

The Committee believes the Group’s 
remuneration strategy, and the 
structures implementing that strategy, 
have contributed positively to 
maintaining the stable and motivated 
management team of the Group, who 
have continued to deliver consistently 
strong performances for shareholders.

Elaine Bond
Chair of Remuneration Committee

27 July 2020

72

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

GOVERNANCEPart 2: Remuneration policy
Executive Directors
The Group’s remuneration policy is to ensure that the remuneration of Executive Directors is sufficiently competitive to 
enable the Group to retain and motivate existing Directors and attract high-quality performers in the future. The Group aims 
to incentivise and reward its Executive Directors in a way that is consistent with the Group’s commercial objectives and to 
align the interests of the Directors with those of the shareholders. To achieve this, the Executive Directors’ total remuneration 
comprises both fixed remuneration and variable reward, the latter reflecting Group performance. As discussed in part 1 
of the remuneration report, our remuneration policy is being revisited in response to the impact of Covid-19 on business 
performance.

The five main components of the Executive Directors’ remuneration packages can be seen in the table below, with a clear 
link to the Group’s business model and strategy:

Reward

Base salary

Annual bonus

LTIP

Pension

Link to business model 
and strategy

‘Working with the winners’ 
extends to our employees – 
recruiting Executive Directors 
with the level of skills, talent 
and experience needed to 
execute our strategy.

The annual bonus encourages 
individuals to actively support 
and engage with the delivery 
of the Group strategy, with pay 
out directly based on Group 
performance.

The primary purpose of the 
LTIP is to reward the individual 
for delivering the Group 
strategy and, in turn, increasing 
shareholder value.

Operation and performance

Maximum opportunity

Salaries are based on a 
number of factors, including: 

• the skills and experience of

the individual;

• the size, responsibilities and

complexity of the role;
• external market data; and
• inter-Group comparisons.

The Remuneration Committee 
sets the performance measures 
and targets each year. Bonuses 
are paid in cash once the 
annual results have been 
audited and are subject to the 
approval of the Committee. 

LTIP awards are in the form 
of shares and are subject to 
performance conditions.

Not applicable.

The maximum achievable is 
120% of base salary. 

For the CEO up to 175% of 
base salary and for the other 
Executive Directors up to 150% 
of base salary. Both then have 
an out performance element of 
up to 50% of the initial grant. 

To assist in the recruitment 
strategy by enabling Directors 
to make long term provisions 
for their future retirement.

Pensions are provided in 
line with market practice 
and relevant statutory 
requirements.

Up to 15% of base salary for 
the CEO. Up to 10% of base 
salary for other Executive 
Directors.

Other benefits

The provision of additional 
benefits assists in the Group’s 
recruitment strategy and gives 
the employee comfort and 
assistance in carrying out their 
roles effectively. 

Benefits can include: life 
assurance, private medical 
insurance and car allowance. 

Not applicable.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

73

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT
CONTINUED

Part 2: Remuneration policy 
continued
Dilution of share capital 
by employee share plans
The Company monitors and has 
complied with dilution limits in its 
various share scheme rules. The Board 
retains the flexibility of using Employee 
Benefit Trusts to buy ordinary shares to 
mitigate future dilution.

Non‑Executive Directors
The Group’s remuneration policy in 
respect of Non-Executive Directors 
is to pay annual fees which reflect 
the responsibilities and duties placed 
upon them, whilst also having regard to 
market practice.

The remuneration of the Non-Executive 
Directors and of the Chairman is 
recommended by the Executive 
Directors and approved by the 
Remuneration Committee (with no 
Director being involved in any decision 
relating to their own remuneration).

Service contracts
The Executive Directors have service 
contracts which can be terminated by 
the Company with no greater than one 
year’s notice. 

Non-Executive Directors do not 
have service contracts and their 
appointments may be terminated 
without compensation at any time. 

All Non-Executive Directors have letters 
of appointment and their appointment 
and subsequent re-appointment is 
subject to approval by shareholders.

2021
No additional significant changes to 
the remuneration policy are envisaged 
for 2021; however, the Remuneration 
Committee will continue to regularly 
review the policy to ensure it remains 
appropriate to the business, especially 
in light of Covid-19.

Part 3: Annual report on remuneration
Directors’ remuneration(a)
The summary of Directors’ remuneration is as follows:

Salary and bonus

Benefits

Pension contribution

LTIP

Total remuneration

Aggregate for all Directors 

Highest paid Director

2020
£000

2019
£000

1,223 

1,666 

75 

117 

1,514 

2,929 

74 

107 

1,941 

3,788 

2020
£000

325 

15 

33 

2019  
£000

668

30

56

722  

1,095 

1,302 

2,056 

The remuneration in respect of the year ended 31 March 2020 to the Directors, by individual, was as follows:

Year ended 31 March 2020

Executive Directors

Lance Burn 

Paul Fineman 

Giles Willits 

Total Executive

Non-Executive Directors

Elaine Bond 

John Charlton 

Anders Hedlund 

Mark Tentori 

Total Non-Executive

Total Directors

Salary/fees 
£

Bonus 
£

Benefits(b)

£

Pension
£

LTIP(c)
£

Total 
£

240,000 

400,000 

325,000 

965,000 

40,996 

77,766 

95,665 

43,285 

257,712 

  1,222,712 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

15,344 

28,639 

15,015 

24,000 

256,934 

536,278 

60,000 

546,240  1,034,879 

32,500 

711,261  1,083,776 

58,998 

116,500  1,514,435  2,654,933 

2,388 

9,206 

4,416 

— 

16,010 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

43,384 

86,972 

100,081 

43,285 

273,722 

75,008 

116,500  1,514,435  2,928,655

(a) Audited. 
(b) The benefits relate primarily to private health and car benefits.
(c)  The value of the LTIP above is calculated by multiplying the number of shares in respect of which the award vested (being 102,101, 132,946 and 48,025
for Paul Fineman, Giles Willits and Lance Burn respectively) by £5.35 (being the three month volume weighted average share price up to 23 July 2020).

74

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

GOVERNANCE 
 
 
The highest paid Director is Giles Willits (2019: Paul Fineman).

The Group operated a Group personal pension plan to which the Group contributed for one Director (2019: one) 
and provides death in service life assurance to the value of between four and six times pensionable salary.

A credit of £17,000 has been recognised in the income statement in the year relating to Directors in respect of the 
Long Term Incentive Plan (2019: £1.9 million expense).

The remuneration in respect of the year ended 31 March 2019 to the Directors, by individual, was as follows:

Year ended 31 March 2019

Executive Directors 

Lance Burn 

Paul Fineman 

Giles Willits 

Total Executive 

Non-Executive Directors

Elaine Bond 

John Charlton 

Anders Hedlund 

Mark Tentori 

Total Non-Executive

Total Directors 

Salary/fees 
£

Bonus 
£

Benefits(b)

£

Pension
£

LTIP(c)
£

Total  

£

231,416 

25,000 

375,000 

292,500 

275,000 

214,500 

15,049 

29,549 

14,761 

23,142 

642,112 

936,719 

56,250 

1,301,597  2,054,896 

27,500 

— 

531,761 

881,416 

532,000 

59,359 

106,892  1,943,709  3,523,376 

40,192 

76,242 

93,790 

42,303 

252,527 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

2,311 

8,345 

3,974 

— 

14,630 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

42,503 

84,587 

97,764 

42,303 

267,157 

1,133,943 

532,000 

73,989 

106,892  1,943,709  3,790,533 

(a) Audited.
(b) The benefits relate primarily to private health and car benefits.
(c)  The value of the LTIP above is calculated by multiplying the number of shares in respect of which the award vested (being 226,791 and 111,882 

for Paul Fineman and Lance Burn respectively) by £5.73 (being the three month volume weighted average share price up to 5 June 2019).

Long Term Incentive Plan(a)
Share options held by Executive Directors who served during the year are as follows:

Lance Burn 

Paul Fineman 

Giles Willits 

LTIP vested 
2015-2018 

LTIP vested 
2016-2019 

LTIP vested(b) 
2017-2020 

LTIP not 
yet vested(c) 
2018-2021 

LTIP not 
yet vested(c)  
2019-2022

76,641 

 111,882 

 48,025 

 109,819 

90,991

312,916 

 226,791 

 102,101 

 207,611 

176,923

 — 

— 

 132,946 

 130,501 

123,215

(a) Audited. 
(b) 76% of the initial award plus dividend shares will formally vest on 23 July 2020 following the Remuneration and Audit Committees’ approval of the 

results for the year ended 31 March 2020.

(c)  The unvested scheme amounts include current accrued dividend shares.

Lance Burn exercised 250,000 share options during the year, no other Directors exercised any options during the year. 
For further details including performance conditions see note 23.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

75

 
 
 
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT
CONTINUED

Part 3: Annual report on remuneration continued
Cumulative total shareholder return (dividend reinvested) vs. selected indices
The graph below shows the percentage change in total shareholder return for the last seven years compared to the 
FTSE Small Cap, FTSE AIM All-share and the FTSE AIM UK 50.

£1,800

£1,500

£1,200

£900

£600

£300

0
0
1
o
t
d
e
s
a
b
e
r

n
r
u
t
e
r

l

r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
s

l

a
t
o
T

£0
Mar 13

+992.1%

+36.9%
+20.1%
+2.2%

Mar 14

Mar 15

Mar 16

Mar 17

Mar 18

Mar 19

Mar 20

IG Design Group

FTSE Small Cap

FTSE AIM All-share

FTSE AIM UK 50

76

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

GOVERNANCE 
 
 
 
 
 
DIRECTORS’ REPORT

The Directors present their annual 
report on the affairs of the Group, 
together with the financial statements 
and independent auditor’s report for 
the year ended 31 March 2020. 

Directors
The Directors of the Company 
during the period under review, 
and subsequently to the date of 
this report, were: 

• Elaine Bond
• Lance Burn
• John Charlton
• Paul Fineman
• Anders Hedlund
• Mark Tentori
• Giles Willits

Results and dividends
Results for the year ended 
31 March 2020 are set out in the 
consolidated income statement 
on page 88. The Directors are 
recommending a final dividend of 
5.75p per share which, if approved 
at the AGM, will result in a full year 
dividend of 8.75p per share for 2020.

Articles of association
A copy of the full articles of 
association are available on request 
from the Company Secretary and 
are also available on the Group’s 
website www.thedesigngroup.com. 
Any amendments to the articles of 
association can only be made by a 
special resolution of the shareholders.

Acquisition of the  
Company’s own shares
At the AGM held on 11 September 2019, 
the Company was authorised in 
accordance with Section 701 of the 
Act to make market purchases (within 
the meaning of Section 693(4) of the Act) 
of up to 7,887,347 ordinary shares (being 
approximately 10% of the share capital) 
on such terms and in such manner as 
the Directors of the Company may from 
time to time determine. 

This authority was not used during 
the year or up to the date of this 
report. Shareholders will be asked to 
renew these authorities at the AGM as 
detailed in the next AGM notice. 

Directors’ indemnities and 
Directors’ and officers’ liability 
insurance
The Company has purchased 
Directors’ and officers’ liability 
insurance during the year as allowed 
by the Company’s articles.

Financial risk management
Details of the Directors’ assessment 
of the principal risks and uncertainties 
which could impact the business are 
outlined in the principal risks and 
uncertainties section on pages 46 
to 52. The Board manages internal 
risk through the ongoing review 
of the Group’s risk register and 
the Board manages external risk 
through monitoring of the economic 
and regulatory environment and 
market conditions.

Share capital and 
substantial shareholders
Details of the issued share capital, 
together with details of the movements 
during the year, are shown in note 20 to 
the consolidated financial statements. 
The Company has one class of 
ordinary share which carries no right 
to fixed income. Each ordinary share 
carries the right to one vote at general 
meetings of the Company.

There are no specific restrictions on 
the size of a holding nor on the transfer 
of shares, which are both governed by 
the general provisions of the articles of 
association and prevailing legislation.

Details of share-based payments 
are set out in note 23 to the financial 
statements and the Directors’ 
remuneration report. No person has 
any special rights or control over the 
Company’s share capital and all issued 
shares are fully paid.

At 31 March 2020, the Company 
has been notified of the following 
substantial shareholders of the issued 
ordinary share capital of the Company:

Hedlund Family(a)

23.94%

% of issued share capital

Liontrust Investments 

Octopus Investments 

Blackrock Investments 

Polar Capital 

Close Brothers AM 

Paul E Fineman(b)

Schroder Investment Mgt 

9.86%

8.95%

4.71%

3.85%

2.86%

2.46%

2.19%

(a)

In addition to the Hedlund family’s beneficial 
interest set out above the Hedlund Family 
is also interested in a further 900,790 
ordinary shares, representing a further 
0.93% of the current issued share capital 
of the Company. These ordinary shares 
are held by West Coast Trust, a trust for 
the benefit of Anders Hedlund’s adult 
children. In total the Hedlund family is 
interested in 22,818,994 ordinary shares, 
representing 23.68% of the current issued 
share capital of Company.

(b) This includes a non-beneficial interest 
in 174,608 ordinary shares at 5p each.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

77

DIRECTORS’ REPORT 
CONTINUED

Brexit
The Group continues to keep the 
potential implications of Brexit for 
the Group under review. The risk 
associated with Brexit is relatively 
limited for the Group as it is mainly 
applicable to our UK business which 
represents less than 20% of the Group.

Going concern
The Directors continue to adopt the 
going concern basis in preparing the 
annual report and financial statements. 
Further details are set out in note 1 to 
the consolidated financial statements 
and page 44 of the executive review. 

Post balance sheet events
See note 29 for details.

Political donations
No political donations were made 
during the period under review.

Stakeholder engagement
Please refer to the Section 172 (1) 
statement on pages 8 and 9.

Health and safety
The Group is committed to maintaining 
high standards of health and safety in 
every area of the business.

It is the aim of the Group to exceed 
the requirements of health and safety 
legislation and we have established 
a health and safety co-ordinator to 
ensure continuous improvement of 
health and safety across the Group.

Employees
The Group recognises the benefits 
of keeping employees informed on 
matters affecting them as employees 
and on the various factors affecting 
the performance of the Group. This is 
achieved through employee briefings 
that are held in most businesses at 
least twice a year and regular team 
briefings.

The Group conforms to current 
employment laws on the employment 
of disabled persons and, where we are 
informed of any employee disability, 
management makes all reasonable 
efforts to accommodate that 
employee’s requirements.

Directors’ interests
The Directors who held office during the year had the following direct interests in the ordinary shares of the Company:

Interest in ordinary shares at the end of the year 

Elaine Bond

Lance Burn

John Charlton(a)

Paul Fineman(b)

Anders Hedlund(c)

Mark Tentori

Giles Willits

2020

2019

 19,301 

 19,301 

— 

— 

299,616 

 619,616 

  2,369,334 

 2,369,334 

488 

 488 

11,111 

 11,111 

 93,573 

 93,573 

In addition to the above holdings:
(a) 37,500 (2019: 37,500) shares are held by the wife of John Charlton.
(b) Paul Fineman owns a non-beneficial interest in 174,608 (2019: 174,608) ordinary shares of 5p each. 
(c)  16,642,640 (2019: 16,642,640) and 5,275,116 (2019: 5,275,116) ordinary shares of 5p each are respectively registered in the name of AV Artistic 

Limited (‘Artistic’) and Malios Limited, companies incorporated in the British Virgin Islands, and under the ultimate control of the Hedlund family. 
In addition to the Hedlund Family’s beneficial interest set out above, the Hedlund Family is also interested in a further 900,790 ordinary shares. 
These ordinary shares are held by West Coast Trust, a trust for the benefit of Anders Hedlund’s adult children. In total the Hedlund family has 
interests in 22,818,994 ordinary shares, representing 23.68% of the current issued share capital of Company. 

Disclosure of information to the auditor
In the case of each Director in office at the date the Directors’ report is approved, the following applies:

• the Director knows of no information, which would be relevant to the auditor for the purpose of their audit report, of which

the auditor is not aware; and

• the Director has taken all steps that he/she ought to have taken as a Director to make him/herself aware of any such

information and to establish that the auditor is aware of it.

A resolution to re-appoint PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP as auditor of the Group will be put to the Annual General Meeting.

Approval of the strategic report and Directors’ report
The strategic report and Directors’ report were approved by the Board on 27 July 2020.

78

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

GOVERNANCE 
 
 
 
Environmental reporting
During 2020 we reviewed the UK businesses’ total energy use and associated greenhouse gas emissions in accordance 
with the government’s guidance on streamlined energy and carbon reporting. The result of this review, focusing on the 
combustion of gas, the consumption of fuel for transport, and electricity use were:

Consumption 

7,418,165 kWh 

Tonnes CO2e
1,909.76

8,031,757 kWh 

1,476.64

5,600 litres 

8,019 kg 

1.44

25.91

167.52

3,581.27

Fiscal year (April 2019‑March 2020)
CO2 emissions by source

Source

Electricity

Gas

Heating oil

LPG

Company vehicles

Total

Energy intensity ratio: 

Total tonnes CO2e

= 29.844

(1) million (£) annual turnover

Methodology: The CO2(e) emissions 
were calculated using available energy 
and mileage data collected for our 
Climate Change Agreement (‘CCA’) 
and Energy Savings Opportunities 
Scheme (‘ESOS’) reporting purposes 
and converted using current factors 
published by the Department for 
Business, Energy and Industrial 
Strategy.

In addition we looked at ways in which 
we can become more energy efficient 
and have taken the following actions:

• added electric charging points
to Design Group UK locations;
• procured more energy efficient

machinery;

• changed light fittings to low energy

use LED;

• ESOS activities e.g. buying more
energy efficient machinery and
ensuring external roller doors
such as loading bays are working
efficiently to save heat/energy loss;

• moved to using electric/hybrid

vehicles where possible;

• reduced waste to landfill activities

e.g. waste segregation and analysis;
awareness feedback to all relevant
persons; recycling and use of
recycled materials where possible;
and

• general internal waste reduction

activities.

Joy Laws
Company Secretary

27 July 2020

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

79

 
 
 
STATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES 
IN RESPECT OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The Directors are responsible for 
preparing the annual report and the 
financial statements in accordance with 
applicable law and regulation.

Company law requires the Directors 
to prepare financial statements for 
each financial year. Under that law the 
Directors have prepared the Group 
financial statements in accordance 
with International Financial Reporting 
Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the 
European Union and the Company 
financial statements in accordance 
with United Kingdom Generally 
Accepted Accounting Practice (United 
Kingdom Accounting Standards, 
comprising FRS 102 “The Financial 
Reporting Standard applicable in 
the UK and Republic of Ireland”, 
and applicable law). 

The Directors are also responsible for 
safeguarding the assets of the Group 
and Company and hence for taking 
reasonable steps for the prevention 
and detection of fraud and other 
irregularities.

The Directors are responsible for 
keeping adequate accounting records 
that are sufficient to show and explain 
the Group and Company’s transactions 
and disclose with reasonable accuracy 
at any time the financial position of the 
Group and Company and enable them 
to ensure that the financial statements 
comply with the Companies Act 2006.

The Directors are responsible for 
the maintenance and integrity of the 
Company’s website. Legislation in 
the United Kingdom governing the 
preparation and dissemination of 
financial statements may differ from 
legislation in other jurisdictions.

Under company law the Directors must 
not approve the financial statements 
unless they are satisfied that they 
give a true and fair view of the state of 
affairs of the Group and Company and 
of the profit or loss of the Group and 
Company for that period. In preparing 
the financial statements, the Directors 
are required to:

• select suitable accounting policies
and then apply them consistently;
• state whether applicable IFRSs as
adopted by the European Union
have been followed for the Group
financial statements and United
Kingdom Accounting Standards,
comprising FRS 102, have been
followed for the Company financial
statements, subject to any material
departures disclosed and explained
in the financial statements;

• make judgements and accounting
estimates that are reasonable and
prudent; and

• prepare the financial statements

on the going concern basis unless
it is inappropriate to presume
that the Group and Company will
continue in business.

80

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

GOVERNANCEINDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT 
TO THE MEMBERS OF IG DESIGN GROUP PLC

Report on the audit of the financial statements
Opinion
In our opinion:

• IG Design Group plc’s Group financial statements and Company financial statements (the “financial statements”) give a
true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the Company’s affairs as at 31 March 2020 and of the Group’s profit
and the Group’s cash flows for the year then ended;

• the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting

Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union;

• the Company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted
Accounting Practice (United Kingdom Accounting Standards, comprising FRS 102 “The Financial Reporting Standard
applicable in the UK and Republic of Ireland”, and applicable law); and

• the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.

We have audited the financial statements, included within the annual report and financial statements (the “Annual Report”), 
which comprise: the consolidated and Company balance sheets as at 31 March 2020; the consolidated income statement 
and consolidated statement of comprehensive income, the consolidated cash flow statement, and the consolidated and  
Company statements of changes in equity for the year then ended; and the notes to the financial statements, which include 
a description of the significant accounting policies.

Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (“ISAs (UK)”) and applicable law. 
Our responsibilities under ISAs (UK) are further described in the Auditors’ responsibilities for the audit of the financial 
statements section of our report. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to 
provide a basis for our opinion.

Independence
We remained independent of the Group in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the 
financial statements in the UK, which includes the FRC’s Ethical Standard, as applicable to listed entities, and we have 
fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements.

Our audit approach
Overview

Materiality

Audit
scope

Key audit
matters

Materiality
• Overall Group materiality: £1.8 million, based on auditor judgement with reference

to key financial metrics.

• Overall Company materiality: £2.4 million, based on 1% of net assets.

Audit scope
• Full scope audit of the financial information of eight components, and specified procedures

over certain balances within four components.

• Specified procedures audit over the acquisition balance sheet of CSS Industries, Inc.
• Audit coverage over 95% of revenue and 97% of net assets.

Key audit matters
• Classification and presentation of adjusting items (Group)
• Acquisition accounting for CSS (Group)
• Impact of Covid-19 (Group and Company)

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

81

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT CONTINUED
TO THE MEMBERS OF IG DESIGN GROUP PLC

Report on the audit of the financial statements continued
Our audit approach continued
The scope of our audit
As part of designing our audit, we determined materiality and assessed the risks of material misstatement in the financial 
statements. In particular, we looked at where the Directors made subjective judgements, for example in respect of significant 
accounting estimates that involved making assumptions and considering future events that are inherently uncertain. As in all 
of our audits we also addressed the risk of management override of internal controls, including evaluating whether there was 
evidence of bias by the Directors that represented a risk of material misstatement due to fraud.

Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in the auditors’ professional judgement, were of most significance in the audit of the 
financial statements of the current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether 
or not due to fraud) identified by the auditors, including those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the 
allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters, and any comments we 
make on the results of our procedures thereon, were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a 
whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters. This is not a complete 
list of all risks identified by our audit. 

Key audit matter

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Classification and presentation 
of adjusting items (Group)
Refer to the Accounting policies in note 1, 
and disclosure in note 3 of the Consolidated 
financial statements.

During the year, £28.8 million 
(2019: £12.9 million) of adjusting items have 
been recorded in arriving at management’s 
alternative performance measure “APM” 
for operating profit. The Group no longer 
includes these items on the face of the 
Consolidated Income Statement, but 
presents them in note 3 to the financial 
statements reconciling the APM to statutory 
profit.

The Group’s accounting policy is to present 
separately, as adjusting items, income 
and expenses where such disclosure is 
considered by management to be useful 
to the users of the financial statements in 
helping them understand the underlying 
business performance.

Adjusting items are not defined by IFRS 
and therefore judgement is required 
in determining the application of such 
classification, and certain items have 
also required management estimation. 
Such judgement and estimation may be 
susceptible to management bias.

We challenged the overall quantum of adjusting items and the inclusion of certain costs and 
assessed the appropriateness of their presentation by reference to the Group’s accounting 
policies and FRC guidance in this area. We challenged the transparency of the associated 
disclosures to ensure that the nature of the adjustments were clearly described, particularly 
those adjusting items where estimates have been involved for example in calculating 
operational inefficiencies. 

The audit procedures performed were as follows:

Losses/(gains) and transaction costs relating to acquisitions and disposals 
of businesses
•  We traced a sample of acquisition transaction costs to supporting invoices.
•  We agreed the sale price for the Shaoxing, China subsidiary to the legal sale agreement, 

agreed sale proceeds to bank statements and recomputed the loss on sale. 

Acquisition integration and restructuring costs
•  We traced a sample of severance costs to the agreement reached with the employees.
•  We traced a sample of incremental temporary warehousing costs and outsourcing costs 

to invoice. 

•  We traced a sample of customer penalties for late delivery to correspondence with the 

customer and invoice or settlement where this was received. 

•  Management’s calculation of operational inefficiencies arising was performed with reference

to the last period of manufacturing that they consider was unaffected by the merger 
of the US operations and therefore “normalised”; this was the year to 31 March 2018. 
We recomputed the incremental costs with reference to the 31 March 2018 actual cost per 
unit of manufacture, volume reports, and current year audited labour costs. 

Covid-19 related impairment of assets and adjusting costs
In relation to impairment of assets:

•  We understood management’s assessment of specific inventory provisions, accounts 

receivable expected credit losses and fixed asset impairment and challenged the rationale 
that attributed these costs to the impact of Covid-19.

•  We have audited the additional impairment provisions using a combination of reviewing 

post year end sales and cash collections, obtaining evidence of customer communications, 
reviewing customer credit rating reports and external financial information, and validating the
basis and assessing the accuracy of management’s estimates.

•  We assessed management’s analysis of provisions that were triggered due to Covid-19 and 

those that were recorded as part of underlying operations.

82

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSKey audit matter

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Classification and presentation of 
adjusting items (Group) continued

Acquisition accounting for CSS (Group)
Refer to the Accounting policies in note 1, 
and disclosure in note 28 of the Consolidated 
financial statements.

On 3 March 2020 the Group acquired the 
entire share capital of CSS Industries, Inc. 
(“CSS”) for consideration of £95.9 million. 
In determining the fair value of assets and 
liabilities acquired, the Group recognised 
significant adjustments to CSS’s previously 
audited balance sheet and subsequent book 
values at the date of acquisition. 

Given the magnitude of the acquisition in 
the context of the Group, the significant 
adjustments made to determine the fair 
value of the assets acquired, and the 
inherent judgement involved in calculating 
the  provisional fair value of assets and 
liabilities acquired, this was considered 
to be a significant audit risk.

US tariffs
• We challenged management’s inclusion of US tariffs costs as tariffs themselves are 
not a non-recurring cost and also the absence of other reporters adjusting for this 
item. We ensured the management’s rationale for their inclusion as adjusting items was 
properly disclosed.

•  We traced a sample of tariff costs to invoice and payments made.

Acquisition amortisation
• We recomputed the amortisation expense with reference to the gross value and the useful 

economic life.

LTIP charges
• We tested the value of share options awarded in the year.
• We assessed assumptions taken by management regarding the likelihood of open share 

option schemes vesting.

Overall
We have tested the underlying calculations and sample tested the individual amounts to 
supporting documentation; we have also ensured that the adjusted profit APMs are not given 
undue prominence in the discussion of financial results in the Executive Review and that 
the disclosures provided clearly allow users of the accounts to understand the nature of the 
adjustments and the basis of the estimates and judgements applied.

We performed the following audit procedures in order to gain comfort over the existence, 
completeness, and valuation of the assets and liabilities acquired:

•  We read the legal agreement (‘Agreement and Plan of Merger’) in order to understand 

the nature of the transaction and ensure that relevant clauses that impact the acquisition 
accounting had been addressed by the Directors;

•  Agreed book values to the CSS general ledger at acquisition date;
•  Performed a reconciliation between the most recent publicly filed financial information for CSS 
(31 December 2019) and the acquisition date and understood movements, and audited the 
material adjustment that were included in the closing balance sheet at the acquisition date;

•  Engaged our valuation specialists to audit the purchase price allocation (‘PPA’) work 

performed by management’s expert to gain comfort over the completeness and valuation of 
intangible assets by assessing the methodology in the valuation model, auditing the discount 
rate and contributory asset charges, and evaluating the reasonableness of the underlying 
cash flows in the discounted cash flow model;

•  Engaged our property valuation specialists to review the methodologies adopted and key 

assumptions utilised by management’s expert in the valuation of freehold land and buildings; 
and confirmed completeness and existence of inventory through attendance at physical 
inventory counts and assessed management’s judgements used in the inventory fair value 
calculation by recalculating provision models and sample testing of data underpinning 
the model. We also assessed the inventory step up adjustment and determined it was 
materially reasonable when considering the stage of completion of work in progress and the 
assessment of net realisable value of that specific inventory;

•  Audited the other provisional fair value adjustments made, which included tracing amounts 
to supporting evidence such as contractual agreements, invoices and other supporting 
documentation; assessment of management’s judgements; and recalculation of provisioning
models;

•  We also reviewed the accounting policies of CSS compared to the Group to assess if any 

accounting policy alignment adjustments were required.

We consider that the provisional fair value of assets and liabilities acquired, and the resulting 
valuation of goodwill, are materially appropriate.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

83

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT CONTINUED
TO THE MEMBERS OF IG DESIGN GROUP PLC

Report on the audit of the financial statements continued
Our audit approach continued
Key audit matters continued

Key audit matter

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Impact of Covid-19 (Group and Company)
Refer to the Accounting policies in note 1 to 
the Consolidated financial statements and 
disclosure in the Executive Review of the  
annual report.

At the balance sheet date, and subsequently, 
the impact of Covid-19 on the UK and Global 
economy has been significant. As a global 
manufacturer of consumer products for sale 
into retail outlets, the Group is inherently 
impacted by this.

The Group’s forecasts used for going concern 
and impairment purposes therefore need to be 
considered in light of the uncertainty which is 
created by the impact of Covid-19. In particular 
possible downside scenarios and mitigating 
actions must be modelled in order to identify the 
potential going concern risk based on forecast 
cash flows and covenant compliance.

Management has concluded that the Group 
remains a going concern and that there is no 
material uncertainty in respect of this conclusion.

In addition, the Group has identified specific 
asset impairment provisions in respect of 
accounts receivable, inventory and fixed 
assets. See adjusting items key audit matter 
above for further details on those items.

We have performed the following procedures in order to assess the Group’s response to the 
uncertainty created by Covid-19:

•  evaluated management’s future cash flow forecasts based on comparison to prior year 
results, actual results in FY21 to date, current order book for FY21 external market 
information, and historical forecasting accuracy;

•  assessed the appropriateness of management’s downside sensitivities and performed 

additional independent sensitivity analysis focused on FY21 forecast sales which have not 
been confirmed through customer orders, and assessing the timing of cash flows impacting 
net debt at quarterly covenant test dates;

•  assessed management’s stress testing of the forecast (their non plausible scenario) and 

• 

considered if this was plausible;
reviewed the possible mitigating actions identified by management and assessed whether 
they are reasonable;

•  verified the mathematical accuracy of the going concern forecasts and impairment models;
•  considered liquidity headroom and covenant compliance on the banking facilities on base 
and sensitised scenarios. We considered the adjusting items in the adjusted leverage 
covenant definition, and circularised the bank to confirm the ongoing availability of facilities;

•  audited other assumptions used in the goodwill impairment model including underlying cash 

flows, long term growth rates and discount rates;

•  considered the carrying value of other assets including the provisions made in relation to 

inventory and debtors;

•  evaluated management’s assessment of other accounting estimates which have not been 

adjusted due to Covid-19; and

•  considered the appropriateness of management’s disclosure of the impact of the pandemic 

on the trading environment and future plans.

We concluded that the disclosures provided in relation to Covid-19 are appropriate. 
Our conclusions regarding going concern are set out later in this report.

How we tailored the audit scope
We tailored the scope of our audit to ensure that we performed enough work to be able to give an opinion on the financial 
statements as a whole, taking into account the structure of the Group and the Company, the accounting processes and 
controls, and the industry in which they operate.

The Group is structured into a number of reporting entities, including one for each trading subsidiary, holding companies and 
consolidation entities. We defined a component to be an individual reporting entity for which management prepares financial 
information.

We identified two financially significant components, being DG USA and Impact USA based on their contribution to the  
Group’s revenue for the year. A full scope audit was performed over each of these, as well as over the Parent Company 
and other larger trading components, giving a total of eight entities subject to full scope audit of their financial information. 
Based on judgement and discussions with the Audit Committee, we also performed specified procedures over certain 
balances at a further four components. A further 16 consolidation reporting packs were subject to audit at the Group level, 
and the remaining unaudited entities were subject to a desktop review. We also performed specified audit procedures on 
the acquisition balance sheet of CSS Industries Inc.

84

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSCertain balances were subject to testing at the Group level, including goodwill, external borrowings, 
and Directors’ emoluments.

The approach outlined above provides audit coverage over 95% revenue, 97% net assets and 72% of profit before tax, 
calculated on an absolute basis. Including specified audit procedures over other transactions within the Statement of  
comprehensive income, this provided a further contribution of 25% coverage of the Group’s absolute profit before tax.

All audit work was performed by PwC group and network firm component team auditors. The overseas component audit 
teams worked under instruction of the group engagement team and were in regular contact with the group engagement 
team throughout the audit cycle from planning to completion. In particular, the component auditors for the financially 
significant components held calls at least weekly throughout the year end audit period and were subject to a working 
paper review. Site visits had been planned to the USA for the group engagement partner to meet the audit teams and 
management, however due to Covid-19 this was unable to take place and was replaced by increased remote involvement 
in their work including video conferencing.

Materiality
The scope of our audit was influenced by our application of materiality. We set certain quantitative thresholds for materiality. 
These, together with qualitative considerations, helped us to determine the scope of our audit and the nature, timing and 
extent of our audit procedures on the individual financial statement line items and disclosures and in evaluating the effect 
of misstatements, both individually and in aggregate on the financial statements as a whole. 

Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole as follows:

Group financial statements

Company financial statements

Overall materiality

£1.8 million.

£2.4 million.

How we 
determined it

Rationale for 
benchmark 
applied

Auditor judgement using a number of financial metrics.

1% of net assets.

Due to the acquisition of CSS in the final month of the 
year, the impact of Covid-19, and the resulting small 
statutory profit before tax for the year, we considered a 
range of benchmarks in assessing materiality. Using our 
professional judgement and with reference to a number 
of different data points, we concluded that an overall 
materiality level of £1.8 million was appropriate. This 
represents 0.4% revenue and 0.6% net assets. 

We believe that net assets is the primary measure used by 
the shareholders in assessing the performance of the entity 
given it is a holding company for the Group.

Where balances were in scope for the Group audit, 
an allocated materiality of £400,000 was applied.

For each component in the scope of our Group audit, we allocated a materiality that is less than our overall Group materiality. 
The range of materiality allocated across components was between £15,000 and £1 million. Certain components were audited 
to a local statutory audit materiality that was also less than our overall Group materiality.

We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to them misstatements identified during our audit above £90,000 
(Group and Company audits) as well as misstatements below those amounts that, in our view, warranted reporting for 
qualitative reasons.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

85

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT CONTINUED
TO THE MEMBERS OF IG DESIGN GROUP PLC

Report on the audit of 
the financial statements 
continued
Conclusions relating to 
going concern
We have nothing to report in respect 
of the following matters in relation to 
which ISAs (UK) require us to report 
to you where: 

• the Directors’ use of the going
concern basis of accounting in
the preparation of the financial
statements is not appropriate; or
• the Directors have not disclosed
in the financial statements any
identified material uncertainties that
may cast significant doubt about the
Group’s and Company’s ability to
continue to adopt the going concern
basis of accounting for a period of
at least twelve months from the date
when the financial statements are
authorised for issue.

However, because not all future events 
or conditions can be predicted, this 
statement is not a guarantee as to 
the Group’s and Company’s ability 
to continue as a going concern. 

With respect to the Strategic Report 
and Directors’ Report, we also 
considered whether the disclosures 
required by the UK Companies Act 
2006 have been included. 

Based on the responsibilities 
described above and our work 
undertaken in the course of the audit, 
ISAs (UK) require us also to report 
certain opinions and matters as 
described below.

Strategic Report and 
Directors’ Report
In our opinion, based on the work 
undertaken in the course of the audit, 
the information given in the Strategic 
Report and Directors’ Report for 
the year ended 31 March 2020 is 
consistent with the financial statements 
and has been prepared in accordance 
with applicable legal requirements. 

In light of the knowledge and 
understanding of the Group and 
Company and their environment 
obtained in the course of the audit, 
we did not identify any material 
misstatements in the Strategic 
report and Directors’ report. 

Reporting on other information 
The other information comprises all 
of the information in the annual report 
other than the financial statements 
and our auditor’s report thereon. 
The Directors are responsible for the 
other information. Our opinion on the 
financial statements does not cover 
the other information and, accordingly, 
we do not express an audit opinion or, 
except to the extent otherwise explicitly 
stated in this report, any form of 
assurance thereon. 

In connection with our audit of the 
financial statements, our responsibility 
is to read the other information and, 
in doing so, consider whether the other 
information is materially inconsistent 
with the financial statements or 
our knowledge obtained in the 
audit, or otherwise appears to be 
materially misstated. If we identify 
an apparent material inconsistency 
or material misstatement, we are 
required to perform procedures 
to conclude whether there is a 
material misstatement of the financial 
statements or a material misstatement 
of the other information. If, based 
on the work we have performed, 
we conclude that there is a material 
misstatement of this other information, 
we are required to report that fact. We 
have nothing to report based on these 
responsibilities.

86

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSResponsibilities for the financial 
statements and the audit
Responsibilities of the Directors 
for the financial statements
As explained more fully in 
the Statement of Directors’ 
Responsibilities, in respect of the  
annual report and financial  
statements, the Directors are 
responsible for the preparation of the 
financial statements in accordance 
with the applicable framework and for 
being satisfied that they give a true 
and fair view. The Directors are also 
responsible for such internal control 
as they determine is necessary to 
enable the preparation of financial 
statements that are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud 
or error.

In preparing the financial statements, 
the Directors are responsible for 
assessing the Group’s and the 
Company’s ability to continue as 
a going concern, disclosing, as 
applicable, matters related to going 
concern and using the going concern 
basis of accounting unless the Directors 
either intend to liquidate the Group or 
the Company or to cease operations, or 
have no realistic alternative but to do so.

Other required reporting
Companies Act 2006 exception 
reporting
Under the Companies Act 2006 
we are required to report to you if, 
in our opinion:

• we have not received all the

information and explanations
we require for our audit; or

• adequate accounting records have
not been kept by the Company, or
returns adequate for our audit have
not been received from branches
not visited by us; or

• certain disclosures of Directors’

remuneration specified by law are
not made; or

• the Company financial statements
are not in agreement with the
accounting records and returns.

We have no exceptions to report arising 
from this responsibility. 

Owen Mackney 
(Senior Statutory Auditor)
for and on behalf of 
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP 
Chartered Accountants and Statutory 
Auditors London

27 July 2020

Auditors’ responsibilities for the 
audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable 
assurance about whether the financial 
statements as a whole are free from 
material misstatement, whether due to 
fraud or error, and to issue an auditors’ 
report that includes our opinion. 
Reasonable assurance is a high level 
of assurance, but is not a guarantee 
that an audit conducted in accordance 
with ISAs (UK) will always detect a 
material misstatement when it exists. 
Misstatements can arise from fraud 
or error and are considered material 
if, individually or in the aggregate, 
they could reasonably be expected 
to influence the economic decisions 
of users taken on the basis of these 
financial statements. 

A further description of our 
responsibilities for the audit 
of the financial statements is 
located on the FRC’s website at:  
www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. 
This description forms part of our 
auditors’ report.

Use of this report
This report, including the opinions, 
has been prepared for and only for 
the Company’s members as a body 
in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 
16 of the Companies Act 2006 and for 
no other purpose. We do not, in giving 
these opinions, accept or assume 
responsibility for any other purpose or 
to any other person to whom this report 
is shown or into whose hands it may 
come save where expressly agreed by 
our prior consent in writing.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

87

CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

Revenue

Cost of sales

Gross profit

Selling expenses

Administration expenses

Other operating income

Profit/(loss) on disposal of property, plant and equipment 

Profit on disposal of subsidiary 

Operating profit

Finance expenses

Profit before tax

Income tax credit/(charge)

Profit for the year

Attributable to: 

Owners of the Parent Company

Non-controlling interests

Earnings per ordinary share

Basic

Diluted

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

Profit for the year

Other comprehensive income: 

Exchange difference on translation of foreign operations (net of tax) 

Recycling translation reserves on disposal of subsidiary 

Transfer to profit and loss on maturing cash flow hedges (net of tax) 

Net unrealised gain on cash flow hedges (net of tax) 

Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax items which may 
be reclassified to profit and loss in subsequent periods 

Total comprehensive income for the year, net of tax

Attributable to: 

Owners of the Parent Company

Non-controlling interests

Note

2020
£000

2019 
£000

2 

494,234  

448,362 

5

28 

3 

6 

7 

(419,131) 

(365,533)

75,103  

82,829 

(26,523) 

(23,095)

(46,409) 

(40,590)

735

188

1,486 

4,580  

(4,317) 

263 

14,547 

14,810 

620

(6)

—

19,758 

(2,476)

17,282 

(4,031)

13,251

14,060 

750 

11,925 

1,326 

Note

21 

21 

2020

17.0p 

16.9p 

2019

16.2p

15.9p

2020
£000

2019 
£000

14,810  

13,251 

5,450 

34 

(377)

517  

240

—

(232)

377

5,624 

385

20,434 

13,636 

19,976  

12,372 

458  

1,264 

20,434  

13,636 

88

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

Attributable to the owners of the Parent Company

Share
premium
and capital
redemption  

reserve
£000

Share 
capital
£000

Merger 
reserve
£000

Hedging 
reserve
£000

Translation 
reserve 
£000

Retained  Shareholders’ 
equity 
earnings
£000
£000

Non-
controlling 
interests
£000

Total 
£000

 3,194 

 9,815 

 17,164 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

(27)

 — 

 145 

1,305

 65,404 

 96,855 

 3,661 

 100,516 

 — 

 11,925 

 11,925 

 1,326 

 13,251 

 302 

 — 

 447 

 (62) 

 385 

 145 

302 

 11,925 

 12,372 

 1,264 

 13,636 

At 1 April 2018 

Profit for the year 

Other comprehensive income 

Total comprehensive 
income for the year 

Transactions with owners  
in their capacity as owners 

Equity-settled share-based 
payments (note 23) 

Tax on equity-settled  
share-based payments 
(note 11) 

Recognition of non-controlling 
interests (note 27) 

Disposal of non-controlling 
interests (note 28) 

Shares issued (restated) 
(note 20) 

Options exercised (note 20) 

Equity dividends paid (note 22) 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 2,333 

 2,333 

 — 

 2,333 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 641 

47,830 

15,235 

 83 

 — 

 18 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

118 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 764 

 764 

 — 

 764 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 311 

 311 

 — 

 (110) 

 (110)

 — 

 63,706 

 (72) 

 29 

 — 

 — 

 63,706 

 29 

 (4,553) 

 (4,553) 

 (1,075) 

 (5,628)

1,607 

75,801 

171,506 

4,051 

175,557 

At 31 March 2019 (restated) 

3,918 

57,663 

32,399 

Impact of adopting IFRS 16 
(note 10) 

Restated equity at 
1 April 2019 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(1,867) 

(1,867) 

(440) 

(2,307)

3,918 

57,663 

32,399 

118 

1,607 

73,934 

169,639 

3,611 

173,250 

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

89

 
 
 
Impact of adopting IFRS 16 
(note 10) 

Restated equity at 
1 April 2019 

Profit for the year 

Transactions with owners  
in their capacity as owners

Equity-settled share-based 
payments (note 23) 

Tax on equity-settled  
share-based payments 
(note 11) 

Derecognition of  
non-controlling interests 
(note 27) 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

Attributable to the owners of the Parent Company

Share
premium
and capital
redemption  

reserve
£000

Share 
capital
£000

Merger 
reserve
£000

Hedging 
reserve
£000

Translation 
reserve 
£000

Retained  Shareholders’ 
equity 
earnings
£000
£000

Non-
controlling 
interests
£000

Total 
£000

At 31 March 2019 (restated) 

3,918 

57,663 

32,399 

118 

1,607 

75,801 

171,506 

4,051 

175,557 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(1,867) 

(1,867) 

(440) 

(2,307)

Other comprehensive income  — 

Total comprehensive 
income for the year 

— 

3,918 

57,663 

32,399 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

118 

— 

140 

1,607 

73,934 

169,639 

3,611 

173,250 

— 

14,060 

14,060 

750 

14,810 

5,776 

— 

5,916 

(292) 

5,624 

140 

5,776 

14,060 

19,976 

458 

20,434 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(231) 

(231) 

— 

(231)

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

171 

171 

— 

171 

— 

— 

Shares issued (note 20) 

864  116,060 

Options exercised (note 20) 

Equity dividends paid 
(note 22) 

36 

— 

— 

— 

At 31 March 2020 

4,818  173,723 

32,399 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

258 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(325) 

(325)

—  116,924 

—  116,924 

(36) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(7,104) 

(7,104) 

— 

(7,104)

7,383 

80,794  299,375 

3,744 

303,119 

Merger reserve
The merger reserve comprises premium on shares issued in relation to business combinations. 

Capital redemption reserve
The capital redemption reserve comprises amounts transferred from retained earnings in relation to the redemption of 
preference shares. For ease of presentation, the amount of £1.34 million relating to the capital redemption reserve has been 
included within the column of share premium and capital redemption reserve in the balances at both the beginning and end 
of each year, with no movements during the year.

Hedging reserve
The hedging reserve comprises the effective portion of the cumulative net change in the fair value of cash flow hedging 
instruments related to hedged transactions that qualify for hedge accounting and have not yet matured.

Translation reserve
The translation reserve comprises all foreign currency differences arising from the translation of the financial statements of 
foreign operations.

Shareholders’ equity
Shareholders’ equity represents total equity attributable to owners of the Parent Company. 

90

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
AS AT 31 MARCH 2020

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment 

Intangible assets

Right-of-use assets

Long term assets

Deferred tax assets

Total non-current assets

Current assets 

Inventory

Trade and other receivables 

Income tax receivable

Derivative financial assets

Cash and cash equivalents 

Total current assets 

Total assets 

Equity 

Share capital

Share premium

Capital redemption reserve

Merger reserve

Hedging reserve

Translation reserve

Retained earnings

Equity attributable to owners of the Parent Company 

Non-controlling interests

Total equity

Note

2020 
£000

Restated(a)  

Restated(a) 

2019  
£000

2018 
£000

8 

9 

10 

13 

11 

12 

13 

24 

14 

74,695 

113,309 

66,728 

5,019 

14,624 

39,835 

85,002 

—

—

3,610 

274,375 

128,447 

114,445 

88,748 

14,820 

332 

69,571 

49,724 

—

129 

35,499 

36,547 

—

—

2,663 

74,709 

49,311 

42,386 

—

113 

67,098 

85,315 

42,196 

285,443 

204,739 

134,006 

2 

559,818 

333,186 

208,715 

20 

4,818 

3,918 

172,383 

56,323 

1,340  

1,340  

3,194 

8,475 

1,340 

32,399 

32,399 

17,164 

258

7,383 

118

1,607 

80,794 

75,801 

299,375 

171,506 

3,744 

4,051 

(27)

1,305 

65,404 

96,855 

3,661 

303,119 

175,557 

100,516 

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

91

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET CONTINUED
AS AT 31 MARCH 2020

Non-current liabilities

Loans and borrowings

Lease liabilities

Deferred income

Provisions

Other financial liabilities

Deferred tax liabilities

Total non-current liabilities 

Current liabilities

Bank overdraft

Loans and borrowings

Lease liabilities

Deferred income

Provisions

Income tax payable

Trade and other payables 

Other financial liabilities

Total current liabilities 

Total liabilities 

Total equity and liabilities 

Note

2020 
£000

Restated(a)  

Restated(a) 

2019  
£000

2018 
£000

15

10 

16 

17 

18 

11 

14 

15

10 

16 

17 

19 

18 

(177)

1,421

3,781 

63,241 

452 

4,163 

5,471 

1,059 

74,209 

—

751 

2,671 

1,817 

692 

7,352 

—

998 

894 

1,440 

373 

7,486 

25,004 

65,857 

33,165 

(2)

13,705 

131 

2,191 

4,399 

98,357 

38,705 

953

—

99

1,090 

4,771 

58,563 

18,944 

894 

—

99

429 

3,364 

38,757 

24,005 

182,490 

150,277 

100,713 

2 

256,699 

157,629 

108,199 

559,818 

333,186 

208,715 

(a) The balance sheets for the years ended 31 March 2018 and 2019 have been restated to present cash balances and overdraft financial liabilities 

gross, along with customer programme provisions within trade and other payables (previously netted within trade and other receivables). 
See note 1 for more information. 

The consolidated financial statements on pages 88 to 141 were approved by the Board of Directors on 27 July 2020 
and were signed on its behalf by:

Paul Fineman 
Director

Giles Willits
Director

92

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENT
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

Cash flows from operating activities 

Profit for the year

Adjustments for: 

Depreciation and impairment

Depreciation of right-of-use assets

Amortisation of intangible assets

Finance expenses

Income tax (credit)/charge

Profit on disposal of subsidiary 

Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment 

Loss on disposal of intangible fixed assets 

Equity-settled share-based payments

Operating profit after adjustments for non-cash items 

Change in trade and other receivables 

Change in inventory

Change in trade and other payables, provisions and deferred income 

Cash generated from operations 

Tax paid

Interest and similar charges paid

Net cash inflow from operating activities 

Cash flow from investing activities 

Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment 

Acquisition of businesses (net of cash acquired)   

Acquisition of intangible assets

Acquisition of property, plant and equipment 

Net cash outflow from investing activities 

Cash flows from financing activities 

Proceeds from issue of share capital 

Repayment of secured borrowings

Net movement in previous credit facilities 

Repayment of previous credit facilities 

Payment of lease liabilities

Loan arrangement fees

Equity dividends paid

Dividends paid to non-controlling interests 

Net cash inflow from financing activities 

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of the year 

Effect of exchange rate fluctuations on cash held  

Cash and cash equivalents at end of the year 

Note

2020
£000

Restated(a) 

2019 
£000

14,810 

13,251 

8 

10 

9 

6 

7 

6,994  

7,014 

3,796  

4,317  

(14,547) 

28 

(1,486)

23

(188)

1  

(202)

20,509  

629 

705 

5,328 

—

2,309 

2,476 

4,031 

—

(6)

331

3,005

30,725 

25,616 

6,508 

5,913  

(18,086)

27,756  

44,763 

(4,749) 

(3,996) 

19,011  

(3,694)

(2,053)

39,016 

595  

5,312 

28 

(87,696) 

(65,601)

9 

8 

(2,997) 

(8,133) 

(2,190)

(5,699)

(98,231) 

(68,178)

20 

14 

14 

22 

116,924 

(1,505) 

37,976 

(37,976)

(6,622)

(1,234)

(7,104) 

—  

48,348 

(2,350)

—

—

—

(30)

(4,553)

(1,075)

100,459  

40,340 

21,239 

14 

19,458  

1,397 

11,178 

9,031 

(751)

14 

42,094  

19,458 

(a) The cash flow for the year ended 31 March 2019 has been restated in line with the restatements made within the balance sheet as described 

above. See note 1 for more information. 

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

93

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
• cash balances and overdraft
financial liabilities have been
historically incorrectly offset within
the Group’s financial statements
and presented on a net basis within
the Group’s consolidated balance
sheet. This has been updated to
restate the prior year balance sheet
to present the respective balances
on a gross basis. Cash and cash
equivalents have been restated from
£19.5 million to £85.3 million as at
31 March 2019. Additional detail
within the balance sheet shows
the bank overdraft amounts as at
31 March 2019 (£65.9 million); and
• previously, segmental assets and

liabilities were incorrectly presented
within the segmental information
note (note 2). In order to correct this,
the respective segmental assets
and liabilities have been updated
to reflect reallocations from the
UK segment to the central and
eliminations segment, and similarly,
from the Australia segment to the
US segment to reflect the correct
allocation of assets and liabilities
between the Group segments.
In addition, segments have been
restated to appropriately reflect
investments held by each segment
as well as the gross up of cash
balances detailed above.

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

1 Accounting policies
a. Basis of preparation
The financial statements have 
been prepared in accordance with 
International Financial Reporting 
Standards (IFRSs), as issued by the 
International Accounting Standards 
Board (IASB), and interpretations 
issued by the IFRS Interpretations 
Committee and with the Companies 
Act 2006, as applicable to companies 
reporting under IFRS. The financial 
statements have also been prepared 
in accordance with IFRSs adopted by 
the European Union. The Company 
has elected to prepare its individual 
Company financial statements in 
accordance with Financial Reporting 
Standard 102 (‘FRS 102’); these are 
presented on pages 142 to 156.

The financial statements are prepared 
under the historical cost convention 
except for derivatives which are 
stated at fair value and retirement 
benefit obligations which are valued 
in accordance with IAS 19 Employee 
Benefits. 

The preparation of financial statements 
that conform with adopted IFRS 
requires the use of estimates and 
assumptions that affect the reported 
amounts of assets and liabilities at the 
date of the financial statements and 
the reported amounts of income and 
expense during the reporting period. 
Although these estimates are based 
on management’s best knowledge of 
the amount, event or actions, actual 
results may ultimately differ from those 
estimates.

For the purposes of these financial 
statements, ‘Design Group’ or ‘the 
Group’ means IG Design Group plc 
(‘the Company’) and its subsidiaries. 
The Company’s ordinary shares are 
listed on the Alternative Investment 
Market (‘AIM’). 

The estimates and underlying 
assumptions are reviewed on an 
ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting 
estimates are recognised in the period 
in which the estimate is revised and 
future periods if relevant.

The accounting policies used in 
the preparation of these financial 
statements are detailed below. 
These policies have been consistently 
applied to all periods presented.

In the preparation of these financial 
statements, comparative amounts have 
been restated to reflect the following: 

• the shares issued in the year ended
31 March 2019 as consideration for
the acquisition of Impact qualified
for merger relief in accordance with
the Companies Act 2006 (Section
612). Accordingly, for the year ended
31 March 2019, the Group has
restated £15.2 million from the share
premium reserve to the merger
reserve. This has no overall impact
on the total equity and reserves for
the Group;

• the provisional Impact

Innovations Inc. (‘Impact’)
acquisition accounting (note 28)
has been reviewed and hindsight
adjustments made to goodwill
(£2.0 million increase), intangibles
(£0.7 million decrease) and
provisions (£1.3 million increase).
These have been adjusted in the
comparative balance sheet;

• trade and other receivable balances
have historically included amounts
provided against customer
programmes including sell-through
programmes presenting trade
receivables on a net basis in the
Group’s consolidated balance
sheet. These have been updated
to restate the prior year balance
sheet to present these balances
on a gross basis within trade and
other payables. Trade and other
receivables have been restated from
£45.5 million to £49.7 million as at
31 March 2019. The corresponding
adjustment has also been made in
trade and other payables;

94

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe restated segment assets as at 31 March 2019 are as follows:

Segment

UK

Europe

USA

Australia

Central & eliminations

Total

The restated segment liabilities as at 31 March 2019 are as follows:

Segment

UK

Europe

USA

Australia

Central & eliminations

Total

Original 
balance  
£000

Restated 
balance 
£000

188,766 

100,079

19,240 

36,306 

13,776 

3,610 

36,738

117,144

17,198

62,027

261,698 

333,186

Original 
balance 
£000

Restated 
balance 
£000

(28,295) 

(34,366)

(10,457) 

(20,136)

(35,931) 

(88,382)

(7,396) 

(4,062) 

(8,284)

(6,461)

(86,141) 

(157,629)

In addition, a number of disclosure notes have been re-presented to reflect corrected presentation and categorisation. 
These include:

• operating lease minimum payments as disclosed in note 3 were disclosed in the prior year incorrectly. The prior year

disclosure has been updated for the purposes of these financial statements;

• in the previous financial statements, assets which had been acquired following the acquisition of The Lang Companies

Inc. had been disposed of using the historic cost and accumulated depreciation rather than the revised cost and
accumulated depreciation post-acquisition. As such, the brought forward cost and accumulated depreciation have
been restated to reflect the corrected position. The net book value of these assets remains unchanged;
• in the year, software previously categorised as fixtures and fittings has been reclassified to intangibles;
• the categorisation of deferred tax balances has been re-presented for the purposes of brought forward balances in

these financial statements. The overall net deferred tax balances presented in the balance sheet are not impacted by
this re-presentation; and

• from this financial year, the Group has adjusted the assumptions as to the shares that are to be included in the

calculation of the weighted average number of shares for diluted and basic earnings per share purposes. As such,
the numbers detailed in respect of 2019 have been re-presented using the same methodology in order to provide
appropriate comparatives.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

95

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

1 Accounting policies continued
a. Basis of preparation continued
Going concern
Information regarding the financial 
position of the Group, its cash flows, 
liquidity position, and borrowing 
facilities are described in the Chief 
Financial Officer’s review on pages 
42 and 44. Note 24 to the financial 
statements includes the Group’s 
objectives, policies and processes 
for managing its capital, its financial 
risk management objectives, details 
of its financial instruments and 
hedging activities and exposures to 
credit, market and liquidity risk. Cash 
balances and borrowings are detailed 
in notes 14 and 15.

On 5 June 2019, to meet the funding 
requirements of the Group, the 
business refinanced with a banking 
group comprising HSBC, NatWest, 
BNP Paribas, Sun Trust and PNC 
Bank as part of a three year deal. 
This facility was then subsequently 
amended and extended on 17 
January 2020 with the same banking 
group to accommodate the acquisition 
of CSS Industries Inc. The facilities 
run to May 2022 and comprise of a 
revolving credit facility (‘RCF’) of $95.0 
million, a further flexible RCF of up 
to £130.0 million to meet the Group’s 
working capital requirements during 
peak manufacturing, and a maximum 
limit of $18.0 million invoice financing 
arrangement in Hong Kong. We also 
have access to supplier financing 
arrangements from certain customers 
which we utilise at certain times of 
the year. These arrangements are 
subject to the continuing support 
of the customers’ banking partners 
and therefore could be withdrawn at 
short notice. 

The Directors have prepared detailed 
plans and forecasts for a period of at 
least twelve months from the date of 
signing these financial statements. 
The plans reflect the seasonal 
operating cycle of the business and 
assume continuity of supply chain. 
They also benefit from the diverse 
geographic spread of the Group 
and the high proportion of revenues 
generated from retailers who have 
remained open during the Covid-19 
crisis. The base case forecast broadly 
assumes a first quarter of general 
lockdown in all territories with a 
recovery over the remainder of the 
year but to a generally recessionary 
environment. As noted in the trading 
update for quarter one, business 
has exceeded the base forecast in 
the first quarter. The forecasts show 
the Group has more than sufficient 
liquidity. In light of the ongoing 
Covid-19 pandemic, these forecasts 
have been sensitised to reflect severe 
but plausible adverse downturns in 
the current assumptions including 
the potential for a second wave 
of the pandemic later in the year. 
Management has also produced 
a maximum stress forecast which 
has been deliberately engineered to 
challenge the Group’s liquidity and 
leverage covenant positions during 
the forecast period. Further analysis 
has been prepared in relation to the 
mitigating actions open to the Group 
in the event of a scenario which is 
worse than the sensitivities already 
modelled. These mitigating actions 
include short term sales action, cutting 
discretionary spend further, headcount 
reductions and reduction in investment 
such as capex. 

These forecasts and additional 
analysis, including mitigating actions, 
demonstrated that the Group has 
sufficient excess headroom for the 
Group to meet its obligations as they 
fall due for a forecast period of more 
than twelve months beyond the date 
of signing these accounts.

Based on these models, and taking 
into consideration the risks detailed 
in note 24, the Directors have a 
reasonable expectation that the 
Company has adequate resources to 
continue in operational existence for 
the foreseeable future, and accordingly 
have adopted the going concern 
basis in preparing the consolidated 
financial statements. This disclosure 
has been prepared in accordance with 
the Financial Reporting Council’s UK 
Corporate Governance Code.

Changes in accounting policies
In the current financial year, the 
Group adopted the following 
pronouncements:

IFRS 16 Leases
The Group has adopted IFRS 16 
Leases from 1 April 2019. The Group 
has decided to adopt the modified 
retrospective approach on transition. 
Under this approach, comparative 
information is not restated and 
the impact of adopting IFRS 16 is 
presented as an opening retained 
earnings adjustment as at 1 April 2019. 
The net impact on retained earnings 
on 1 April 2019 was a decrease of 
£2.3 million.

On adoption of IFRS 16, the Group 
recognised lease liabilities in relation 
to leases which had previously been 
classified as ‘operating leases’ under 
the principles of IAS 17 Leases. 
These liabilities were measured at 
the present value of the remaining 
lease payments, discounted using the 
lessee’s incremental borrowing rate as 
of 1 April 2019.

96

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSUnder the modified retrospective 
approach, right-of-use assets are 
measured at either:

• their carrying amount as if IFRS 16
had been applied since the lease
commencement date, discounted by
the lessee’s incremental borrowing
rate as at 1 April 2019. The Group
has applied this methodology to
51 of its leases where sufficient
historical information has been
available to facilitate this; or

• an amount equal to the lease liability,

adjusted by the amount of any
prepaid or accrued lease payments.
This has been applied to a small
number of property leases where
it was not possible to ascertain
sufficient historical data to enable
a retrospective calculation. This
method has also been applied to the
majority of the Group’s non-property
leases, comprising of motor vehicles,
equipment, plant and machinery.

i) Practical expedients applied
In applying IFRS 16 for the first time, the 
Group has used the following practical 
expedients permitted by the standard:

• the use of a single discount rate to

a portfolio of leases with reasonably
similar characteristics;

• reliance on previous assessments
on whether leases are onerous –
there were no onerous contracts
as at 1 April 2019;

• the exclusion of initial direct

costs for the measurement of the
right-of-use asset at the date of
initial application; and

• the use of hindsight in determining
the lease term where the contract
contains options to extend or
terminate the lease.

The Group has also elected not 
to reassess whether a contract is, 
or contains, a lease at the date of 
initial application. Instead, for contracts 
entered into before the transition date, 
the Group relied on its assessment 
made when applying IAS 17 and IFRIC 
4 Determining Whether an Arrangement 
Contains a Lease.

ii) The Group’s leasing activities
and how these are accounted for
The Group leases various offices, 
warehouses, equipment and motor 
vehicles. Rental contracts are typically 
made for fixed periods of one to 
20 years but may have extension 
options as described below. Lease 
terms are negotiated on an individual 
basis and contain a wide range 
of different terms and conditions. 
The lease agreements do not impose 
any covenants, but leased assets 
may not be used as security for 
borrowing purposes.

Until 31 March 2019, leases of property, 
plant and equipment were classified 
as either finance or operating leases. 
Payments made under operating leases 
(net of any incentives received from 
the lessor) were charged to the income 
statement on a straight-line basis over 
the period of the lease.

From 1 April 2019, leases are 
recognised as a right-of-use asset and 
a corresponding liability at the date at 
which the leased asset is available for 
use by the Group. Each lease payment 
is allocated between the liability and 
finance cost. The finance cost is 
charged to the income statement over 
the lease period so as to produce a 
constant periodic rate of interest on 
the remaining balance of the liability 
for each period. The right-of-use asset 
is depreciated over the shorter of the 
asset’s useful life and the lease term on 
a straight-line basis.

Assets and liabilities arising from 
a lease are initially measured on a 
present value basis. Lease liabilities 
include the net present value of the 
following lease payments:

• fixed payments (including

in-substance fixed payments),
less any lease incentives receivable;

• variable lease payments that are
based on an index or a rate;
• amounts expected to be payable

by the lessee under residual value
guarantees;

• the exercise price of a purchase
option if the lessee is reasonably
certain to exercise that option; and

• payments of penalties for

terminating the lease, if the lease
term reflects the lessee exercising
that option.

The lease payments are discounted 
using the interest rate implicit in 
the lease. If that rate cannot be 
determined, the lessee’s incremental 
borrowing rate is used, being the rate 
that the lessee would have to pay to 
borrow the funds necessary to obtain 
an asset of similar value in a similar 
economic environment with similar 
terms and conditions. The weighted 
average incremental borrowing rate 
applied by the Group upon transition 
was 3.9%. Incremental borrowing rates 
applied to individual leases ranged 
between 1.3% and 5.3%.

Right-of-use assets are measured at 
cost comprising the following:

• the amount of the initial

measurement of lease liability;
• any lease payments made at or
before the commencement date
less any lease incentives received;

• any initial direct costs; and
• restoration costs.

Payments associated with short term 
leases and leases of low-value assets 
are recognised on a straight-line basis 
as an expense in the income statement. 
Short term leases are leases with a 
lease term of twelve months or less. 
The Group has certain assets which 
may include variable lease payments 
based on usage, although this is a 
small proportion of the Group’s assets. 
The variable lease payments are not 
material for the Group.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

97

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

1 Accounting policies continued
a. Basis of preparation continued
IFRS 16 Leases continued
iii) Extension and termination options
Extension and termination options are included in a number of property and equipment leases across the Group.

These terms are used to maximise operational flexibility in terms of managing contracts. The majority of extension and 
termination options held are exercisable only by the Group and not by the respective lessor.

In determining the lease term, management considers all facts and circumstances that create an economic incentive to 
exercise an extension option, or not exercise a termination option. Extension options (or periods after termination options) 
are only included in the lease term if the lease is reasonably certain to be extended (or not terminated).

The assessment is reviewed if a significant event or a significant change in circumstances occurs which affects this 
assessment and that is within the control of the lessee.

Impact on the financial statements
The impact of the change in accounting policy on the balance sheet (increase/(decrease)) as at 1 April 2019 is as follows:

Right-of-use assets

Deferred tax assets

Lease liabilities

Other liabilities

Net impact on equity

£m

35.5

0.8

(40.1)

1.5

(2.3)

b. Basis of consolidation
Other standards and interpretations
The Group also adopted the following new pronouncements during 2019, which did not have any material impact on the 
Group’s financial statements:

• amendments to IAS 19 Plan Amendment, Curtailment or Settlement, specify that in the event of a plan amendment,

curtailment or settlement during a reporting period, an entity is required to use updated information to determine current
service cost and net interest for the period following such an event;

• IFRIC 23 Uncertainty over Income Tax Treatments addresses how to reflect uncertainty in accounting for income taxes,
providing guidance on considering uncertain tax treatments separately or together, examination by tax authorities, the
appropriate method to reflect uncertainty and accounting for changes in facts and circumstances; and

• amendments to IFRS 3 revising the definition of a business.

(i) Subsidiaries
Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Group. Control exists when Group is exposed, or has rights, to variable returns 
from its involvement with the investee and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the investee. 
The financial statements of subsidiaries are included in the financial statements from the date that control commences 
until the date that control ceases.

(ii) Transactions eliminated on consolidation
Intragroup balances and any unrealised gains and losses or income and expense arising from intragroup transactions are 
eliminated in preparing the consolidated financial statements.

98

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS(iii) Business combinations
Business combinations are accounted 
for using the acquisition method as at 
the date on which control is transferred 
to the Group. 

For acquisitions on or after 
1 January 2010, the Group measures 
goodwill at the acquisition date as:

• the fair value of the consideration

transferred; plus

• the recognised amount of any
non-controlling interests in the
acquiree; plus

• if the business combination is

achieved in stages, the fair value
of the existing equity interest in the
acquiree; less

• the net recognised amount
(generally fair value) of the
identifiable assets acquired and
liabilities assumed.

When the result is negative, a 
‘bargain purchase’ gain is recognised 
immediately in the income statement.

Provisional fair values allocated at 
a reporting date are finalised within 
twelve months of the acquisition date.

c. Foreign currency
Items included in the financial 
statements of the Group’s 
subsidiaries are measured using 
the currency of the primary 
economic environment in which 
the subsidiary operates (‘functional 
currency’). The consolidated 
financial statements are prepared in 
pounds sterling (functional currency 
of the Parent Company).

(i) Foreign currency transactions
Transactions in foreign currencies 
are recorded at the rate of 
exchange at the date of the 
transaction. Monetary assets and 
liabilities denominated in foreign 
currencies at the balance sheet 
date are translated into sterling 
at the exchange rate prevailing at 
that date and recognised in the 
income statement unless hedge 
accounting criteria apply (see policy 
for financial instruments).

(ii) Financial statements of
foreign operations
The assets and liabilities of foreign 
operations, including goodwill 
and fair value adjustments arising 
on consolidation, are translated 
into sterling at the exchange rate 
prevailing at the balance sheet date. 
The revenues and expenses of foreign 
operations are translated at an average 
rate for the period where this rate 
approximates to the foreign exchange 
rates prevailing at the dates of the 
transactions.

The Company intends to change the 
presentation currency of the Group 
from pounds sterling to US dollars 
effective 1 April 2020. Following the 
acquisition of CSS Industries Inc., 
a significant majority of the Group 
earnings is now denominated in US 
dollars. Management believes that 
the presentation currency change will 
give investors and other stakeholders 
a clearer understanding of Design 
Group’s financial performance over 
time. In addition, the change will reduce 
the volatility of the Group’s earnings 
due to foreign exchange movements, 
in relation to the translation of foreign 
currency balances.

(iii) Net investment in foreign
operations
Exchange differences on retranslation 
at the closing rate of the opening 
balances of overseas entities are taken 
to other comprehensive income, as are 
exchange differences arising on related 
foreign currency borrowings and 
derivatives designated as qualifying 
hedges, to the extent that they are 
effective. They are released into the 
income statement upon disposal or 
loss of control and on maturity or 
disposal of the hedge respectively. 
Exchange differences arising from 
a monetary item receivable from or 
payable to a foreign operation, the 
settlement of which is neither planned 
nor likely in the foreseeable future, 
are considered to form part of a net 
investment in a foreign operation and 
are recognised in other comprehensive 

income in the translation reserve. 
The cumulative translation differences 
previously recognised in other 
comprehensive income (or where 
the foreign operation is part of a 
subsidiary, the parent’s interest in the 
cumulative translation differences) are 
released into the income statement 
upon disposal of the foreign operation 
or on loss of control of the subsidiary 
that includes the foreign operation. 
Other exchange differences are taken 
to the income statement. 

d. Financial instruments
Interest bearing loans and borrowings 
and other financial liabilities (excluding 
derivatives) are held at amortised cost, 
unless they are included in a hedge 
accounting relationship. 

Derivatives are measured initially at 
fair value. Subsequent measurement 
in the financial statements depends on 
the classification of the derivative as 
follows:

(i) Fair value hedges
Where a derivative is used to hedge 
the foreign exchange exposure of a 
monetary asset or liability, any gain or 
loss on the derivative is recognised in 
the income statement.

(ii) Cash flow hedges
Where a derivative is designated 
as a hedging instrument in a 
cash flow hedge, the change in 
fair value is recognised in other 
comprehensive income to the extent 
that it is effective and any ineffective 
portion is recognised in the income 
statement. Where the underlying 
transaction results in a financial asset, 
accumulated gains and losses are 
recognised in the income statement 
in the same period as the hedged 
item affects profit or loss. Where the 
hedged item results in a non-financial 
asset the accumulated gains and 
losses previously recognised in other 
comprehensive income are included in 
the initial carrying value of the asset.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

99

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

1 Accounting policies continued
d. Financial instruments
continued
(iii) Unhedged derivatives
Unhedged derivatives are charged/
credited to the income statement.

e. Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise 
cash balances. Bank overdrafts that 
are repayable on demand and form 
an integral part of the Group’s cash 
management are included as part 
of cash and cash equivalents in the 
statement of cash flows.

f. Loans and borrowings
Loans and borrowings are initially 
measured at cost (which is equal 
to fair value at inception) and are 
subsequently measured at amortised 
cost using the effective interest 
method.

g. Trade and other receivables
Trade receivables are initially 
recognised at fair value and 
subsequently measured at amortised 
cost, which is generally equivalent 
to recognition at nominal value less 
impairment loss calculated using the 
expected loss model.

The Group applies a simplified model 
to recognise lifetime expected credit 
losses for its trade receivables and 
other receivables, including those 
due in greater than twelve months, 
by making an accounting policy 
election. For any receivables not 
expected to be paid, an expected 
credit loss of 100% is recognised 
at the point this expectation arises. 
For all other receivables, the expected 
loss is calculated based on reasonable 
and supportable information that is 
relevant and available without undue 
cost or effort. This includes both 
quantitative and qualitative information 
and analysis, based on the Group’s 
historical experience and informed 
credit assessment and including 
forward-looking information.

h. Trade and other payables
Trade payables are non-interest 
bearing and are recognised initially 
at fair value and subsequently at 
amortised cost.

i. Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment are 
stated at cost less accumulated 
depreciation and impairment losses. 
Where parts of an item of property, 
plant and equipment or other assets 
have different useful lives, they are 
accounted for as separate items. 
The carrying values of property, 
plant and equipment and other 
assets are periodically reviewed 
for impairment when events or 
changes in circumstances indicate 
that the carrying values may not be 
recoverable.

Property, plant and equipment are 
depreciated over their estimated 
remaining useful lives on a straight line 
basis using the following estimated 
useful lives:

Land and buildings 
– Freehold land

Not 
depreciated

Land and buildings 
– Buildings

25-30 years or
life of lease

Plant and equipment 

4-25 years

Fixtures and fittings 

3-5 years

Motor vehicles 

4 years

The assets’ useful lives and residual 
values are reviewed, and adjusted if 
appropriate, at each balance sheet 
date. Included within plant and 
equipment are assets with a range of 
depreciation rates. These rates are 
tailored to the nature of the assets to 
reflect their estimated useful lives. 

j. Lease liabilities and lease
right-of-use assets
Rentals associated with leases that 
are of low-value or less than twelve 
months in length are expensed to the 
income statement on a straight line 
basis. The associated lease incentives 
are amortised in the income statement 
over the life of the lease.

Leases greater than twelve months 
in length, and those not of low-value, 
are recognised as a lease right-of-use 
asset with the associated future lease 
payment terms recognised as a lease 
liability. The right-of-use assets and 
the associated lease liabilities are 
recognised by unwinding the future 
lease payments at the rate implicit to 
the lease or, if the rate implicit to the 
lease cannot be readily determined, at 
the relevant incremental borrowing rate.

The lease right-of-use assets are 
amortised over their useful economic 
lives or the lease term, whichever 
is shorter. The lease liabilities are 
derecognised by applying the future 
lease payments.

On acquisition, right-of-use assets 
and lease liabilities are recognised in 
accordance with IFRS 16. The acquired 
lease liability is measured as if the 
lease contract was a new lease at 
the acquisition date. The right-of-use 
asset is measured at an amount 
equal to the recognised lease liability. 
The right-of-use asset is adjusted to 
reflect any favourable or unfavourable 
terms of the lease relative to 
market terms. 

k. Intangible assets
(i) Goodwill
Goodwill is stated at cost less any 
impairment losses.

Acquisitions are accounted for 
using the purchase method. For 
acquisitions that have occurred since 
1 January 2004, goodwill represents 
the difference between the fair value 
of the assets given in consideration 
and the fair value of identifiable assets, 
liabilities and contingent liabilities of 
the acquiree. For acquisitions made 
before 1 January 2004, goodwill is 
included on the basis of its deemed 
cost, which represents the amount 
previously recorded under UK GAAP.

The Group has expensed costs 
attributable to acquisitions in the 
income statement. Given their one-off 
nature, these costs are generally 
presented within adjusting items.

100

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSl. Impairment
All assets are reviewed regularly 
to determine whether there is any 
indication of impairment. Goodwill 
is tested for impairment annually.

An impairment loss is recognised 
whenever the carrying amount 
of a non-financial asset or the 
cash-generating unit to which it 
belongs exceeds its recoverable 
amount, being the greater of value 
in use and fair value less costs to 
sell, and is recognised in the income 
statement. Value in use is estimated 
based on future cash flows discounted 
using a pre-tax discount rate based 
upon the Group’s weighted average 
cost of capital.

Financial assets were assessed for 
impairment using the expected credit 
loss model which requires expected 
credit losses and changes to expected 
credit losses at each reporting date 
to reflect changes in credit risk since 
initial recognition.

m. Inventories
Inventories are valued at the lower 
of cost (on a weighted average 
basis) and net realisable value. 
For work-in-progress and finished 
goods, cost includes an appropriate 
proportion of labour cost and 
overheads based on normal 
operating capacity.

n. Income tax
Income tax in the income statement 
comprises current and deferred tax. 
Income tax is recognised in the income 
statement except to the extent that it 
relates to items recognised in equity 
or other comprehensive income.

Current tax is the expected tax payable 
on the taxable income for the year 
using the applicable tax rates enacted 
or substantively enacted at the balance 
sheet date and any adjustment to 
tax payable in prior years. Deferred 
tax is provided, using the balance 
sheet liability method, on temporary 
differences arising between the tax 
bases and the carrying amounts of 
assets and liabilities in the financial 
statements. The following temporary 
differences are not provided for: initial 
recognition of goodwill not deductible 
for tax purposes, the initial recognition 
of assets or liabilities that affect neither 
accounting nor taxable profit or loss 
other than in a business combination, 
and differences relating to investments 
in subsidiaries to the extent that they 
will not reverse in the foreseeable 
future. Deferred tax is determined 
using tax rates that are expected 
to apply when the related deferred 
tax asset or liability is settled, using 
the applicable tax rates enacted or 
substantively enacted at the balance 
sheet dates.

A deferred tax asset is recognised only 
to the extent that it is probable that 
future taxable profit will be available 
against which the asset can be utilised. 
Deferred tax assets are reduced to the 
extent that it is no longer probable that 
the related tax benefits will be realised.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities 
are offset when there is a legally 
enforceable right to set off current 
tax assets against liabilities and when 
they relate to income taxes levied by 
the same tax authority and the Group 
intends to settle its current tax assets 
and liabilities on a net basis.

(ii) Acquired intangible assets
An intangible asset acquired in a 
business combination is recognised 
at fair value to the extent it is probable 
that the expected future economic 
benefits attributable to the asset will 
flow to the Group and that its cost 
can be measured reliably. Intangible 
assets principally relate to customer 
relationships, which are valued using 
discounted cash flows based on 
historical customer attrition rates, and 
trade names/brand, which are valued 
using an income approach. The cost of 
intangible assets is amortised through 
the income statement on a straight 
line basis over their estimated useful 
economic life and as these are assets 
directly attributed to the acquisition of 
a business, the amortisation costs are 
also presented within adjusting items.

(iii) Other intangible assets
Other intangible assets which are 
not acquired through a business 
combination (‘non-acquired intangible 
assets’) are recognised at cost to the 
extent it is probable that the expected 
future economic benefits attributable to 
the asset will flow to the Group and that 
its cost can be measured reliably, and 
amortised on a straight line basis over 
their estimated useful economic life.

Intangibles are amortised over their 
estimated remaining useful lives on a 
straight line basis as follows:

Goodwill 

 Not 
amortised

Customer relationships  3-15 years

Trade names/brands 

3-5 years

Other intangibles – 
software 

3-5 years

Customer relationships are wide 
ranging in useful economic lives 
predominantly due to the long 
relationships with Walmart acquired 
as part of the acquisition of Impact 
Innovations, Inc.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

101

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

1 Accounting policies continued
o. Revenue
Revenue from the sale of goods is 
recognised in the income statement 
net of expected discounts, rebates, 
refunds, credits, price concessions or 
other similar items, when the associated 
performance obligation has been 
satisfied, and control of the goods has 
been transferred to the customer.

The Group recognises revenue on sales 
of Celebration, Craft & creative play, 
Stationery, Gifting and ‘Not-for-resale’ 
consumable products across four 
geographical segments. Typically the 
products that we supply form the 
only performance obligations within a 
customer agreement, and although the 
Group can provide ancillary services 
such as merchandising, these are not 
separately identifiable obligations on 
the basis of materiality. Each customer 
arrangement/contract is assessed to 
identify the performance obligations 
being provided to the customer. Where 
distinct performance obligations are 
deemed to exist, an element of revenue 
is apportioned to that obligation.

Revenue from these sales is recognised 
based on the price specified in the 
contract, net of any estimated volume 
discounts, rebates and sell-through 
provisions. Accumulated experience 
is used to estimate and provide for 
these discounts, using the expected 
value method, and revenue is only 
recognised to the extent that it is highly 
probable that a significant reversal will 
not occur. A refund liability (included in 
trade and other payables) is recognised 
for these items payable to customers 
in relation to sales made until the end 
of the reporting period. No significant 
element of financing is deemed present 
as the sales are made with credit terms 
of 30-60 days, which is consistent with 
market practice.

A significant part of the Group’s 
businesses sell goods on an 
‘free-on-board’ (‘FOB’) basis, where 
the Group as the seller makes its goods 
ready for collection at its premises on 
an agreed upon sales date and the 
buyer incurs all transportation and 
handling costs and bears the risks 
for bringing the goods to their chosen 
destination. Revenue is recognised 
on collection by the customer.

Where the Group operates non 
FOB terms with customers, revenue 
is recognised when the control of 
the goods has been transferred to 
the customer. These terms include 
consignment stock agreements, 
where revenue is recognised upon 
the customer removing goods from 
consignment stock.

p. Finance income and expense
Finance income and expense is 
recognised in the income statement 
as it accrues. Finance expenses 
comprise interest payable, finance 
charges on finance leases, 
amortisation of capitalised fees, and 
unwinding of discounts on provisions. 
Net movements in the fair value of 
derivatives which have not been 
designated as an effective hedge, 
and any ineffective portion of fair value 
movement on derivatives designated 
as a hedge, are also included within 
finance income or expense.

q. Supplier financing
The Group is party to supplier 
financing arrangements with one of 
its key customers. This arrangement 
is considered non-recourse factoring 
and on receipt of payment from the 
banks the associated trade receivable 
is derecognised in accordance with 
IFRS 9. 

r. Segment reporting
A segment is identified on the basis 
of internal reports that are regularly 
reviewed by the Board in order to 
allocate resources to the segment 
and assess its performance.

s. Pensions
(i) Defined contribution schemes
Obligations for contributions to defined 
contribution pension schemes are 
expensed to the income statement 
as incurred.

(ii) Defined benefit schemes
Two pension schemes, one of which is 
in the Netherlands and the other in the 
UK, are defined benefit schemes. 

The Netherlands subsidiary operates 
an industrial defined benefit fund, 
based on average wages, that has 
an agreed maximum contribution. 
The pension fund is a multi-employer 
fund and there is no contractual or 
constructive obligation for charging 
the net defined benefit cost of the plan 
to participating entities other than 
an agreed maximum contribution for 
the period, that is shared between 
employer (4/7) and employees (3/7). 

The Dutch Government is not planning 
to make employers fund any deficits in 
industrial pension funds; accordingly 
the Group treats the scheme as a 
defined contribution scheme for 
disclosure purposes. The Group 
recognises a cost equal to its 
contributions payable for the period.

Following the acquisition of CSS 
Industries Inc., on 3 March 2020, 
the Group also administers a defined 
benefit scheme in the UK. 

The net obligation for this scheme is 
calculated by estimating the amount of 
the future benefit that employees have 
earned in return for their service in the 
current and prior periods; that benefit 
is discounted to determine its present 
value, and the fair value of the scheme 
assets is deducted. The calculation is 
performed by a qualified independent 
actuary.

102

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSy. Borrowing costs
Borrowing costs directly attributable 
to the acquisition, construction or 
production of an asset that necessarily 
takes a substantial period of time to 
get ready for its intended use or sale 
are capitalised as part of the cost of 
the respective asset. Costs directly 
attributable to the arrangement of new 
borrowing facilities are included within 
the fair value of proceeds received and 
amortised over the life of the relevant 
facilities. Other borrowing costs which 
can include costs associated with 
the extension of existing facilities are 
expensed in the period they occur.

Borrowing costs consist of interest 
and other costs that an entity incurs 
in connection with the borrowing of 
funds.

t. Share-based payments
The cost of equity-settled transactions 
with employees is measured by 
reference to the fair value of the options 
at the date on which they are granted. 
The fair value is determined by using 
an appropriate pricing model. The fair 
value cost is then recognised over the 
vesting period, ending on the date on 
which the relevant employees become 
fully entitled to the award. The quantum 
of awards expected to vest and the 
relevant cost charged is reviewed 
annually such that at each balance 
sheet date the cumulative expense 
is the relevant share of the expected 
total cost, pro-rated across the vesting 
period. 

No expense is recognised for awards 
that are not expected to ultimately 
vest, for example due to an employee 
leaving or business performance 
targets not being met. The annual 
expense for equity settled transactions 
is recognised in the income statement 
with a corresponding entry in equity.

Employer’s social security charges 
are accrued, where applicable, at a 
rate which management expects to be 
the prevailing rate when share-based 
incentives are exercised and is based 
on the latest market value of options 
expected to vest or having already 
vested.

u. Investment in own shares
The shares held in the Group’s 
Employee Benefit Trust for the purpose 
of fulfilling obligations in respect of 
share option plans are treated as 
belonging to the Company and are 
deducted from its retained earnings. 
The cost of shares held directly 
(treasury shares) are also deducted 
from retained earnings.

v. Provisions
A provision is recognised when there 
is a probable legal or constructive 
obligation as a result of a past event 
and a reliable estimate can be made 
of the outflow of resources that will 
be required to settle the obligation. 
If the effect is material, provisions 
are determined by discounting the 
expected future cash flows at a pre-tax 
rate that reflects current market 
assessments of the time value of 
money and, where appropriate, the 
risks specific to the liability. Where 
discounting is used, the increase in the 
provision due to the passage of time is 
recognised as borrowing costs.

w. Government grants
Government grants are recognised 
when it is reasonable to expect that 
the grants will be received and that 
all related conditions will be met, 
usually on submission of a valid claim 
for payment. Government grants in 
respect of capital expenditure are 
included within the carrying amount 
of the related property, plant and 
equipment, and are released to the 
income statement on a straight line 
basis over the expected useful lives of 
the relevant assets. Grants of a revenue 
nature are credited to the income 
statement so as to match them with the 
expenditure to which they relate.

x. Dividends
Dividends are recognised as a 
liability in the period in which they 
are approved by the shareholders of 
the Company (final dividend) or paid 
(interim dividend).

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

103

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

1 Accounting policies continued
z. Use of non-GAAP measures
These financial statements include 
alternative performance measures 
(‘APMs’) that are presented in addition 
to the standard GAAP metrics. 
The Directors believe that these 
APMs provide important additional 
information regarding the underlying 
performance of the business including 
trends, performance and position of 
the Group. APMs are used to enhance 
the comparability of information 
between reporting periods and 
segmental business units by adjusting 
for factors which affect IFRS measures, 
to aid the understanding of the Group’s 
performance. Consequently, APMs are 
used by the Directors and management 
for strategic and performance analysis, 
planning, reporting and reward setting. 
The APMs are Adjusted EBITDA, 
Adjusted operating profit, Adjusted 
profit before tax, Adjusted profit after 
tax and Adjusted earnings per share. 

The adjusting items are items that 
are material and, in the judgement 
of the Directors, of an unusual or 
non-recurring nature. These items are 
adjusted to present the performance 
of the business in a consistent manner 
and in line with how the business 
is managed and measured on a 
day-to-day basis. They are gains or 
costs associated with events that are 
not considered to form part of the core 
operations, or are considered to be a 
‘non-recurring’ event (although they 
may span several accounting periods). 

Further detail of adjusting items can 
be seen in note 3 to the financial 
statements. 

aa. Like-for-like comparators
Figures quoted at like-for-like exchange 
rates are calculated by retranslating the 
previous year’s figures at the current 
year’s exchange rates.

Critical accounting 
judgements and estimates
The following provides information 
on those policies that management 
considers critical because of the level 
of judgement and estimation required 
which often involves assumptions 
regarding future events which can vary 
from what is anticipated. The Directors 
believe that the financial statements 
reflect appropriate judgements and 
estimates and provide a true and fair 
view of the Group’s performance and 
financial position.

Accounting estimates
(i) Business combinations
and intangible assets
IFRS 3 requires the identification of 
acquired intangible assets as part of 
a business combination. The methods 
used to value such intangible assets 
require the use of estimates and 
judgements such as customer attrition, 
cash flow generation from the existing 
relationships with customers and 
returns on other assets. Future results 
are impacted by the amortisation 
periods adopted and changes to the 
estimated useful lives would result 
in different effects on the income 
statement and balance sheet.

Goodwill is not amortised but is tested 
annually for impairment, along with the 
finite-lived intangible assets and other 
assets of the Group’s cash-generating 
units. Tests for impairment are 
based on discounted cash flows and 
assumptions (including discount rates, 
timing and growth prospects) which 
are inherently subjective. An estimate 
is also required in identifying the events 
which indicate potential impairment, 
and in assessing fair value of individual 
assets when allocating an impairment 
loss in a cash-generating unit or 
groups of cash-generating units. 
The Group performs various sensitivity 
analyses in respect of the tests for 
impairment, as detailed in note 9.

The useful lives of the Group’s 
finite-lived intangible assets are 
reviewed following the tests for 
impairment annually.

Judgement and estimates may also be 
required in determining the fair value 
of other assets acquired and liabilities 
(including contingent liabilities) 
assumed.

(ii) Taxation
There are many transactions and 
calculations for which the ultimate tax 
determination is uncertain. Estimates 
are required in determining the Group’s 
tax assets and liabilities. Deferred tax 
assets have been recognised to the 
extent they are recoverable based 
on profit projections for future years. 
Income tax liabilities for anticipated 
issues have been recognised based 
on estimates of whether additional 
tax will be due. Notwithstanding the 
above, the Group believes that it will 
recover tax assets and has adequate 
provision to cover all risks across all 
business operations. See note 11 for 
more details.

(iii) Leases and lease
right-of-use assets
A key judgement on adoption of IFRS 
16 is determining the incremental 
borrowing rates to be applied as at 
1 April 2019. Management considers all 
factors that incorporate the three key 
elements: risk-free rate, credit spread 
and an adjustment to asset class. 
Another key judgement in determining 
the right-of-use asset and lease liability 
is establishing whether it is reasonably 
certain that an option to extend the 
lease will be exercised. Distinguishing 
whether a lease will be extended or 
otherwise will have a material impact 
on the value of the right-of-use assets 
and lease liabilities recognised on 
the balance sheet, but may not have 
a material impact on the income 
statement.

104

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSIn determining the lease term, 
management considers all facts and 
circumstances that create an economic 
incentive to exercise an extension 
option, or not exercise a termination 
option. Extension options (or periods 
after termination options) are only 
included in the lease term if the lease is 
reasonably certain to be extended (or 
not terminated).

The assessment is reviewed if a 
significant event or a significant change 
in circumstances occurs which affects 
this assessment and that is within the 
control of the lessee.

(iv) Provision for slow
moving inventory
The Group has guidelines for providing 
for inventory which may be sold 
below cost due to its age or condition. 
Directors assess the inventory at each 
location and in some cases decide that 
there are specific reasons to provide 
more than the guideline levels, or less if 
there are specific action plans in place 
which mean the guideline provision 
level is not required. Determining the 
level of inventory provision requires 
an estimation of likely future realisable 
value of the inventory in various time 
frames and comparing with the cost 
of holding stock for those time frames. 
Regular monitoring of stock levels, 
the ageing of stock and the level of 
the provision is carried out by the 
Directors.

In addition, in light of Covid-19, further 
assessment of the recoverability of 
inventory has been undertaken as at 
31 March 2020. 

(v) Provision for receivables
The Group has guidelines for providing 
for receivables and at the end of a 
financial reporting period receivables 
are assessed for impairment using 
the expected credit loss model which 
requires expected credit losses and 
changes to expected credit losses 
to reflect changes in credit risk since 
initial recognition. Determining the 
level of expected credit loss requires 
an estimation based on a number of 
factors including historical payment 
patterns with the Group, alongside 
external credit risk ratings and general 
macro-economic factors. 

In addition, in light of Covid-19, further 
assessment of the recoverability of 
receivables has been undertaken as at 
31 March 2020. 

(vi) Pension benefits
The present value of the defined 
benefit pension obligations depends 
on a number of factors that are 
determined on an actuarial basis using 
a number of assumptions including the 
discount rate. Any changes in these 
assumptions will impact the carrying 
amount of pension obligations. 
The Group determines the appropriate 
discount rate at the end of each year. 
In determining the appropriate discount 
rate, the Group considers the interest 
rates of high-quality corporate bonds 
that are denominated in the currency in 
which the benefits will be paid and that 
have terms to maturity approximating 
the terms of the related pension 
liability. Other key assumptions for 
pension obligations are based in 
part on current market conditions. 
Additional information is disclosed in 
note 23.

Accounting judgements
(i) Adjusting items
Judgement is required to determine 
whether items should be included 
within adjusting items by virtue of their 
size or incidence. 

Specific judgements have been made 
in the estimates associated with 
adjusting items and further details of 
the items categorised as adjusting 
items and how estimates have been 
made are disclosed in note 3.

2 Segmental information
The Group has one material business 
activity, being the design, manufacture 
and distribution of Celebration, Craft 
& creative play, Stationery, Gifting and 
‘Not-for-resale’ consumable products.

For management purposes the Group 
is organised into four geographic 
business units.

The results in this note are allocated 
based on the region in which the 
businesses are located; this reflects 
the Group’s management and internal 
reporting structure. The Group has a 
China factory and Asian procurement 
operations which are overseen by 
our UK operational management 
team and we therefore continue to 
include UK owned and managed Asian 
operations within the internal reporting 
of the UK operations, comprising one 
operating segment. 

Since the acquisition of Impact 
Innovations, Inc. the Group had a 
second China factory (wholly owned 
and disposed of in the year) and Asian 
procurement which form part of the 
USA’s operations and therefore is 
included in the overall USA segment.

The acquisition of CSS Industries Inc. 
has seen additional entities in various 
locations around the world including 
Asia, Australia, UK, India and Mexico. 
Management review the results for 
CSS as one consolidated unit and this 
forms part of the USA segment for the 
purpose of segmental reporting. 

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

105

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

2 Segmental information continued
Inter-segment pricing is determined on an arm’s length basis. Segment results include items directly attributable to a 
segment as well as those that can be allocated on a reasonable basis.

Financial performance of each segment is measured on adjusted operating profit before management recharges. 
Interest and tax are managed on a Group basis and not split between reportable segments. However, the related financial 
liability and cash has been allocated out into the reportable segments as this is how they are managed by the Group.

Segment assets are all non-current and current assets, excluding deferred tax and income tax, which are shown in the 
eliminations column. Inter-segment receivables and payables are not included within segmental assets and liabilities as they 
eliminate on consolidation.

Year ended 31 March 2020 

Revenue  – external

– inter segment

Total segment revenue 

Segment result before adjusting  
items and management recharge  

Adjusting items (note 3)  

Operating profit 

Finance expenses

Income tax

Profit for the year ended 31 March 2020

Balances at 31 March 2020 

Segment assets 

Segment liabilities 

Capital expenditure additions

– property, plant and equipment

–  property, plant and equipment
on  acquisition of business

– intangible assets

–  intangible assets on

acquisition of business

Depreciation

Impairment

Depreciation – right-of-use assets 

Amortisation

Including Asian manufacturing and sourcing.

(a)
(b) Including overseas entities for the USA operating segment.

UK(a)

£000

Europe
£000

USA(b) 
£000

Australia 
£000

Central and
eliminations 
£000

Group 
£000

113,748 

65,797 

282,352 

32,337 

— 

494,234 

3,775 

2,825 

— 

— 

(6,600) 

— 

117,523 

68,622 

282,352 

32,337 

(6,600) 

494,234 

6,886 

10,147 

16,604 

2,964 

(3,177) 

33,424 

(28,844)

4,580

(4,317)

14,547

14,810

107,463 

44,715 

341,653 

17,479 

48,508 

559,818 

(43,246) 

(23,397) 

(160,959) 

(10,300) 

(18,797) 

(256,699)

2,430 

2,953 

2,607 

140 

3 

8,133 

— 

116 

— 

2,739 

348

2,059 

36 

— 

54 

— 

976 

—

770 

29 

31,695 

2,741 

4,656 

2,391 

—

3,332 

3,421 

— 

19 

— 

538 

—

798 

310 

— 

67 

— 

2 

— 

55 

— 

31,695 

2,997 

4,656 

6,646 

348

7,014 

3,796 

106

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Finance expense treated as an adjusting item (note 3) 

Year ended 31 March 2019

Revenue   – external 

– inter segment

Total segment revenue 

Segment result before adjusting  
items and management recharges 

Adjusting items (note 3)

Operating profit

Finance expenses

Income tax

Profit for year ended 31 March 2019 

Balances at 31 March 2019

Segment assets (restated)(b) 

Segment liabilities (restated)(b) 

Capital expenditure additions

–  property, plant and equipment

–  property, plant and equipment

on acquisition of business

– intangible assets

–  intangible assets on

acquisition of business (restated)(b)

Depreciation 

Amortisation 

Including Asian manufacturing and sourcing.

(a)
(b) For more detail please refer to note 1.

UK(a)

£000

Europe
£000

USA(a) 
£000

Australia 
£000

Central and
eliminations 
£000

Group 
£000

 123,006 

 63,188 

 223,101 

 39,067 

 — 

 448,362 

 4,112 

 1,377 

 — 

 — 

 (5,489) 

 — 

127,118 

 64,565 

 223,101 

 39,067 

 (5,489) 

 448,362 

 8,073 

 8,871 

 15,522 

 4,278 

 (4,098) 

 32,646 

 (12,888)

 19,758

 (2,318)

(158)

(4,031)

13,251 

100,079 

36,738 

117,144 

(34,366) 

(20,136) 

(88,382) 

17,198 

(8,284) 

62,027 

333,186 

(6,461) 

(157,629)

2,635 

 901 

 1,780 

 383 

 — 

 5,699

— 

 285 

— 

 2,333 

 167 

— 

 12 

— 

 920 

 35 

9,313 

 1,893 

18,308 

 1,452 

 1,781 

— 

 — 

 — 

 623 

 326 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

9,313 

 2,190 

18,308 

 5,328 

 2,309 

• The Group has one customer that accounts for 22% of the total Group revenues. In the year ended 31 March 2020

total sales to that customer were £106.6 million (2019: £79.1 million). This customer falls solely within the USA operating
segment above. No other single customer accounts for over 10% of total sales.

• The assets and liabilities that have not been allocated to segments consist of deferred tax assets £14.6 million

(2019: £3.6 million), income tax receivable £14.8 million (2019: £nil), income tax payable of £4.4 million (2019: £4.8 million)
and deferred tax liability £1.1 million (2019: £692,000).

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

107

 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

2 Segmental information continued
Geographical information
The Group’s information about its segmental assets (non-current assets excluding deferred tax assets and other long term 
assets) and revenue by customer destination are detailed below:

UK and Asia

USA

Europe

Australia

Revenue by customer destination 

UK

USA

Europe

Australia

Rest of the world

All revenue arose from the sale of goods.

Non-current assets

2020
£000

57,923  

166,834 

21,752  

8,223  

Restated 
2019 
£000

40,539 

62,871 

16,350 

5,077 

254,732  

124,837 

2020
£000

2019
£000

84,466 

97,260 

289,518 

235,092 

66,651 

31,941 

21,658 

68,314 

37,707 

9,989 

2020
%

17

59

13

7

4

2019 
%

22

53

15

8

2

494,234 

448,362 

100 

100

108

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
3 Operating expenses and adjusting items
Included in profit are the following charges/(credits):

Depreciation of tangible fixed assets 

Depreciation of right-of-use assets

(Profit)/loss on sales of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets 

Release of deferred grant income 

Amortisation of intangible assets – software 

Operating lease payment – minimum lease payment (restated)(a)

Sub-lease rental income  

Write down of inventories to net realisable value (underlying) 

Reversal of previous write downs on inventory 

Loss on foreign exchange

Adjusting items

(a) For more detail please refer to note 1.

Operating profit analysed as: 

Adjusted operating profit

Adjusting items

Operating profit

Adjusting items 

Note

8 

10 

5 

9 

5 

12 

12 

2020
£000

6,646  

7,014 

(188)

(299)

990 

—  

(281)

5,247 

(3,885)

835 

2019 
£000

5,328 

—

325

(247)

700

6,291 

(583)

4,173

(478)

814

28,844  

12,888 

2020
£000

2019 
£000

33,424 

32,646 

(28,844) 

(12,888)

4,580 

19,758

Year ended 31 March 2020

Losses/(gains) and transaction costs relating to 
acquisitions and disposals of businesses1

Acquisition integration and restructuring costs2

Impairment of assets3

Covid-19 costs4

US tariffs5

Amortisation of acquired intangibles6

LTIP credits7

Adjusting items

Cost of 
sales
£000

Selling 
expenses
£000

Admin 
expenses
£000

Profit on 
sale of 
business
£000

Other 
finance  

expenses
£000

25 

5,462 

6,468 

265 

3,572

— 

—

— 

— 

3,056 

— 

—

— 

—

4,712 

3,931 

— 

235 

—

2,806 

(202)

(1,486) 

— 

— 

— 

—

— 

—

15,792 

3,056 

11,482 

(1,486) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

—

— 

Total 
£000

3,251 

9,393 

9,524 

500 

3,572

2,806 

(202)

28,844 

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

109

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

3 Operating expenses and adjusting items continued
Adjusting items continued

Year ended 31 March 2019

Losses/(gains) and transaction costs relating to 
acquisitions and disposals of businesses1 

Acquisition integration and restructuring costs2 

Amortisation of acquired intangibles6

LTIP charges7

Adjusting items 

Cost of 
sales
£000

— 

1,748 

—

—

Selling 
expenses
£000

Admin 
expenses
£000

Profit on 
sale of 
business
£000

Other 
finance  

expenses
£000

— 

222 

— 

— 

2,254 

4,050 

1,609

3,005

— 

— 

—

—

— 

158 

— 

— 

— 

1,748 

222 

10,918 

158 

13,046 

Total 
£000

2,412 

6,020 

1,609

3,005

Adjusting items are separately presented by virtue of their nature, size and/or incidence (per each operating segment). 
These items are material items of an unusual or non-recurring nature which represent gains or losses and are presented to 
allow for the review of the performance of the business in a consistent manner and in line with how the business is managed 
and measured on a day-to-day basis and allow the reader to obtain a clearer understanding of the underlying results of the 
ongoing Group’s operations. They are typically gains or costs associated with events that are not considered to form part of 
the core operations, or are considered to be a ‘non-recurring’ event (although they may span several accounting periods). 

These losses/(gains) relating to the year ended 31 March 2020 are broken down as follows:

(1)  Losses/(gains) and transaction costs relating to acquisitions and disposals of businesses

Costs directly associated with acquisitions, including legal and advisory fees on deals, form part of our reported results on an IFRS basis. 
These costs however, in the Board’s view, form part of the capital transaction, and as they are not attributed to investment value under IFRS 
3, they are included as an adjusting item. Similarly, where acquisitions have employee related payments (exclusive of LTIPs) which lock in and 
incentivise legacy talent, we also include these costs as adjusting items. Furthermore, gains or losses on the disposal of businesses, including 
any transaction costs associated with the disposal, are treated as adjusting items. 

During the year ended 31 March 2020 the Group incurred a net cost of £3.3 million in relation to the acquisition and disposal of businesses. 
The main areas of expenditure relate to £3.9 million of due diligence, legal and adviser fees associated with the acquisition of CSS which was 
completed on 3 March 2020 as well as two small exploratory projects. In addition, £0.9 million of acquisition related employee payments from the 
Impact transaction in 2019 which lock in and incentivise legacy talent. These costs were offset by a profit of £1.5 million relating to the disposal 
which was completed on 24 February 2020 of our Shaoxing factory facilities in China. This facility was acquired as part of the Impact Innovations 
transaction completed in August 2018 and the disposal formed part of the planned integration programme. 

During the year ended 31 March 2019 the Group incurred £2.4 million in relation to transaction costs. This spend related to due diligence, legal and 
adviser fees associated with the acquisition of Impact which completed on 31 August 2018 along with acquisition related employee payments from 
the transaction which lock in and incentivise legacy talent. 

(2)  Acquisition integration and restructuring costs

In order to realise synergies from acquisition integration, projects are undertaken that aim to deliver future savings and efficiencies for the Group. 
These are projects outside of the normal operations of the business and typically incur one-time costs to ensure successful implementation. 
This is particularly relevant during a large scale restructuring of manufacturing facilities that can result in substantial disruption to the normal 
operational processes. As such the Board considers it appropriate that costs associated with projects of this nature be included as adjusting 
items. In calculating certain elements of the costs of disruption it is necessary to make judgements and estimates in relation to the impact on 
efficiency. 

For the years ended 31 March 2020 and 31 March 2019 the acquisition integration and restructuring costs relate to the ongoing UK unification 
initiative (£0.4 million), the integration of manufacturing facilities in the USA, following the acquisition of Impact, which lead to the combination of 
printing and converting processes into one site in Memphis (£5.5 million), transition and retention costs (£1.1 million) and costs relating to the CSS 
integration (£2.4 million).

The costs associated with the Memphis project were calculated by evaluating the true one-time expense associated with the operating 
challenges in the manufacturing environment created as a result of the integration alongside the delays to production plans as a result of the rapid 
development of US tariffs with China (s301 tariffs) and customers delaying sign off on artwork and packaging. All these costs arise directly as a 
result of integrating processes for the first time during the peak period. The costs include expenditure for one time outsourcing to meet production 
demands, additional warehousing to store inventory due to tariff driven delayed production and shipping and the subsequent knock-on customer 
related penalties. As part of the costs there are two significant areas of judgement relating to incremental overtime costs and incremental 
production inefficiencies associated with the integration. In both cases, prior years have been used to set a baseline for which incremental costs 
are measured against.

In addition to the above, £2.4 million of integration and restructuring costs were incurred following the acquisition of CSS during the year. 
These costs primarily related to severance costs of redundant roles in the legacy CSS business. 

110

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS(3)  Impairment of assets 

In light of the impact of Covid-19 on the business, a review of inventory, trade receivables and fixed assets at year end has been undertaken. 
Inventories have been assessed at the year end for the net realisable value and an impairment of £5.9 million has been taken in relation to aged 
and obsolete inventory as a result of lower sales. Trade receivables have been assessed for their expected credit loss in line with IFRS 9 and an 
impairment of £3.1 million has been taken. As our customers are mainly retailers, and for those who aren’t selling “essential items”, many have had 
to close stores as a result of the various quarantines around the world – this could have a significant impact on some of our customers.

Using forward looking information, including macro-economic information, each business unit has assessed any significant increase in credit 
risk and measuring any losses with regard to our year end debtors. Following an assessment of inventory related assets and certain fixed assets 
around the Group and the associated cash flows and useful remaining lives, an impairment of £538,000 has been taken.

(4) Covid-19 related costs 

The Covid-19 outbreak has developed rapidly in 2020, with measures taken around the world to contain the virus affecting economic activity. 
The Group has been affected in every territory in which we operate and the impact on the general economic environment and the reduced demand 
of goods from our customers as well as the closures of our businesses has had a significant impact. Certain costs relating to direct labour costs 
that are considered incremental following abnormal or forced closures of manufacturing facilities across the Group have been identified that have 
impacted the financial results of the business during the year, equal to £0.5 million. These costs will continue into 2021. 

(5)  US tariffs

The US tariff with China (s301 tariff) has resulted in costs incurred in the year which had a significant impact on our business in this financial year. 
The rapid evolution of tariffs became applicable to more of our product categories with no advance warning. The timing of the introduction of 
tariffs meant that the majority of our purchase orders had been agreed with customers and suppliers, effectively creating a situation where the US 
business was locked into purchase commitments and sales prices that could not be renegotiated. This one time impact will not be repeated as the 
business will be able to mitigate the effect of tariffs in future years as part of the negotiation of contracts with customers and suppliers. As such 
the impact of tariffs in the financial year is treated as an adjusting item 

(6)  IFRS 2 (LTIP) (credits)/costs

As part of our senior management remuneration, the Group operates a Long Term Incentive Plan (‘LTIP’) in the form of options for ordinary shares 
of the Group. In accordance with accounting principles, despite this plan not being a cash cost to the business, a share-based payments charge 
is taken to the income statement. We consider that these charges and the associated social security charges do not form part of the underlying 
operational costs and therefore include these as adjusting items. 

In the year ended 31 March 2020 there was an IFRS 2 credit due to the lowered expectations in respect of future schemes vesting. Please see note 
23 for more detail. 

(7)  Amortisation of acquired intangibles

Under IFRS, as part of the acquisition of a company, it is necessary to identify intangible assets such as customer relationships and brands which form 
part of the intangible value of the acquired business but are not part of the acquired balance sheet. These intangible assets are then amortised to the 
income statement over an appropriately judged period. These are not operational costs relating to the running of the acquired business and are directly 
related to the accounting for the acquisition. These include trade names and brands acquired as part of the acquisition of The Lang Companies Inc., 
Impact Innovations Inc. and CSS Industries Inc. in the USA and Biscay Pty Greetings Ltd in Australia. As such we include these as adjusting items. 

In addition, in accordance with IFRS 3, on acquisition, businesses need to be fair valued, which can result in an uplift to stock on hand relating to 
sales orders already attached to the acquired stock. This uplift will distort the margins associated with the stock, and typically unwinds quickly as 
stock is sold soon after acquisition. The unwind of the stock uplift is included as an adjusting item. 

The cash flow effect on adjusting items
There was £12.8 million net outflow on the current year’s cash flow (2019: £287,000) which included £708,000 
(2019: £473,000) of outflow deferred from last year.

Auditor’s remuneration:

Amounts receivable by auditor and its associates in respect of: 

Audit of these financial statements

Audit of financial statements of subsidiaries pursuant to legislation 

– Overseas subsidiaries

– UK subsidiaries

Other audit related services

Taxation compliance services

All other taxation advisory services

Services relating to corporate finance transactions

Other services

Note that prior year remuneration related to the Group’s previous auditor, KPMG LLP. 

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

2020
£000

715

100

70

45

220

34

547

—

2019 
£000

80

326

66

10

26

14

—

10

111

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

4 Staff numbers and costs
The average number of persons employed by the Group (including Directors) during the year, analysed by category, 
was as follows:

Selling and administration

Production and distribution

The aggregate payroll costs of these persons were as follows:

Wages and salaries

Share-based payments – Long Term Incentive Plan 

Social security costs

Other pension costs

Number of employees

2020

700 

1,858  

2,558  

2019

641 

1,723 

2,364 

2020
£000

2019 
£000

74,092  

62,083 

(202)

6,046  

3,217  

3,005

4,795 

3,532 

83,153  

73,415 

Note

23 

For information on Directors’ remuneration please refer to the section titled ‘Directors’ remuneration’ within the Directors’ 
remuneration report (pages 71 to 76) and Long Term Incentive Plan (page 127), which form part of these audited financial 
statements.

5 Other operating income

Grant income received

Sub-lease rentals credited to the income statement 

Other

6 Finance expenses

Interest payable on bank loans and overdrafts 

Other similar charges

Lease liability interest

Unwinding of fair value discounts

Interest payable under the effective interest method 

Derivative financial instruments at fair value through the income statement  

Adjusting items

2020
£000

299 

281 

155 

735 

2020
£000

1,999  

297 

1,609 

69 

3,974  

343 

4,317  

— 

4,317  

2019 
£000

247

583

(210)

620

2019 
£000

1,754 

(74)

—

86

1,766 

552

2,318 

158

2,476 

£580,000 has been reclassified in the prior year from interest payable on bank loans and overdrafts to derivative financial 
instruments at fair value through the income statement as this is the charge relating to swaps in the year.

112

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
7 Taxation
Recognised in the income statement

Current tax (credit)/charge 

Current year

Adjustments in respect of previous years 

Deferred tax (credit)/charge

Origination and reversal of temporary differences 

Adjustments in respect of previous years 

Total tax in income statement

Total tax (credit)/charge on adjusting items 

Total tax on profit before adjusting items 

Total tax on adjusting items

Adjusting item – tax credit (US tax loss carryback) 

Total tax in income statement 

Reconciliation of effective tax rate

Profit before tax

Profit before tax multiplied by the standard rate of corporation tax rate of 19% in the UK (2019: 19%) 

Effects of: 

Income not taxable

Expenses not deductible for tax purposes 

Movement in unrecognised tax assets 

Effect of tax rate changes

Differences between UK and overseas tax rates   

Movement in uncertain tax provision 

Local tax incentives

Other items

Adjustments in respect of previous periods 

US tax loss carryback(a)

Total tax in income statement

(a) Please refer to note 11 for more detail. 

2020
£000

2019 
£000

(11,001) 

4,770 

(507)

38

(11,508) 

4,808 

(2,603)

(436)

(3,039)

(617)

(160)

(777)

(14,547) 

4,031

5,852  

(6,589) 

(13,810)

(14,547) 

2020
£000

263 

50 

(339)

628 

— 

(142)

453  

(457)

— 

13

(943)

(13,810)

(14,547) 

7,094

(3,063)

—

4,031 

2019 
£000

17,282 

3,284

(88)

208

296

33

1,053

(408)

(100)

(125)

(122)

—

4,031

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

113

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

8 Property, plant and equipment

Cost 

Balance at 1 April 2018 (restated) 

Additions 

Additions on acquisition of business  

Transfers between fixed asset categories 

Transfers to computer software 

Disposals

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

Balance at 1 April 2019 (restated) 

Additions 

Additions on acquisition of business (note 28) 

Transfers between fixed asset categories 

Transfers to computer software 

Disposals 

Disposal of a business (note 28) 

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

Balance at 31 March 2020

Depreciation and impairment

Balance at 1 April 2018 (restated) 

Depreciation charge for the year 

Transfers between fixed asset categories 

Transfers to computer software 

Disposals 

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

Balance at 1 April 2019 (restated) 

Depreciation charge for the year 

Impairment charge for the year 

Transfers between fixed asset categories 

Transfers to computer software 

Disposals 

Disposal of a business (note 28) 

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

Land and buildings

Freehold 
£000

Leasehold 
£000

Plant and 
equipment 
£000

Fixtures and 
fittings 
£000

Motor
vehicles
£000

20,096 

1,078 

462 

(57)

—  

(405) 

(127)

21,047 

598 

16,840 

(1,242) 

— 

— 

— 

881 

9,633 

126 

— 

83

—

(8,252)

636

2,226 

204 

933 

— 

— 

— 

— 

130 

50,073 

3,712 

8,851 

(43)

(620)

(352)

351  

61,972 

6,683 

13,510 

425 

— 

(1,176) 

(389)

1,864  

4,011 

550 

— 

17

(101)

(285)

40

Total 
£000

85,067 

5,699 

9,313 

— 

(721)

1,254 

233 

— 

— 

— 

(351) 

(9,645)

(8)

892

4,232 

1,128 

90,605 

398 

261 

416 

2,338 

(170)

—

51

250 

151 

401 

— 

(125)

—

(32)

8,133 

31,695 

— 

2,338 

(1,471)

(389)

2,894

38,124 

3,493 

82,889 

7,526 

1,773 

133,805 

(10,978) 

(5,059) 

(30,235) 

(2,692) 

(769)

6 

— 

152 

57 

(414)

(3,478) 

— 

— 

3,769 

(301)

35 

170 

86 

(224)

(502)

(41)

101 

248 

(22)

(11,532) 

(2,005) 

(33,646) 

(2,908) 

(929)

—  

540 

— 

— 

— 

(125)

(196)

—

(13)

— 

— 

— 

(46)

(4,718) 

(348)

(63)

— 

892 

281 

(735)

(634)

—

(154)

(1,768) 

69 

— 

(33)

(604)

(165)

(49,568)

(5,328)

—

— 

84 

6

(679)

(169)

—

(310)

—

107

— 

12 

— 

271 

4,339 

(484)

(50,770)

(6,646)

(348)

— 

(1,768)

1,068 

281 

(927)

Balance at 31 March 2020

(12,046) 

(2,260) 

(38,337) 

(5,428) 

(1,039) 

(59,110)

Net book value

Balance at 31 March 2020

At 31 March 2019 

26,078 

9,515 

1,233 

221 

44,552 

28,326 

2,098 

1,324 

734 

449 

74,695 

39,835 

Depreciation is charged to cost of sales, selling costs or administration costs within the income statement depending on the 
department to which the assets relate.

There has been a restatement to correct the prior year cost and accumulated depreciation of assets which were acquired in 
previous acquisitions. The net book values of these assets remain unchanged. 

Security
All freehold properties are subject to a fixed charge in support of the banking facility.

114

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
 
 
9 Intangible assets

Cost 

Balance at 1 April 2018 (restated) 

Additions 

Additions on acquisition of businesses 
(restated) (note 28) 

Transfer from fixed assets  

Disposals  

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

Balance at 1 April 2019 (restated) 

Additions 

Goodwill 
£000

43,368 

— 

30,046 

— 

(33)

404  

73,785 

— 

Additions on acquisition of businesses (note 28) 

21,957 

Transfer from fixed assets 

Disposals  

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

— 

— 

2,374 

Computer 
software 
£000

Trade 
names 
£000

Customer 
relationships 
£000

Other
intangibles
£000

Total 
£000

50,442 

2,190 

48,354 

721 

(498)

670 

473 

— 

1,294 

— 

1,154 

17,154 

— 

— 

20 

— 

— 

44 

133 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

1,647 

18,492 

133 

101,879 

— 

2,422 

— 

—

134

— 

— 

— 

— 

799 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(1)

2,997 

26,613 

(2,338)

(249)

3,629

5,174 

2,190 

— 

721 

(465)

202

7,822 

2,997 

2,234 

(2,338) 

(249)

323  

Balance at 31 March 2020

Amortisation and impairment

Balance at 1 April 2018 (restated) 

Amortisation charge for the year 

Transfers from fixed assets  

Disposals  

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

Balance at 1 April 2019 (restated) 

Amortisation charge for the year 

Transfers from fixed assets 

Disposals 

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

98,116 

10,789 

4,203 

19,291 

132 

132,531 

(9,694) 

(3,450) 

— 

— 

33 

(475)

(700)

(271)

134  

(57)

(10,136) 

(4,344) 

— 

— 

— 

(354)

(990)

1,768 

248 

(95)

(186)

(392)

—

—

(11)

(589)

(1,126)

— 

— 

(41)

(457)

(1,214)

— 

— 

(26)

(1,697)

(1,680)

— 

— 

(72)

(108)

(13,895)

(3)

— 

— 

— 

(2,309)

(271)

167 

(569)

(111)

(16,877)

— 

— 

— 

(3)

(3,796)

1,768 

248 

(565)

Balance at 31 March 2020

(10,490) 

(3,413) 

(1,756) 

(3,449) 

(114)

(19,222)

Net book value

Balance at 31 March 2020 

At 31 March 2019 (restated) 

87,626 

63,649 

7,376 

3,478 

2,447 

1,058 

15,842 

16,795 

18 

22 

113,309 

85,002 

Computer software relates to purchased software and people costs associated with the implementation of software. 

There has been a restatement to correct the prior year cost and accumulated depreciation of assets which were acquired in 
previous acquisitions and the net book values of these assets remain unchanged. The acquisition accounting for Impact has 
been reviewed and hindsight adjustments have been made to goodwill and intangibles.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

115

 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

9 Intangible assets continued
The aggregate carrying amounts of goodwill allocated to each geographical segment are as follows:

UK and Asia

Europe

USA (restated)

Australia

Total

2020
£000

2019 
£000

25,600  

25,600 

5,378  

5,248 

54,165  

30,046 

2,483  

2,755 

87,626  

63,649 

All goodwill balances have arisen as a result of acquisitions and are not internally generated.

Impairment
The Group tests goodwill each year for impairment, or more frequently if there are indications that goodwill might be 
impaired.

For the purposes of impairment testing, goodwill considered significant in comparison to the Group’s total carrying amount 
of such assets has been allocated to the business unit, or group of business units, that are expected to benefit from 
the synergies of the combination, which represents the lowest level within the Group at which the goodwill is monitored 
for internal management purposes, and is referred to below as a cash-generating unit. The recoverable amounts of 
cash-generating units are determined from the higher of value in use and fair value less costs to sell. 

The Group has prepared updated forecasts following the outbreak of the Covid-19 pandemic for each cash-generating unit 
for the following two years and these have been reviewed by the Board. The key assumptions in those forecasts are sales, 
margins achievable and overhead costs, which are based on past experience and future expectations. The Group then 
extrapolates cash flows for the following three years to determine discounted cash flows for five years plus a terminal value 
based on a conservative estimate of market growth of 1.0% (2019: 0.5%). 

Generally, the Group’s post-tax weighted average cost of capital (‘WACC’) is 6.8% prior to any risk factor, and 7.3% post 
application of a 0.5% risk weighting. This has been compared to other similar companies and is believed to be appropriate. 

The cash-generating units used the following pre-tax discount rates which are derived from an estimate of the Group’s future 
WACC adjusted to reflect the market assessment of the risks specific to the current estimated cash flows over the same 
period. 

Pre-tax discount rates used were:

UK and Asia

Europe

USA

Australia

2020

8.5% 

9.6% 

9.3% 

10.2% 

2019

10.9%

11.7%

12.5%

13.4%

All of the cash-generating units’ values in use were determined to be higher than fair value less costs to sell, thus this was 
used as the recoverable amount. In all businesses, the carrying value of the goodwill was supported by the recoverable 
amount and there are currently no reasonably foreseeable changes to assumptions that would give rise to an impairment 
of the carrying value.

The Directors do not believe a reasonably possible change to the assumptions would give rise to an impairment. 
The Directors have considered a 2% movement in the discount rate and a flat budget growth rate assumption in their 
sensitivity assessment; with these changes in assumptions there is still significant headroom and no indication of 
impairment.

116

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
 
 
10 Right-of-use assets and lease liabilities
Right-of-use assets

Net book value at 1 April 2019 

Additions 

Additions on acquisition of business  

Disposals

Disposal of a business   

Depreciation charge

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

Net book value at 31 March 2020 

Land and  
buildings 
£000

33,736 

5,388 

31,014 

(17)

(461)

(6,209)

1,166 

64,617 

Plant and 
machinery 
£000

Motor 
vehicles 
£000

Office  

equipment
£000

984 

167 

484 

—  

—

(410)

29  

1,254 

488 

117 

93 

—

— 

(281)

11

428 

294 

99 

167 

(17)

—  

(114)

—  

429 

Income statement
The income statement shows the following amounts relating to leases:

Interest expense (included in finance expenses) 

Depreciation charge

Expense relating to short term leases 

Total 
£000

35,502 

5,771 

31,758 

(34)

(461)

(7,014)

1,206

66,728 

2020 
£000

1,609 

7,014

2,446 

Short term lease commitments as at the end of the year for the coming twelve months are £371,000. This is significantly 
lower than the expenses in the financial year to 31 March 2020 following the cessation of a short term property lease in the 
USA which will be replaced by a lease with an initial term of six years and an estimated lease liability on commencement of 
£13.1 million. 

Low value lease costs were negligible in the year.

Operating lease (IAS 17) commitments and opening lease liabilities reconciliation

Operating lease commitments disclosed as at 31 March 2019 (restated) 

Discounted using the lessee’s incremental borrowing rate at the date of initial application 

Less: contracts to which the short term leases exemption applies 

Add/(less): adjustments as a result of a different treatment of extension and termination options 

Lease liability recognised as at 1 April 2019 

Of which are: 

Current lease liabilities

Non-current lease liabilities

Total

£000

41,522 

34,481 

(235)

5,863 

40,109 

5,669

34,440

40,109 

Lease liabilities as at 31 March 2020 are £76.9 million (of which £63.2 million are non-current liabilities and £13.7 million are 
current liabilities). The significant increase in lease liabilities is as a result of the acquisition of CSS Industries Inc. 

Commitments for minimum lease payments in relation to non-cancellable operating leases are payable as follows:

Less than one year

Between one and five years

More than five years

Total

2020
£000

371  

—  

—  

371  

2019 
£000

6,866 

16,625 

18,031 

41,522 

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

117

 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

10 Right-of-use assets and lease liabilities continued
Segment assets and liabilities
Segment assets and segment liabilities for 31 March 2020 all increased as a result of the change in accounting policy. 
The segments were affected by the change in policy as follows:

UK and Asia

Europe

USA

Australia

Central & eliminations

Total

Income from subleasing right-of-use assets
During the year sublease income from right-of-use assets was as follows: 

Sublease income in the year from subleasing right-of-use assets 

Non-cancellable operating lease rentals are receivable as follows: 

Less than one year

Between one and five years

Total

11 Deferred tax assets and liabilities
Recognised deferred tax assets and liabilities
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are attributable to the following:

2020 
Segment 
assets 
£000

2020 
Segment 
liabilities 
£000

17,006 

(19,450) 

3,700 

(3,738) 

41,360 

(47,808) 

4,575 

(5,868) 

87 

(82) 

66,728 

(76,946) 

2020 
£000

281 

2020 
£000

310 

327 

637 

At 1 April 2019 

(Charge)/credit to income statement  

(Charge)/credit to equity 

Acquisitions 

At 31 March 2020 

Deferred tax liabilities 

Deferred tax assets 

  Property, plant

and equipment  
and intangible  
assets  
£000

(4,438) 

(173)

6 

5,545 

940 

(1,246) 

2,186 

940 

Tax losses 
carried 
forward 
£000

1,874 

1,565

348 

— 

Share-based 
payments 
£000

1,733 

(104)

(423)

—  

Doubtful 
debts 
£000

1,430 

1,676

85

—

3,787 

1,206 

3,191 

— 

3,787 

3,787 

— 

1,206 

1,206 

— 

3,191 

3,191 

Other timing 
differences(a)

£000

2,319 

75 

719 

1,328 

4,441 

(148)

4,589 

4,441 

Total 
£000

2,918 

3,039 

735 

6,873

13,565 

(1,394)

14,959

13,565 

118

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
At 1 April 2018 

(Charge)/credit to income statement  

(Charge)/credit to equity 

Reclassification 

At 31 March 2019 

Deferred tax liabilities (restated)(b) 

Deferred tax assets (restated)(b) 

  Property, plant

and equipment  
and intangible  
assets 
£000

Tax losses 
carried 
forward 
£000

Share-based 
payments 
£000

(1,137) 

(2,653) 

(115)

(533)

(4,438) 

(4,443) 

5 

(4,438) 

584 

1,103 

187

—

1,874 

— 

1,874 

1,874 

1,943 

1,004 

(358)

(856)

1,733 

— 

1,733 

1,733 

Doubtful 
debts 
£000

819 

611 

—

—

1,430 

— 

1,430 

1,430 

Other timing 
differences(a)

£000

81 

712 

137 

1,389 

2,319 

(208)

2,527  

2,319 

Total 
£000

2,290 

777 

(149)

— 

2,918 

(4,651)

7,569

2,918 

(a) Other timing differences include a deferred tax closing balance of £1.5 million (2019: £1.3 million) in respect of provision for inventory and 

£1.2 million (2019: £nil) in respect of leases. 

(b) For more details please refer to note 1.

Deferred tax is presented net on the balance sheet in so far as a right of offset exists. The net deferred tax asset is 
£14.6 million (2019: £3.6 million) and the net deferred tax liability is £1.1 million (2019: £692,000). Deferred tax assets and 
liabilities are treated as non-current as it is expected that they will be recovered or settled more than twelve months after 
the reporting date. 

The prior year categorisation of deferred tax balances has been corrected. This has no impact on the total deferred tax 
balance as presented on the balance sheet.

In March 2020, the Coronavirus Aid, Relief, and Economic Security Act was enacted in the US which includes a temporary 
relaxation of rules limiting net operating loss deductions. As a result, existing net operating losses (NOLs) in CSS are being 
carried back to claim a refund with a tax value of £13.9 million ($17.3 million) for taxes paid in prior years. Given that these 
NOLs had limited value at the time of acquisition on 3 March 2020 (primarily as a result of change in ownership rules) and 
this law was enacted after the acquisition date, the carryback claim results in a significant tax credit in the year. This has 
been included as an adjusting tax item.

The deferred tax asset in respect of tax losses carried forward at 31 March 2020 of £3.8 million (2019: £1.9 million) comprises 
UK tax losses of £2.0 million (2019: £991,000), US tax losses of £1.8 million (2019: £883,000) and Asia tax losses of £109,000 
(2019: £nil). The majority of the US tax losses may be carried forward indefinitely. UK and Asia tax losses may be carried 
forward indefinitely. The deferred tax assets have been recognised where the Board considers there is sufficient evidence 
that taxable profits will be available against which the tax losses can be utilised. The Board expects that the tax losses 
will be recoverable against future profits. There are unrecognised deferred tax assets in respect of UK losses of £642,000 
(2019: £574,000), £nil (2019: £369,000) in respect of China, and £nil (2019: £235,000) in respect of Asia.

Following the CSS acquisition there are temporary differences of $101.6 million (£81.9 million) and unused tax losses of 
$9.4 million (£7.6 million) (with no expiry date) on which deferred tax assets have not been provided. This excludes the CSS 
tax losses that have been carried back as noted above. Deferred tax assets have not been recognised on these primarily as 
a result of restrictions under the US change in ownership rules.

A deferred tax liability of £80,000 (2019: £237,000) has been recognised based on the tax cost of remitting earnings from 
China. No other deferred tax liability has been recognised on unremitted earnings of the overseas subsidiaries as if all 
unremitted earnings were repatriated with immediate effect, no other tax charge would be payable. The standard rate of UK 
corporation tax will no longer reduce to 17% from 1 April 2020. These proposed changes, which were substantively enacted 
in September 2016, were changed in March 2020 to maintain the UK corporate tax rate at 19% by a resolution under the 
Provisional Collection of Taxes Act 1968. This increased rate has been reflected in the calculation of deferred tax at the 
balance sheet date.

Included within current tax liabilities is £4.8 million (2019: £2.7 million) in respect of uncertain tax positions. This consists 
of various tax risks of which the majority are individually not material. As a result of the acquisition of CSS Industries Inc. 
in March 2020, additional liabilities have been recognised in respect of inherited uncertain tax positions. Of these liabilities, 
there is one individual liability that is material (£2.5 million). These risks arise because the Group operates in a complex 
multinational tax environment. The position is reviewed on an ongoing basis and generally these tax positions are released 
at the end of the relevant territories’ statute of limitations. 

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

119

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

11 Deferred tax assets and liabilities continued
Recognised deferred tax assets and liabilities continued
A total tax credit of £171,000 (2019: £764,000 credit) has been recognised through the statement of changes in equity in 
respect of share-based payments (consisting of a deferred tax charge and current tax credit of £146,000 (2019: £358,000) 
and £317,000 (2019: £1.1 million) respectively). A deferred tax credit of £771,000 has been recognised through the statement 
of changes in equity on adoption of IFRS 16 Leases. There are no deferred tax balances with respect to cash flow hedges.

12 Inventory

Raw materials and consumables

Work in progress

Finished goods

2020
£000

19,886 

20,179  

74,380  

114,445  

2019 
£000

19,242 

7,818 

42,511 

69,571 

In 2020, materials, consumables, changes in finished goods and work in progress of £361.1 million (2019: £323.5 million) 
were recognised as an expense during the year and included in cost of sales.

Due to the impact of Covid-19, inventories have been assessed at the 2020 year end and an impairment of £6.2 million has 
been taken to reduce the value of inventories to net realisable value, this includes £0.2 million of impairment of consumables. 
In addition to this, inventories have been reduced by a further £5.2 million (2019: £4.2 million) as a result of write-down to 
net realisable value and this was recognised as an expense during 2020. This expense has been reduced by the reversal of 
previous write downs amounting to £3.9 million (2019: £478,000) due to inventory either being used or sold.

13 Long term assets and trade and other receivables
Long term assets acquired as part of the acquisition of CSS are as follows:

Acquisition indemnities

UK pension surplus

Security deposits

Insurance related assets

2020
£000

581

482

877

3,079

5,019

2019 
£000

—

—

—

—

—

Acquisition indemnities relate to previous acquisitions made by CSS and indemnities provided by the seller, security 
deposits relate to leased properties, and insurance related assets including a corporate owned life insurance policy.

Trade and other receivables are as follows:

Trade receivables (restated)(a)

Prepayments, other receivables and accrued income (restated) 

VAT receivable

(a) For more details please refer to note 1.

2020
£000

2019 
£000

77,716  

44,097

10,700  

4,993 

332 

634

88,748  

49,724 

The Group has receivable financing arrangements in Hong Kong. None of this facility was drawn at 31 March 2020 
(2019: £nil).

Please see note 15 for more details of the banking facilities.

There are no trade receivables in the current year (2019: £nil) expected to be recovered in more than twelve months.

The Group’s exposure to credit and currency risks and provisions for doubtful debts related to trade and other receivables is 
disclosed in note 24.

120

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
 
 
14 Cash and cash equivalents/bank overdrafts

Cash and cash equivalents (restated)(a)

Bank overdrafts (restated)(a)

Cash and cash equivalents per cash flow statement 

(a) For more details please refer to note 1.

Net cash

Cash and cash equivalents

Bank loans and overdrafts

Loan arrangement fees

Net cash as used in the financial review 

2020
£000

2019 
£000

67,098  

85,315 

(25,004) 

(65,857)

42,094  

19,458 

Note

15

2020
£000

42,094  

(796)

975  

2019 
£000

19,458 

(2,405)

31

42,273  

17,084 

The Group’s exposure to interest rate risk and sensitivity analysis for financial assets and liabilities are disclosed in note 24.

The bank loans and overdrafts are secured by a fixed charge on certain of the Group’s land and buildings, a fixed charge on 
certain of the Group’s book debts and a floating charge on certain of the Group’s other assets. See note 15 for further details 
of the Group’s loans and overdrafts.

Changes in net cash

Balance at 1 April 2018  

Cash flows  

Other changes 

Amortisation of loan arrangement fees  

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

Balance at 1 April 2019  

Cash flows 

Changes from financing cash flows 

Amortisation of loan arrangement fees 

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

Balance at 31 March 2020 

Loans and 
borrowings
£000

(4,780) 

2,350 

— 

25 

(2,405) 

1,505 

— 

104 

(796)

Loan  

arrangement
fees 
£000

105 

30 

(104)

—  

31 

1,234 

(290)

—  

975

Other assets 
Cash/bank
overdrafts
£000

9,031 

11,178 

— 

(751)

19,458 

21,239 

Sub total 
£000

(4,675) 

2,380 

(104)

25

(2,374) 

2,739 

Total 
£000

4,356

13,558 

(104)

(726)

17,084 

23,978 

(290)

104

179 

— 

1,397 

(290)

1,501 

42,094 

42,273 

15 Loans and borrowings
This note provides information about the contractual terms of the Group’s interest-bearing loans and borrowings. For more 
information about the Group’s exposure to interest rate and foreign currency risk, see note 24.

Non-current liabilities  

Secured bank loans

Loan arrangement fees

Current liabilities 

Current portion of secured bank loans 

Loan arrangement fees

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

2020
£000

2019 
£000

348  

(525)

(177)

448 

(450)

(2)

1,421 

—

1,421

984

(31)

953

121

 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

15 Loans and borrowings continued
Terms and debt repayment schedule

Due within one year:   

Bank loans and borrowings

Due between one and two years: 

Secured bank loans

Due between two and five years: 

Secured bank loans

2020
£000

448 

348

—

796 

2019 
£000

984

984

437

2,405 

Secured bank loans
On 5 June 2019, the Group entered into a new three year Group facility with a club of five banks chosen to reflect and 
support the geographical spread of the Group. The banks within the club are HSBC, NatWest, BNP Paribas, Sun Trust 
and PNC.

On 17 January 2020 the facility was increased to support the acquisition of CSS Industries Inc. on 3 March 2020 and to 
accommodate the enlarged Group. 

The facilities, which run to May 2022, comprise of:

• a revolving credit facility (‘RCF A’) of $95.0 million;
• a further flexible revolving credit facility (‘RCF B’) with availability varying from month to month of up to £130.0 million.
This RCF is flexed to meet our working capital requirements during those months when inventory is being built within
our annual business cycle and is £nil when not required, minimising carry costs; and

• an invoice financing arrangement in Hong Kong, maximum limit $18.0 million but dependent on level of

eligible receivables.

In total, the accessible facilities are approximately £212.0 million (maximum £219.0 million) and are more than sufficient to 
cover our peak requirements. Being partially framed in US dollars they also provide a hedge against currency movements. 
The facilities, which do not amortise with time, include an additional uncommitted amount to finance potential acquisitions.

Invoice financing arrangements are secured over the trade receivables that they are drawn on. The RCF facilities are secured 
with a fixed and floating charge over all other assets of the Group. 

There are financial covenants, tested quarterly, attached to the existing facilities as follows:

• interest cover, being the ratio of adjusted earnings before interest, depreciation and amortisation (EBITDA) as defined by

the banking facility to interest on a rolling twelve month basis; and

• leverage, being the ratio of debt to adjusted EBITDA as defined by the banking facility on a rolling twelve month basis.

Covenants are measured on pre IFRS 16 accounting definitions.

There is a further covenant tested monthly in respect of the working capital RCF by which available asset cover must not fall 
below agreed levels relative to amounts drawn.

In January 2018, the Group’s Australia business obtained a secured loan from Westpac of £5.1 million (AU$9.0 million). This is 
repayable monthly over a five year period. It is subject to a variable interest rate linked to the Australian base rate. £1.5 million 
was repaid during the year which, along with £104,000 exchange movement results in a balance at 31 March 2020 of £796,000 
(AU$1.6 million). The Australia business also borrows from Westpac for financing working capital and the current facility level is 
AU$5.0 million from January to June and AU$10.0 million July to December.

Loan arrangement fees represent the unamortised costs in arranging the Group facilities. These fees are being amortised on 
a straight line basis over the terms of the facilities. 

122

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS16 Deferred income

Included within non-current liabilities 

Deferred grant income

Included within current liabilities 

Deferred grant income

Other deferred income

2020
£000

2019 
£000

452 

751

99 

32 

131 

99

—

99

The deferred grant income is in respect of government grants relating to the development of the site in Wales. The conditions 
for this grant were all fully met in January 2019.

17 Provisions

Balance at 1 April 2019  

Provisions made in the year 

Additions of acquisition of business   

Disposal of subsidiary

Provisions released during the year   

Unwinding of fair value discounts 

Provisions utilised during the year 

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

Balance at 31 March 2020 

Non-current

Current

Property 
£000

3,434 

8 

Other
£000

327 

78 

1,753 

2,284 

(158)

(162)

69  

(26)

149  

—  

(1,454)

—

—

52

Total 
£000

3,761 

86 

4,037 

(158)

(1,616)

69 

(26)

201 

5,067 

1,287 

6,354 

2020
£000

4,163 

2,191  

6,354 

2019 
£000

2,671 

1,090 

3,761 

The property provision represents the estimated reinstatement cost of 13 (2019: six) of the Group’s leasehold properties 
under fully repairing leases. A professional valuation was performed during 2016 for one of the leasehold properties and the 
provision was reassessed and is stated after discounting. £990,000 (2019: £935,000) of the non-current balance relates to a 
lease expiring in 2036; the balance relates to items between one and five years. 

As a result of the acquisition of CSS Industries Inc. additional provisions of £4.0 million have been recognised, of which 
£1.8 million relates to the reinstatement costs of CSS’ leased properties. £2.2 million of other provisions relates to onerous 
customer contracts, which is a short term provision. 

Other provisions are short term and represent management’s best estimate in respect of minor amounts arising in the 
normal course of business.

The timing of the utilisation of provisions assumes the business continues to operate based on the most up-to-date 
business plan.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

123

 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

18 Other financial liabilities

Included within non-current liabilities 

Other creditors and accruals

Included within current liabilities   

Other creditors and accruals (restated) 

Interest rate swaps and forward foreign currency contracts 
carried at fair value through the income statement 

Interest rate swaps and forward foreign exchange contracts 
carried at fair value through the hedging reserve   

19 Trade and other payables

Trade payables

Other payables including social security 

VAT payable

2020
£000

2019 
£000

5,471  

1,817 

38,698  

18,942 

— 

7 

—

2

38,705 

18,944 

2020
£000

2019 
£000

90,820  

57,336 

7,090 

447 

947

280

98,357 

58,563 

20 Share capital 
Authorised share capital at 31 March 2020 and 2019 was £6.0 million into 121.0 million ordinary shares of 5p each.

In thousands of shares

In issue at 1 April

Options exercised during the year

Share issue as part of the consideration for Impact Innovations, Inc. 

Share placing

In issue at 31 March – fully paid 

Allotted, called up and fully paid 

Ordinary shares of £0.05 each

Ordinary shares

2020

2019

78,366 

63,890

711 

— 

17,290 

96,367 

1,655

3,017

9,804 

78,366

2020
£000

2019 
£000

4,818 

3,918

Of the 96.4 million shares in the Company, 31,000 (2019: 31,000) are held by the International Greetings Employee Benefit 
Trust.

No share options were exercised during the year (2019: 200,000 ordinary shares were issued as a result of share option 
exercises which generated cash proceeds of £28,000). 

LTIP options exercised during the year resulted in 711,000 ordinary shares being issued at nil cost (2019: 1.5 million ordinary 
shares being issued at nil cost).

In support of the acquisition of CSS Industries, Inc. on 24 January 2020, the Group raised £53.4 million after expenses of 
£1.4 million by way of a share placing of 7.9 million new ordinary shares at a share price of £6.94 per share. On 12 February 
2020, the Group raised an additional £63.5 million after expenses of £1.7 million by way of a share placing of 9.4 million new 
ordinary shares at a share price of £6.94 per share.

The holders of ordinary shares are entitled to receive dividends as declared from time to time and are entitled to one vote per 
share at meetings of the Company.

124

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
 
28,562 

(6,504) 

7 

(13,810)

12,891 

(3,016)

—

22,308 

21,800 

82,605  

73,610 

476  

1,269 

83,081  

74,879 

17.0 

10.0 

27.0 

16.9 

26.9 

16.2

13.4

29.6

15.9

29.1

2020

2019(a)

78,366  

63,890 

— 

1,594  

—  

2,645  

(31)

2,419 

1,761 

5,571 

82,605  

73,610 

21 Earnings per share

Earnings

Note

2020
£000

2019 
£000

Earnings attributable to equity holders of the Company 

14,060  

11,925 

Adjustments

Adjusting items (net of non-controlling interest effect) 

Tax charge/(relief) on adjustments (net of non-controlling interest effect) 

Adjusting item – tax credit(a)

Adjusted earnings attributable to equity holders of the Company 

Weighted average number of shares 

Basic weighted average number of shares outstanding 

Dilutive effect of employee share option plans  

Diluted weighted average ordinary shares(b)

Earnings per share (pence) 

Basic earnings per share

Adjustment

Basic adjusted earnings per share

Diluted earnings per share(b)

Diluted adjusted earnings per share(b)

Adjusted earnings per share is provided to reflect the underlying earnings performance of the Group.

In thousands of shares

Issued ordinary shares at 1 April 

Shares held by Employee Benefit Trust 

Shares relating to share options

Shares issued as part of the consideration for Impact 

Shares issued in respect of share placing 

Weighted average number of shares at 31 March  

(a) Please refer to note 11 for details of the adjusting tax credit associated with a US loss carry back claim.
(b) From 2020 onwards, the Group has adjusted its assumptions as to the shares that are to be included in the calculation of the weighted 

average number of shares for diluted EPS purposes. As such, the numbers detailed in respect of 2019 have been re-presented using the same 
methodology in order to provide appropriate comparatives. 

Diluted earnings per share
The diluted earnings per share is calculated taking into account LTIP awards whose specified conditions were satisfied at 
the end of the year of 476,000 (2019: 1.2 million) share options (including those under the Executive share options scheme). 
At 31 March 2020 the diluted number of shares was 83.1 million (2019: 74.9 million).

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

125

 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

22 Dividends paid and proposed
A final dividend for year ending 31 March 2019 of 6.00p (for year ending 31 March 2018: 4.00p) was paid on 16 September 2019. 
An interim dividend of 3.00p was paid on 17 January 2020 (2019: 2.50p). The Directors are recommending a final dividend of 
5.75p in respect of the year ended 31 March 2020 (2019: 6.00p). If approved it will be paid in November 2020 to shareholders on 
the register at the close of business on 2 October 2020.

Final equity dividend for prior year 

Interim equity dividend for current year 

Dividends paid in the year 

Proposed for approval at Annual General Meeting 

Final equity dividend for the current year

2020

2019

Pence 
per share 

6.00 

3.00 

Pence
per share 

4.00 

2.50 

£000 

4,732 

2,372 

7,104 

£000

2,597 

1,956 

4,553 

2020

2019

Pence 
per share 

5.75 

£000 

5,541 

Pence
per share 

6.00 

£000

4,702 

23 Employee benefits
Post employment benefits
The Group administers a defined benefit pension plan that was inherited through the acquisition of CSS Industries Inc. and 
covers certain employees of a UK subsidiary. The scheme closed to future accrual on 31 December 2012. This is a separate 
trustee administered fund holding the pension scheme assets to meet long term pension liabilities. The plan assets held 
in trust are governed by UK regulations and responsibility for governance of the plan – including investment decisions and 
contribution schedules – lies with the group of trustees. The assets of the scheme are invested in the SPI With-Profits Fund, 
which is provided by Phoenix Life Limited.

The last triennial valuation performed was in December 2017. A further actuarial valuation was carried out at 28 February 2020, 
just prior to the acquisition of the CSS business, by a qualified actuary, independent of the scheme’s sponsoring employer. No 
additional valuation was performed at the balance sheet date based on the assumed immaterial movement between acquisition 
and year end. 

The major assumptions used by the actuary are shown below.

Present values of defined benefit obligation, fair value of assets and defined benefit asset (liability)

Fair value plan of assets

Present value of defined benefit obligation 

Surplus (deficit) in plan

Net defined benefit asset (liability) to be recognised 

Reconciliation of opening and closing balances of the defined benefit obligation

Defined benefit obligation at start of year 

Liabilities acquired in a business combination 

Defined benefit obligation at end of year 

2020 
£000

2,442 

(1,960) 

482 

482

2020 
£000

—

(1,960)

(1,960)

126

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
  
Reconciliation of opening and closing balances of the fair value of plan assets

Fair value of plan assets at start of year 

Assets acquired in a business combination 

Fair value of plan assets at end of year 

2020 
£000

—

2,442 

2,442 

Given the timing between acquisition and financial year end, no amounts have been expensed against Group operating 
profit, nor has any finance expense been incurred. 

The principal assumptions used by the independent qualified actuaries for the purposes of IAS 19 are as follows:

Increase in salaries

Increase in pensions

at RPI capped at 5%

at CPI capped at 5%

at CPI capped at 2.5%

Discount rate

Inflation rate – RPI

Inflation rate – CPI

Due to the timescale covered, the assumptions may not be borne out in practice.

The life expectancy assumptions (in number of years) used to estimate defined benefit obligations at the year end are 
as follows:

Male retiring today at age 60

Female retiring today at age 60 

Male retiring in 20 years at age 60 

Female retiring in 20 years at age 60 

2020

—

—

3.50%

1.95%

1.95%

1.70%

2.80%

1.95%

2020

26.4 

28.5 

28.0 

30.1 

Long Term Incentive Plan
On 31 March 2014, the Group announced the introduction of a new Long Term Incentive Plan (‘LTIP’). Under the LTIP, options 
to subscribe for ordinary shares of a nominal value of 5p each (‘ordinary shares’) may be awarded annually to Executive 
Board Directors of the Company, Managing Directors and other selected senior management team members within the 
Group. Ordinary shares only vest to the degree that stretching performance conditions are met. The maximum dilution 
under the LTIP is 15% over a ten year period. The scheme rules, which have been agreed by the Remuneration Committee, 
include reasonable provisions in the event of change of control, suitable flexibility to modify performance targets in specified 
situations and also a mechanism for claw-back under certain circumstances. The Board retains the flexibility to buy ordinary 
shares through an Employee Benefit Trust to mitigate future dilution should it need to do so.

The performance period for each award under the LTIP is three years. The cost to employees of ordinary shares issued 
under the LTIP if the performance criteria are met is nil. In principle the number of ordinary shares to be granted to each 
employee under the LTIP will not be more than 325% in value of the relevant employee’s salary base. The maximum 
opportunity available is up to 175% for the CEO and for other Executive Directors up to 150% of base salary. For the 
2018-2021 scheme ‘Grant B’ and the 2019-2022 scheme (for Paul Fineman, Giles Willits, Lance Burn and two other members 
of the Executive Committee) there is an outperformance element of up to 50% of the initial grant.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

127

 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

23 Employee benefits continued
Vested LTIP schemes – outstanding options

2014-2017 LTIP scheme 

2015-2018 LTIP scheme 

2016-2019 LTIP scheme 

2017-2020 LTIP scheme(a) 

Number of
  ordinary shares 

 Exercise
price
pence

36,401 

408,236 

438,402 

476,449 

  1,359,488

nil 

nil 

nil 

nil 

Exercise dates

June 2017-August 2024

June 2018-January 2028

June 2019-January 2028

July 2020-August 2027

All performance criteria have been met for the above schemes. 

Outstanding at the beginning of the year 

Prior year adjustment(a) 

Options vesting during the year(b)

Exercised during the year 

Outstanding at the end of the year 

Exercisable at the end of the year 

2020

2019

Weighted  
average  
exercise price  

pence

Weighted

average  
exercise price 
pence

Number of 
options

Number of 
options

nil  1,575,385 

nil  2,306,034 

nil 

nil 

nil 

18,337 

476,449 

(710,683) 

nil  1,359,488 

nil  1,359,488 

—

nil 

nil 

—

723,632 

(1,454,281)

nil  1,575,385

nil  1,575,385 

(a) Relates to share options not included in the prior year balance.
(b) 76% of the initial award plus dividend shares will formally vest on 23 July 2020 following the Remuneration and Audit Committees’ approval of the 

results of the year ended 31 March 2020.

Scheme details for LTIPs in vesting periods during the year
During the financial year to 31 March 2020 there were three LTIP schemes still within their vesting periods (2019: three). 

The award and performance targets for these are in the tables below.

Awards

Fair value per share (£) 

Number of participants 

Initial award 

Dividend shares  

Lapses and forfeitures 

Potential to vest as at 31 March 2020 

Potential to vest as at 31 March 2019 

2017-2020

2018-2021

2019-2022

Grant A 

Grant B 

Grant A 

Grant B 

Grant A

3.71 

18 

4.04 

2 

5.55 

16 

5.56 

5 

6.02 

30 

354,638 

297,844 

151,859 

633,372 

758,782 

8,963 

8,686 

2,303 

11,841 

(122,199) 

(71,483) 

(29,649) 

— 

10,796 

(8,311)

241,402 

235,047 

124,513 

645,213 

761,267 

305,401 

304,897 

134,154 

636,080 

— 

The LTIP awards ‘Grant A’ were made in 2017, 2018 and 2019 respectively. The LTIP awards ‘Grant B’ were made in January 
2018 to Paul Fineman in respect of the 2015-2018 and 2016-2019 schemes and to Paul Fineman and Giles Willits in respect 
of the 2017-2020 scheme. There was also a ‘Grant B’ award in respect of the 2018-2021 scheme to Paul Fineman, Giles 
Willits, Lance Burn and two other members of the Executive Committee in November 2018.

The grant date fair value of the options granted in the year assuming they are to vest in full is £4.6 million (2019: £4.4 million). 
The exercise price is nil.

128

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
Performance targets
Awards are granted with threshold and stretch targets. 25% of the weighted awards vests if the relevant threshold target is 
achieved, with straight-line vesting of the balance up to 100% of the weighted award if the stretch target is achieved. 

The ‘Grant B’ of the 2018-2021 scheme and the 2019-2022 scheme (for the Executive Board) also includes a super stretch 
target which will vest in accordance with the following bands relating to CAGR(b) in EPS(a):

• more than 17% but not more than 20%: 10% x number of shares in respect of which the base award vests;
• more than 20% but not more than 22.5%: 22% x number of shares in respect of which the base award vests;
• more than 22.5% but not more than 25%: 35% x number of shares in respect of which the base award vests; and
• more than 25%: 50% x number of shares in respect of which the base award vests.

Weighting 

Threshold 

Stretch 

Super stretch

2017-2020 scheme 

EPS(a) 

2018-2021 scheme 

EPS(a) 

2019-2022 scheme 

EPS(a) 

(a) EPS before Board approved adjusting items.
(b) Compound annual growth rate.

100% 

CAGR(b) 10% 

CAGR(b) 17.5% 

—

100% 

CAGR(b) 10% 

CAGR(b) 17.0% 

CAGR(b) 25.0%

100% 

CAGR(b) 10% 

CAGR(b) 17.0% 

CAGR(b) 25.0%

In light of Covid-19, the Remuneration Committee is reviewing the schemes that have not yet vested with a view to amending 
the performance targets. At the reporting date, no decision on revised metrics had been made.

Share-based payments charges
The total expense recognised for the year arising from equity-settled share-based payments are as follows:

(Credit)/charge in relation to the 2016-2019 LTIP scheme 

(Credit)/charge in relation to the 2017-2020 LTIP scheme 

(Credit)/charge in relation to the 2018-2021 LTIP scheme 

(Credit)/charge in relation to the 2019-2022 LTIP scheme 

Equity-settled share-based payments (credit)/charge 

Social security charge on LTIP awards 

Total equity-settled share-based payments (credit)/charge 

2020
£000

— 

382  

(613)

—  

(231)

29  

(202)

2019 
£000

637

1,083 

613

—

2,333

672

3,005

Social security charges on share-based payments
Social security is accrued, where applicable, at a rate which management expects to be the prevailing rate when 
share-based incentives are exercised and is based on the latest market value of options expected to vest or having 
already vested.

The total social security accrual outstanding at the year end in respect of share-based payment transactions was £824,000 
(2019: £1.1 million). 

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

129

 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

24 Financial instruments
Derivative financial assets
a) Fair values of financial instruments
The carrying values for each class of financial assets and financial liabilities in the balance sheet, which are given below, are 
not considered to be materially different to their fair values.

As at 31 March 2020, the Group had derivative contracts, which were measured at Level 2 fair value subsequent to initial 
recognition, to the value of an asset of £332,000 (2019: £129,000) and a liability of £7,000 (2019: £2,000).

Derivative financial instruments
The fair value of forward exchange contracts is assessed using valuation models taking into account market inputs such as 
foreign exchange spot and forward rates, yield curves and forward interest rates.

Fair value hierarchy
Financial instruments which are recognised at fair value subsequent to initial recognition are grouped into Levels 1 to 3 
based on the degree to which the fair value is observable. The three levels are defined as follows:

• Level 1: quoted (unadjusted) prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities;
• Level 2: other techniques for which all inputs which have a significant effect on the recorded fair value are observable,

either directly or indirectly; and

• Level 3: techniques which use inputs which have a significant effect on the recorded fair value that are not based on

observable market data.

b) Credit risk
Financial risk management
Credit risk is the risk of financial loss to the Group if a customer or counterparty to a financial instrument fails to meet its 
contractual obligations and arises principally from the Group’s receivables from customers and investment securities.

The Group’s exposure to credit risk is managed by dealing only with banks and financial institutions with strong credit 
ratings. The Group’s financial credit risk is primarily attributable to its trade receivables.

The main customers of the Group are large and mid-sized retailers, other manufacturers and wholesalers of greetings 
products, service merchandisers and trading companies. The Group has established procedures to minimise the risk of 
default of trade receivables including detailed credit checks undertaken before new customers are accepted and rigorous 
credit control procedures after sale. These processes have proved effective in minimising the level of provisions for doubtful 
debts required.

The amounts presented in the balance sheet are net of allowances for doubtful receivables estimated by the Group’s 
management, based on prior experience and their assessment of the current economic environment. 

Exposure to credit risk
The carrying amount of financial assets represents the maximum credit exposure. Therefore, the maximum exposure to 
credit risk at the balance sheet date was £150.2 million (2019: £129.7 million after restatement) being the total of the carrying 
amount of financial assets, excluding equity investments above.

The maximum exposure to credit risk for trade receivables at the balance sheet date by geographic region was:

UK and Asia

USA (restated)

Europe

Australia

2020
£000

2019 
£000

9,246  

8,998 

60,631 

25,933 

5,106  

2,733  

5,303 

3,863 

77,716  

44,097 

130

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
Credit quality of financial assets and impairment losses
There was no change to the level of provision for doubtful debts upon the adoption of IFRS 9. 

The ageing of trade receivables at the balance sheet date was:

Not past due (restated) 

Past due 0-60 days 

61-90 days

More than 90 days

2020

2019

Expected  
loss rate 
 %

  Provisions for 
Gross  doubtful debts 
£000

£000 

8.0 

11.1 

33.6 

64.4 

14.0 

62,707 

17,988 

1,975 

7,687 

(5,028) 

(1,998) 

(664)

(4,951) 

90,357 

(12,641) 

Expected  
loss rate  

%

0.6 

5.4 

18.4

90.9

12.1 

Provisions for 
Gross  doubtful debts 
£000
£000 

35,985 

6,854 

1,601 

5,727 

50,167 

(200)

(369)

(295)

(5,206)

(6,070)

There were no unimpaired balances outstanding at 31 March 2020 (2019: £nil) where the Group had renegotiated the terms 
of the trade receivable.

Expected credit loss assessment
For the Group’s trade receivables, expected credit losses are measured using a provisioning matrix based on the reason 
the trade receivable is past due. The provision matrix rates are based on actual credit loss experience over the past three 
years and adjusted, when required, to take into account current macro-economic factors. The Group applies experienced 
credit judgement that is determined to be predictive of the risk of loss to assess the expected credit loss, taking into account 
external ratings, financial statements and other available information. The Group’s trade receivables are unlikely to extend 
past twelve months and, as such, for the purposes of expected credit loss modelling, the lifetime expected credit loss 
impairments recognised are the same as a twelve month expected credit loss. 

There have been no significant credit risk movements since initial recognition of impairments. 

The movement in the allowance for impairment in respect of trade receivables during the year was as follows:

Balance at 1 April

Charge for the year

Unused amounts reversed

Acquisition of businesses

Amounts written off

Effects of movement in foreign exchange 

Balance at 31 March 

2020
£000

6,070 

6,505  

(1,034)

1,757  

(953)

296  

2019 
£000

804

1,697 

(51)

3,724 

(407)

303

12,641  

6,070 

The allowance account for trade receivables is used to record provisions for doubtful debts unless the Group is satisfied that 
no recovery of the amount owing is possible; at that point the amounts considered irrecoverable are written off against the 
trade receivables directly.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

131

 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

24 Financial instruments continued
Derivative financial assets continued
c) Liquidity risk
Financial risk management
Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group, although solvent, will encounter difficulties in meeting obligations associated with the 
financial liabilities that are settled by delivering cash or another financial asset. The Group’s policy with regard to liquidity 
ensures adequate access to funds by maintaining an appropriate mix of short term and longer term facilities, which are 
reviewed on a regular basis. The maturity profile and details of debt outstanding at 31 March 2020 are set out in note 15.

The following are the contractual maturities of financial liabilities, including estimated interest payments:

31 March 2020

Non-derivative financial liabilities

Carrying 
amount 
£000

Contractual 
cash flows 
£000

One year 
or less 
£000

One to two 
years 
£000

Two to five 
years 
£000

More than 
five years 
£000

Note

Secured bank loans – Australian dollar(a)

796 

(821)

(460)

(361)

—

(22)

—

(2)

18 

10 

19 

19 

44,169 

(44,169) 

(38,699)

(5,446) 

76,946 

(88,341) 

(16,247)

(14,753) 

(32,298) 

(25,043)

90,820  

(90,820) 

(90,820)

7,537  

(7,537) 

(7,537)

—

—

7  

(3,629) 

(3,629)

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

220,275 

(235,317) 

(157,392) 

(20,560) 

(32,320) 

(25,045)

Carrying 
amount 
£000

Contractual 
cash flows 
£000

One year 
or less 
£000

One to two 
years 
£000

Two to five 
years 
£000

More than 
five years 
£000

Note

Secured bank loans – Australian dollar(a) 

2,405 

(2,532) 

(1,069) 

(1,023) 

18 

19 

19 

20,759 

(20,759) 

(18,942) 

(373)

57,336  

(57,336) 

(57,336)

1,227  

(1,227) 

(1,227)

—

—

(440)

(171)

—

—

—

(1,273)

—

—

—

2

(248)

(248)

—

—

81,729  

(82,102) 

(78,822) 

(1,396)

(611) 

(1,273)

Other financial liabilities(b)

Lease liabilities(b)

Trade payables(b) 

Other payables(b)

Derivative financial liabilities

Forward foreign exchange  
contracts carried at fair value  
through the hedging reserve(b)

(a) Nominal interest rate 4.49%.
(b) Measured at Level 2.

31 March 2019

Non-derivative financial liabilities

Other financial liabilities(b) (restated)   

Trade payables(b)

Other payables(b)

Derivative financial liabilities

Forward foreign exchange  
contracts carried at fair value  
through the hedging reserve(b)

(a) Nominal interest rate 4.49%.
(b) Measured at Level 2.

132

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
The following table shows the facilities for bank loans, overdrafts, asset-backed loans and revolving credit facilities:

31 March 2020 

31 March 2019

Carrying 
amount 
£000

Facility used 
contractual 
cash flows 
£000

Secured bank loans 

796 

(821)

Facility 
unused 
£000

—

Total 
facility 
£000

(821)

Carrying 
amount 
£000

2,405

Facility used
contractual 
cash flows 
£000

Facility 
unused 
£000

Total 
facility 
£000

(2,532) 

— 

(2,532)

Corporate revolving 
credit facilities 

Receivables financing 

Bank overdraft  

— 

—

— 

— 

—

— 

(78,246) 

(78,246) 

—

—

(3,581) 

(3,581) 

— 

—

— 

— 

— 

— 

(29,602) 

(29,602)

(15,967) 

(15,967)

(3,249) 

(3,249)

796 

(821)

(81,827)

(82,648) 

2,405 

(2,532) 

(48,818) 

(51,350)

The receivables financing facilities are dependent upon the levels of the relevant receivables. 

The major bank facilities vary in the year depending on forecast debt requirements. The maximum limit across all facilities 
with the major bank was £219.0 million (2019: £139.0 million). 

At 31 March 2020 the facility amounted to £78.2 million (2019: £45.6 million).

Additional facilities were available at other banks of £3.6 million (2019: £3.2 million).

On 5 June 2019 the Group entered into a new three year banking facility, see note 15 for more information.

d) Cash flow hedges
The following derivative financial instruments were designated as cash flow hedges:

Forward exchange contracts carrying amount

Derivative financial assets

Derivative financial liabilities

2020
£000

332

(7)

2019 
£000

129

(2)

The Group has forward currency hedging contracts outstanding at 31 March 2020 designated as hedges of expected 
future purchases in US dollars and Chinese renminbi and sales in euros for which the Group has firm commitments, as the 
derivatives are based on forecasts and an economic relationship exists at the time the derivative contracts are taken out. 

The terms of the forward currency hedging contracts have been negotiated to match the terms of the commitments. 
All contracts outstanding at the year end crystallise within twelve months of the balance sheet date at average prices of 1.11 
for US dollar contracts (2019: 1.16), 7.09 for Chinese renminbi contracts (2019: n/a) and 1.14 for euro contracts (2019: n/a). 
At the year end the Group held $9.6 million (2019: $6.7 million), RMB 31.9 million (2019: RMB nil) and €0.9 million (2019: €nil) 
in hedge relationships. 

When assessing the effectiveness of any derivative contracts, the Group assesses sources of ineffectiveness which include 
movements in volumes or timings of the hedged cash flows. 

The cash flow hedges of the expected future purchases in 2021 were assessed to be highly effective and as at 
31 March 2020 a net unrealised gain of £517,000 (2019: £377,000) with related deferred tax credit of £nil (2019: £nil) 
was included in other comprehensive income in respect of these hedging contracts. Amounts relating to ineffectiveness 
recorded in the income statement in the year was £nil (2019: £27,000 credit).

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

133

 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

24 Financial instruments continued
Derivative financial assets continued
e) Market risk
Financial risk management
Market risk is the risk that changes in market prices, such as foreign exchange rates, interest rates and equity prices, will 
affect the Group’s income or the value of its holdings of financial instruments.

The Group hedges a proportion, as deemed appropriate by management, of its sales and purchases of inventory 
denominated in foreign currency by entering into foreign exchange contracts. Such foreign exchange contracts typically 
have maturities of less than one year. 

The Group rarely hedges profit translation exposure, since such hedges provide only a temporary deferral of the effects of 
movement in foreign exchange rates. Similarly, the Group does not hedge its long term investments in overseas assets.

However, the Group holds loans that are denominated in the functional currency of certain overseas entities.

The Group’s exposure to foreign currency risk is as follows. This is based on the carrying amount for monetary financial 
instruments, except derivatives, when it is based on notional amounts.

31 March 2020

Long term assets

Cash and cash equivalents 

Trade receivables

Derivative financial assets 

Secured bank loans 

Bank overdrafts

Loan arrangement fees  

Trade payables

Other payables

Balance sheet exposure

31 March 2019

Cash and cash equivalents (restated) 

Trade receivables (restated) 

Other receivables 

Derivative financial assets 

Secured bank loans

Bank overdrafts (restated) 

Loan arrangement fees  

Trade payables

Other payables 

Balance sheet exposure 

Note

14 

13 

15 

15 

19 

19

Note

14 

13 

15

15 

19 

19 

Sterling 
£000

— 

7,988 

7,823 

198

—

— 

975

Euro 
£000

— 

2,682 

5,090 

—

—

US dollar 
£000

5,019 

50,238 

62,012 

—

—

(10,408) 

(14,559) 

—

—

Other 
£000

— 

6,190 

2,791 

134  

(796)

(37)

—

Total 
£000

5,019 

67,098 

77,716 

332

(796)

(25,004)

975

(8,858) 

(6,335) 

(73,382) 

(2,245) 

(90,820)

(754)

7,372 

(632) 

(5,991) 

(9,603) 

23,337 

(160)

5,877 

(7,537)

26,983

Sterling
£000

65,845 

7,731 

966 

110 

—

— 

31 

Euro 
£000

4,922 

5,403 

22 

— 

—

US dollar 
£000

9,719 

27,112 

1,651 

— 

— 

(9,539) 

(56,315) 

— 

— 

Other
£000

4,829 

3,851 

40 

19 

Total 
£000

85,315 

44,097 

2,679 

129 

(2,405) 

(2,405)

(3)

— 

(65,857)

31 

(10,494) 

(7,013) 

(30,378) 

(9,451) 

(57,336)

(541)

(409)

— 

(277)

63,648 

(6,614) 

(48,211) 

(3,397) 

(1,227)

5,426 

The following significant exchange rates applied during the year:

Euro

US dollar

Average rate 

Reporting date spot rate

2020

1.14 

1.27 

2019

1.13 

1.31 

2020

1.12 

1.24 

2019

1.16

1.30

134

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSSensitivity analysis
A 10% weakening of the following currencies against sterling at 31 March 2020 would have affected equity and profit or loss 
by the amounts shown below. This calculation assumes that the change occurred at the balance sheet date and had been 
applied to risk exposures existing at that date. 

This analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular other exchange rates and interest rates, remain constant. 
The analysis was performed on the same basis for 31 March 2019.

Euro

US dollar

Equity

Profit/(loss)

2020
£000

(873)

2,122  

2019
£000

601

4,775

2020
£000

22 

183 

2019 
£000

6

883

On the basis of the same assumptions, a 10% strengthening of the above currencies against sterling at 31 March 2020 would 
have affected equity and profit or loss by the following amounts:

Euro

US dollar

Equity

Profit/(loss)

2020
£000

1,067 

2019
£000

(735)

(2,593) 

(5,837) 

2020
£000

(27)

(223)

2019 
£000

(8)

(1,079)

Profile
At the balance sheet date the interest rate profile of the Group’s interest-bearing financial instruments was:

Variable rate instruments 

Financial assets (restated)

Financial liabilities (restated)

Loan arrangement fees

Net cash

Note

2020
£000

2019 
£000

67,098  

85,315 

(25,800) 

(68,262)

975 

31

14 

42,273  

17,084 

A change of 50 basis points (0.5%) in interest rates in respect of financial assets and liabilities at the balance sheet date 
would have affected equity and profit or loss by the amounts shown below. This calculation assumes that the change 
occurred at the balance sheet date and had been applied to risk exposures existing at that date. 

This analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular foreign currency rates, remain constant and considers the effect 
on financial instruments with variable interest rates and financial instruments at fair value through profit or loss. The analysis 
is performed on the same basis for 31 March 2019. 

Sensitivity analysis

Equity

Increase

Decrease

Profit or loss

Increase

Decrease

2020
£000

206

—

206

—

2019 
£000

85

—

85

—

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

135

 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

24 Financial instruments continued
Derivative financial assets continued
f) Capital management
The Board’s policy is to maintain a strong capital base so as to maintain investor, creditor and market confidence and to 
sustain future development of the business. The Group is dependent on the continuing support of its bankers for working 
capital facilities and so the Board’s major objective is to keep borrowings within these facilities.

The Board manages as capital its trading capital, which it defines as its net assets plus net debt. Net debt is calculated 
as total debt (bank overdrafts, loans and borrowings as shown in the balance sheet), less cash and cash equivalents. 
The banking facilities with our principal bank have covenants relating to interest cover, cash flow cover and leverage, and our 
articles currently permit borrowings (including letter of credit facilities) to a maximum of four times equity.

Net equity attributable to owners of the Parent Company 

Net cash

Trading capital

Equity

Note

2020
£000

2019 
£000

299,375 

171,506 

14 

(42,273) 

(17,084)

257,102  

154,422 

The main areas of capital management relate to the management of the components of working capital including monitoring 
inventory turn, age of inventory, age of trade receivables, balance sheet reforecasting, monthly profit and loss, weekly cash flow 
forecasts and daily cash balances. Major investment decisions are based on reviewing the expected future cash flows and all 
major capital expenditure requires sign off by the Chief Financial Officer and Chief Executive Officer or, above certain limits, by 
the Board. There were no major changes in the Group’s approach to capital management during the year. A particular focus of 
the Group is leverage, measured as the ratio of average monthly net debt to EBITDA before adjusting items.

25 Capital commitments
At 31 March 2020, the Group had outstanding authorised capital commitments to purchase plant and equipment for 
£1.9 million (2019: £2.7 million).

26 Related parties

Sale of goods: 

Hedlunds Pappers Industri AB

Festive Productions Ltd

Hedlund Import AB

S A Greetings (Pty) Ltd

Purchase of goods: 

Mattr Media Ltd

Receivables:

Hedlund Import AB

S A Greetings (Pty) Ltd

Payables:

Mattr Media Ltd

Balance at 31 March

2020
£000

209

7

2,225 

169

2,610

71

71

—

—

— 

25

25

2019 
£000

69

12

2,955 

126

3,162

56

56

29

31

60

—

—

136

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
Identity of related parties and trading
Hedlund Import AB and AB Alrick-Hedlund are under the ultimate control of the Hedlund family, who are a major shareholder 
in the Company. Anders Hedlund is a director of Hedlunds Pappers Industri AB which is under the ultimate control of the 
Hedlund family. Festive Productions Ltd is a subsidiary undertaking of Malios Holding AG, a company under the ultimate 
control of the Hedlund family.

John Charlton is Chairman of SA Greetings (Pty) Ltd (South African Greetings).

During the year the Company paid for marketing services to Mattr Media Ltd, a company controlled by Joshua Fineman, 
who is the son of the Group CEO. 

The above trading takes place in the ordinary course of business.

Other related party transactions
Directors of the Company and their immediate relatives have an interest in 27% (2019: 34%) of the voting shares of the 
Company. The shareholdings of Directors and changes during the year are shown in the Directors’ report on page 78.

Directors’ remuneration

Short term employee benefits

Post-employment benefits

Share-based payments (credit)/charge

2020
£000

1,407 

8

(17)

1,398 

2019 
£000

1,835

12

1,937

3,784

See the Directors’ remuneration report on pages 71 to 76 for more detail.

27 Subsidiary with significant non-controlling interest
The Company has two subsidiary companies which have a material non-controlling interest: IG Design Group Australia Pty 
Ltd (‘Australia’) and Anker Play Products LLC (‘APP’). Summary financial information in relation to Australia and APP is shown 
below.

Non-controlling interest – balance sheet as at 31 March 

Non-current assets 

Current assets

Current liabilities

Non-current liabilities 

Non-controlling interest – comprehensive  
income for the year ended 31 March 

Revenue

Profit after tax 

Total comprehensive income 

Australia
£000

8,540 

9,269 

(4,997) 

(5,325) 

2020

APP
£000

191 

2,514 

Total
£000

8,731 

11,783 

Australia
£000

4,582 

10,052 

2019

APP
£000

16 

3,219 

(2,752) 

(7,749) 

(6,755) 

(2,600) 

(62)

(5,387)

(143)

—

Australia
£000

2020

APP
£000

Total
£000

Australia
£000

2019

APP
£000

Total 
£000

4,598 

13,271 

(9,355)

(143)

Total 
£000

32,337 

14,979 

47,316 

39,067 

11,078 

50,145 

1,500 

1,615 

(731)

(731)

769

884

Total
£000

424 

2,434 

2,229 

Australia
£000

444 

531 

531 

APP
£000

(35)

2019

2,965 

2,760 

Total 
£000

409

Non-controlling interest – cash flow for the year ended 31 March 

Australia
£000

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents 

374 

2020

APP
£000

50 

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

137

 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

27 Subsidiary with significant non-controlling interest continued

Non-controlling interest

1 April

Share of profits for the year 

Other comprehensive income 

(Derecognition)/recognition of non-controlling interest 

Disposal of Urban Dollar 

Dividend paid to non-controlling interest 

IFRS 16 retained earnings adjustment 

Currency translation

31 March

Australia
£000

3,740 

750 

57 

— 

— 

— 

(440)

(363)

3,744 

2020

2019

APP
£000

311 

— 

— 

(325)

— 

— 

—

14

— 

Total
£000

4,051 

750 

57 

(325)

— 

—  

(440)

(349)

3,744 

Australia
£000

3,661 

1,326 

(10)

—  

(110)

(1,075) 

—

(52)

APP
£000

— 

— 

—

311

—

—  

—

—

Total 
£000

3,661 

1,326 

(10)

311 

(110)

(1,075)

— 

(52)

3,740 

311 

4,051 

28 Acquisitions and disposals of subsidiaries
Acquisitions in the year
On 3 March 2020, the Group acquired 100% of the equity of CSS Industries, Inc. (‘CSS’), a creative consumer products 
company, focused on the craft, gift and seasonal categories predominately within the US.

The acquisition, made through a wholly owned subsidiary of IG Design Group plc, IG Design Group Americas Inc., was 
satisfied by total consideration of £95.9 million ($122.8 million), all of which was paid in cash. 

CSS was a NYSE listed designer and manufacturer of craft, seasonal and gift products. CSS specialises in the creative 
development, manufacture and sale of products through a multi-channel distribution model to a broad base of mass, 
specialty and online retailers and distributors. Its core products within each category are as follows:

• Craft – sewing patterns, ribbons, trims, buttons, needle arts and kids’ crafts;
• Gift – products designed to celebrate certain life events or special occasions, with a focus on ribbons, bows, bags and

wrap, as well as stationery, baby gift items, and party and entertaining products; and

• Seasonal – holiday gift packaging items including ribbons, bows, bags, tags and gift card holders, in addition to specific

holiday-themed decorations and activities.

The Directors believe that the acquisition will: 

• broaden the Group’s product portfolio and provide its customers with a substantially enhanced “one-stop-shop” product

and service offering;

• allow Design Group entry into the craft market and accelerate online revenues;
• deliver substantial estimated annual synergies of £10.0 million by March 2023; and
• provide for tangible operating synergies through the combination of the Group’s US business with CSS, including

economies of scale, enhanced US manufacturing capacity and combined US distribution network.

In the period from acquisition to 31 March 2020, CSS contributed sales of £15.9 million to the consolidated Group revenue 
for the year ended 31 March 2020 and adjusted profit of £3.4 million. If the acquisition had occurred on 1 April 2019, Group 
revenue would have been £716.7 million and net adjusted profit before tax would have been £28.9 million. 

£3.6 million of transaction costs were recognised in the consolidated income statement in adjusting items.

138

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
Effect of acquisition of CSS

Property, plant and equipment

Right-of-use assets

Intangible assets

Inventories

Trade and other receivables

Doubtful debt provision

Cash

Trade and payables

Provisions

Income taxes

Deferred tax

Lease liabilities

Net identifiable assets and liabilities

Consideration paid in shares

Consideration paid in cash

Total consideration

Goodwill

Provisional  
fair values  
recognised  
on acquisition  

£000

31,695

31,758

4,656

44,242

51,013

(1,743)

8,233

(58,739)

(4,037)

(2,991)

6,873

(36,988)

73,972 

—

95,929

95,929

21,957 

The valuation techniques used for measuring the fair value of material assets acquired were as follows:

• property, plant and equipment has been valued using market comparison and cost techniques. The valuation model

considers market prices for similar items when they are available, and depreciated replacement costs when appropriate.
Depreciated replacement cost reflects adjustments for physical deterioration as well as functional and economic
obsolescence. The Directors consider that the property, plant and equipment has been fairly valued using the depreciated
replacement cost method although the assessment is provisional and will be finalised during the look back period; and
• intangible assets are made up of customer relationships which have been valued using a Multi-period Excess Earnings

Method (‘MEEM’) approach and brands valued using the relief-from royalty method; and the replacement cost approach
has been used to value the raw materials, intermediary inventory and finished goods purchased (adjusted for reserves) as
at the valuation date. WIP and finished goods manufactured are valued using the Net Realisable Value (‘NRV’) method.

The goodwill recognised above includes certain intangible assets that cannot be separately identified and measured due 
to their nature. This includes control over the acquired business, the skills and experience of the assembled workforce, 
the increase in scale, significant synergies and the future growth opportunities that the business provide to the Group’s 
operations. The goodwill is not deductible for tax purposes.

Contingent liabilities of £3.6 million were recognised as part of the business combination relating to reinstatement costs of 
leased buildings, potential change of control penalties, potential environmental claims and potential litigation. The liabilities 
have the potential to unwind over one to five years and contain estimates. 

Fair values of assets and liabilities, including property, plant and equipment, acquired for CSS are provisional and subject to 
change as the Group is still permitted to make fair value adjustments up until twelve months after the date of acquisition. 

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

139

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

28 Acquisitions and disposals of subsidiaries continued
Disposals in the current year
On 24 February 2020, the Group divested of its operations in Shaoxing to Chen Yue, a well-known supplier to the Group, 
and comprised a sale of 100% of the equity of the company, which was a direct subsidiary of IG Design Group Americas 
Inc. After the release of acquisition risks provisions in the opening balance sheet relating to commercial and tax issues, the 
disposal resulted in a gain before tax of £2.0 million, which has been recognised within adjusting items. Related transaction 
costs and tax costs of £487,000 were also recognised in the consolidated income statement in adjusting items.

The disposal proceeds, net liabilities disposed of and gains arising from the movement in foreign currency exchange from 
the divestment of the Shaoxing business were as follows:

Property, plant and equipment

Right-of-use assets

Inventories

Trade and other receivables

Corporation tax

Trade and other payables

Provisions

Lease liabilities

Gain on disposal calculated as: 

Disposal proceeds

Net liabilities disposed

Transaction costs

Tax on sale of business (including Chinese withholding tax) 

Reclassification of gains from movement in foreign currency exchange 

Disposal proceeds 

Satisfied by: 

Cash consideration

Deferred consideration

Net cash outflow from disposals of businesses 

£000

108

461

635

561

(2,570)

(444)

(158)

(502)

(1,909)

98

1,909

2,007

(193)

(294)

(34)

1,486

98

(98)

— 

Acquisitions in the prior year
Impact Innovations Inc.
On 31 August 2018, the Group acquired 100% of the equity of Impact Innovations Inc. (‘Impact’), a leading supplier of gift 
packaging and seasonal décor products in the US.

The provisional acquisition accounting as stated in the financial statements to 31 March 2019 has been reviewed and 
measurement period adjustments made to goodwill, intangibles and provisions. The fair values of the assets and liabilities 
acquired have been reconsidered as part of the hindsight period. The changes made were the creation of additional 
provisions of £1.3 million and reduction of certain intangible assets (trade name) from £1.9 million to £1.2 million.

In the period from acquisition to 31 March 2019, Impact contributed sales of £88.7 million to the consolidated Group 
revenue for the year ended 31 March 2019. If the acquisition had occurred on 1 April 2018, Group revenue would have been 
£489.8 million. Following the restructuring of the US business to combine manufacturing facilities into one operation, it is no 
longer possible to separately disclose the profit of the Impact business.

140

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
Adjustment to provisional accounting

Property, plant and equipment

Intangible assets

Inventories

Trade and other receivables

Cash

Trade and other payables

Provisions (including taxation)

Net identifiable assets and liabilities 

Consideration paid in shares

Consideration paid in cash

Total consideration

Goodwill

Adjustments 
Provisional 
fair values 
within the  
recognised  measurement  

Final 
fair values  
recognised  
period  on acquisition 
£000

£000 

on acquisition 
£000

9,313

19,000

26,295

31,966

1,208

(31,433) 

(2,197) 

54,152 

15,385

66,809

82,194

— 

(692) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(1,312) 

(2,004) 

— 

— 

— 

9,313

18,308

26,295

31,966

1,208

(31,433)

(3,509)

52,148

15,385

66,809

82,194

30,046

28,042 

2,004 

Fair value adjustments were made to trade names, customer relationships and inventory.

29 Non-adjusting post balance sheet events
There were no known material non-adjusting events which occurred between the end of the reporting period and prior to the 
authorisation of these financial statements on 27 July 2020.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

141

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

COMPANY BALANCE SHEET
AS AT 31 MARCH 2020

Fixed assets

Intangible assets

Tangible assets

Investments

Deferred tax

Total non-current assets 

Current assets

Debtors – due within one year 

Debtors – due after more than one year 

Cash at bank and in hand 

Creditors: amounts falling due within one year

Net current assets 

Total assets less current liabilities

Provisions for liabilities – other provisions

Net assets 

Capital and reserves   

Called up share capital

Share premium account

Capital redemption reserve

Merger reserve

Hedging reserve

Profit and loss account

Total equity

Notes

2

3

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

2020
£000

67 

3 

Restated(a) 

2019 
£000

—

2

213,107  

44,630 

2,113 

1,998

215,290  

46,630 

875  

27,374  

18,588  

46,837  

(23,200) 

23,637  

2,114 

26,849 

58,093 

87,056 

(5,400)

81,656 

238,927  

128,286 

10

(58)

(115)

238,869  

128,171 

11 

4,818  

3,918 

172,383  

56,323 

1,340  

1,340 

32,399  

32,399 

198 

110

27,731  

34,081 

238,869  

128,171 

(a) Details of the restatement can be found in note 1.

IG Design Group plc is registered in England and Wales, number 1401155. 

The Company made a profit in the year of £889,000 (2019: £1.2 million).

The financial statements on pages 142 to 156 were approved by the Board of Directors on 27 July 2020 and were signed on 
its behalf by:

Paul Fineman 
Director

Giles Willits
Director

142

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
COMPANY STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

At 1 April 2018 

Profit for the year

Other comprehensive income

Total comprehensive income

Transactions with owners in their 
capacity as owners

Equity-settled share-based 
payments (note 12)

Tax on equity-settled share-based 
payments (note 5)

Share options charge relating  
to subsidiary employees (note 4)

Shares issued (restated)(a) (note 11)

Options exercised (note 11) 

Equity dividend paid (note 17)

Share 
capital
£000

3,194 

Share 
premium 
account
£000

8,475 

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

641 

83 

—

47,830

18 

—

Capital
redemption 
reserve
£000

Merger 
reserve
£000

Cash flow
hedging 
reserve 
£000

Profit and 
loss account
£000

Total 
equity 
£000

1,340 

17,164 

—

—

—

—

—

—

— 

— 

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

15,235

— 

—

(91)

— 

201

201 

34,756

64,838

1,160 

—

1,160 

1,160

201

1,361

— 

—

—

—

— 

— 

1,478 

1,478

457

855

— 

(72)

457

855

63,706

29

(4,553)

(4,553)

At 31 March 2019 (restated) 

3,918 

56,323 

1,340 

32,399 

110 

34,081 

128,171 

Profit for the year 

Other comprehensive income 

Total comprehensive income 

Transactions with owners in their 
capacity as owners

Equity-settled share-based 
payment (note 12) 

Tax on equity-settled share-based 
payments (note 5) 

Share options charge relating  
to subsidiary employees (note 4) 

Shares issued (note 11)  

Options exercised (note 11) 

Equity dividend paid (note 17) 

— 

— 

—

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

—

— 

— 

— 

864 

116,060 

36 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

—

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

—

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

88 

88 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

889 

— 

889

(42)

132 

889 

88 

977

(42)

132 

(189)

(189)

—  

116,924

(36)

—

(7,104) 

(7,104)

At 31 March 2020 

4,818 

172,383 

1,340 

32,399 

198 

27,731 

238,869 

(a) Details of the restatement can be found in note 1.

Within the profit and loss account is a cumulative amount of £2.6 million (2019: £2.8 million) which is unrealised in respect 
of share options granted to subsidiary employees. See the consolidated statement of changes in equity for descriptions of 
reserve. 

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

143

 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

1 Accounting policies – 
Company
Basis of preparation
IG Design Group plc (the ‘Company’) 
is a company limited by shares and 
incorporated and domiciled in England 
and Wales, UK.

The Company financial statements 
present the information about the 
Company as a separate entity and not 
about the Group.

These financial statements have been 
prepared in compliance with United 
Kingdom Accounting Standards, 
including Financial Reporting Standard 
102, ‘The Financial Reporting Standard 
applicable in the United Kingdom and 
the Republic of Ireland’ (‘FRS 102’) 
and the Companies Act 2006. The 
presentation and functional currency of 
these financial statements is sterling. 
All amounts in the financial statements 
have been rounded to the nearest 
£1,000.

The accounting policies set out 
below have, unless otherwise stated, 
been applied consistently to all 
periods presented in these financial 
statements. 

Judgements made by the Directors 
in the application of these accounting 
policies that have significant effect 
on the financial statements and 
estimates with a significant risk of 
material adjustment in the next year are 
discussed in note 16.

Under Section 408 of the Companies 
Act 2006 the Company is exempt from 
the requirement to present its own 
profit and loss account on the grounds 
that a parent undertaking includes 
the Company in its own published 
consolidated financial statements.

The Company has taken advantage 
of the following exemptions in its 
individual financial statements:

•  from preparing a statement of 
cash flows, on the basis that 
it is a qualifying entity and the 
consolidated statement of cash 
flows, included in these financial 
statements, includes the Company’s 
cash flows.

Measurement convention
The financial statements are prepared 
on the historical cost basis except 
for the recognition of certain financial 
assets and liabilities measured at 
fair value.

Going concern
See note 1 to the Group accounting 
policies on page 96. Based on the 
financial performance of the Group, 
the Directors have a reasonable 
expectation that the Company has 
adequate resources to continue its 
operational existence for at least 
twelve months from the date of signing 
these financial statements. For this 
reason they continue to adopt the 
going concern basis of accounting 
in preparing the annual financial 
statements.

Foreign currency transactions
Transactions in foreign currencies are 
recorded at the rate of exchange at 
the date of the transaction. Monetary 
assets and liabilities denominated 
in foreign currencies at the balance 
sheet date are translated into sterling 
at the exchange rate prevailing at that 
date and recognised in the income 
statement unless hedge accounting 
criteria apply (see policy for financial 
instruments).

Basic financial instruments
Trade and other debtors
Trade and other debtors are recognised 
initially at transaction price less 
attributable transaction costs. Trade 
and other debtors are subsequently 
reviewed for recoverability and 
impairment with any losses taken 
to profit and loss immediately. 
If the arrangement constitutes a 
financing transaction, for example if 
payment is deferred beyond normal 
business terms, then it is measured 
at the present value of future 
payments discounted at a market 
rate of instrument for a similar debt 
instrument.

Trade and other payables
Trade and other payables are stated at 
their nominal value which is considered 
to be their fair value. Subsequent to 
initial recognition they are measured 
at amortised cost using the effective 
interest method.

Interest-bearing borrowings 
classified as basic financial 
instruments
Interest-bearing borrowings are 
recognised initially at the present 
value of future payments discounted 
at a market rate of interest, less direct 
arrangement costs. Subsequent to 
initial recognition, interest-bearing 
borrowings are stated at amortised 
cost using the effective interest 
method, less any impairment losses.

Investments in subsidiaries
Investments in subsidiaries are 
carried at cost less any provision for 
impairment.

Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise 
cash balances. Bank overdrafts that 
are repayable on demand and form 
an integral part of the Company’s 
cash management are included 
as a component of cash and cash 
equivalents in the cash flow statement.

144

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSOther financial instruments
Financial instruments not 
considered to be basic financial 
instruments (other financial 
instruments)
Other financial instruments not 
meeting the definition of basic financial 
instruments are recognised initially 
at fair value. Subsequent to initial 
recognition other financial instruments 
are measured at fair value with 
changes recognised in profit or loss 
except that hedging instruments in a 
designated hedging relationship shall 
be recognised as set out below.

Derivative financial  
instruments and hedging
Derivative financial instruments are 
recognised at fair value. The gain or 
loss on remeasurement of fair value 
is recognised immediately in profit or 
loss, except where it qualifies for hedge 
accounting.

Cash flow hedges 
Where a derivative financial instrument 
is designated as a hedge of the 
variability in cash flows of a recognised 
asset or liability, or a highly probable 
forecast transaction, the effective part 
of any gain or loss on the derivative 
financial instrument is recognised 
directly in other comprehensive income. 
Any ineffective portion of the hedge is 
recognised immediately in profit or loss.

When a hedging instrument expires or 
is sold, terminated or exercised, or the 
Company discontinues designation of 
the hedge relationship but the hedged 
forecast transaction is still expected 
to occur, the cumulative gain or loss 
at that point remains in equity and is 
recognised in accordance with the 
above policy when the transaction 
occurs. 

If the hedged transaction is no longer 
expected to take place, the cumulative 
unrealised gain or loss recognised 
in equity is recognised in the income 
statement immediately. 

Intangible fixed assets
Intangible assets are stated at cost 
less accumulated amortisation and 
accumulated impairment losses. 
Amortisation is calculated, using the 
straight-line method, to allocate the 
depreciable amount of the assets 
to their residual values over their 
estimated useful lives, as follows:

•  Software 

3-5 years

Tangible fixed assets
Tangible fixed assets are stated at cost 
less accumulated depreciation and 
accumulated impairment losses. 

Depreciation is calculated, using the 
straight-line method, to allocate the 
depreciable amount to their residual 
values over their estimated useful lives, 
as follows:

•  Fixtures and fittings 

3-5 years

Provisions
A provision is recognised in the 
balance sheet when the Company 
has a present legal or constructive 
obligation as a result of a past event, 
that can be reliably measured and it is 
probable that an outflow of economic 
benefits will be required to settle the 
obligation. Provisions are recognised 
at the best estimate of the amount 
required to settle the obligation at the 
reporting date.

Where the Company enters into 
financial guarantee contracts to 
guarantee the indebtedness of other 
companies within the Group, the 
Company treats the guarantee contract 
as a contingent liability until such 
time as it becomes probable that the 
Company will be required to make a 
payment under the guarantee.

Leases
Where the Company enters into a 
lease which does not entail taking 
substantially all the risks and rewards 
of ownership of an asset, the lease is 
accounted for as an ‘operating lease’ 
and the rentals payable are charged 
to the profit and loss account on 
a straight-line basis over the life of 
the lease.

Share-based payments
The cost of equity-settled transactions 
with employees is measured by 
reference to the fair value of the options 
at the date on which they are granted. 
The fair value is determined by using 
an appropriate pricing model. The fair 
value cost is then recognised over the 
vesting period, ending on the date on 
which the relevant employees become 
fully entitled to the award. The quantum 
of awards expected to vest and the 
relevant cost charged is reviewed 
annually such that at each balance 
sheet date the cumulative expense 
is the relevant share of the expected 
total cost, pro-rated across the vesting 
period. 

No expense is recognised for awards 
that are not expected to ultimately 
vest, for example due to an employee 
leaving or business performance 
targets not being met. The annual 
expense for equity settled transactions 
is recognised in the income statement 
with a corresponding entry in equity.

Employer’s social security charges 
are accrued, where applicable, at a 
rate which management expects to be 
the prevailing rate when share-based 
incentives are exercised and is based 
on the latest market value of options 
expected to vest or having already 
vested.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

145

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

1 Accounting policies – 
Company continued
Share-based payments continued
Where the Company grants options 
over its own shares to the employees 
of its subsidiaries, it recognises an 
increase in the cost of investment 
in its subsidiaries equivalent to the 
equity-settled share-based payment 
charge recognised in its subsidiaries’ 
financial statements with the 
corresponding credit being recognised 
directly in equity. Amounts recharged 
to the subsidiary are recognised as a 
reduction in the cost of investment in 
subsidiary. If the amount recharged 
exceeds the increase in the cost of 
investment, the excess is recognised 
as a dividend to the extent that it 
reflects post-acquisition profits of the 
subsidiary. 

Own shares held by Employee 
Benefit Trust 
Transactions of the Group-sponsored 
‘International Greetings Employee 
Benefit Trust’ are included in the Group 
financial statements. In particular, the 
trust’s purchases and sales of shares in 
the Company are debited and credited 
directly to equity.

Dividends on shares presented 
within shareholders’ funds
Dividends unpaid at the balance 
sheet date are only recognised as a 
liability at that date to the extent that 
they are appropriately authorised and 
are no longer at the discretion of the 
Company. Unpaid dividends that do 
not meet these criteria are disclosed in 
the notes to the financial statements.

Employee benefits
Pensions
The Company operates a defined 
contribution personal pension scheme. 
The assets of this scheme are held 
separately from those of the Company 
in an independently administered 
fund. The pension charge represents 
contributions payable by the Company 
to the fund.

Restatement/reclassifications
In the preparation of these financial 
statements, comparative amounts have 
been restated to reflect the following: 

•  the shares issued in the year ended 
31 March 2019 as consideration for 
the acquisition of Impact qualified 
for merger relief in accordance with 
the Companies Act 2006 (Section 
612). Accordingly, for the year ended 
31 March 2019, the Company has 
restated £15.2 million from the share 
premium reserve to the merger 
reserve. This has no overall impact 
on the total equity and reserves for 
the Company.

There have also been some 
reclassifications between balance 
sheet categories:

•  the deferred tax asset has been 
moved from Debtors – due after 
more than one year to a separate 
line on the face of the balance sheet;
•  derivative financial assets previously 
shown on the face of the balance 
sheet are now included in Debtors – 
due within one year;
loan arrangement fees previously 
shown as debit balances in 
Creditors have been reclassified 
into Debtors.

• 

Taxation
Tax on the profit or loss for the year 
comprises current and deferred tax. 
Tax is recognised in the profit and loss 
account except to the extent that it 
relates to items recognised directly in 
equity or other comprehensive income, 
in which case it is recognised directly 
in equity or other comprehensive 
income accordingly. 

Current tax is the expected tax payable 
or receivable on the taxable income 
or loss for the year, using tax rates 
enacted or substantively enacted 
at the balance sheet date, and any 
adjustment to tax payable in respect of 
previous years.

Deferred tax is provided on timing 
differences which arise from the 
inclusion of income and expenses 
in tax assessments in periods 
different from those in which they are 
recognised in the financial statements. 
Deferred tax is not recognised on 
permanent differences arising because 
certain types of income or expense 
are non-taxable or are disallowable for 
tax or because certain tax charges or 
allowances are greater or smaller than 
the corresponding income or expense. 

Deferred tax is provided in respect 
of the additional tax that will be paid 
or avoided on differences between 
the amount at which an asset (other 
than goodwill) or liability is recognised 
in a business combination and the 
corresponding amount that can be 
deducted or assessed for tax. Goodwill 
is adjusted by the amount of such 
deferred tax.

Deferred tax is measured at the tax rate 
that is expected to apply to the reversal 
of the related difference, using tax 
rates enacted or substantively enacted 
at the balance sheet date. Deferred tax 
balances are not discounted.

Unrelieved tax losses and other 
deferred tax assets are recognised 
only to the extent that is it probable 
that they will be recovered against the 
reversal of deferred tax liabilities or 
other future taxable profits. 

146

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS2 Intangible assets

Cost 

Balance at 1 April 2019  

Additions 

Balance at 31 March 2020  

Depreciation and impairment 

Balance at 1 April 2019  

Amortisation charge for the year 

Balance at 31 March 2020 

Net book value 

At 31 March 2020 

At 31 March 2019 

3 Tangible assets

Cost 

Balance at 1 April 2019  

Additions 

Balance at 31 March 2020 

Depreciation and impairment 

Balance at 1 April 2019  

Depreciation charge for the year 

Balance at 31 March 2020 

Net book value 

At 31 March 2020 

At 31 March 2019 

4 Investments

Cost 

At 1 April 2018 

Additions – share option charge relating to subsidiary employees 

Additions – investment in subsidiary  

Effects of movement in foreign exchange 

At 31 March 2019 

Additions – share option charge relating to subsidiary employees 

Additions – investment in subsidiary  

Effects of movement in foreign exchange 

At 31 March 2020 

Provisions 

At 31 March 2019 and 2020 

Net book value 

At 31 March 2020 

At 31 March 2019 

Software 
£000

86 

67 

153 

(86)

— 

(86)

67 

— 

Fixtures and fittings 
£000

178 

3 

181 

(176)

(2)

(178)

3 

2 

Total 
£000

  Shares in Group  Loans to Group 
undertakings 
£000 

undertakings 
£000 

25,204 

5,428 

30,632

855 

15,386 

— 

— 

— 

417 

855

15,386

417

41,445 

5,845 

47,290

(189)  

168,383  

— 

—  

—  

283  

(189) 

168,383 

283 

209,639 

6,128  

215,767 

(2,660) 

—  

(2,660)

206,979  

6,128  

213,107 

38,785  

5,845  

44,630 

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

147

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

4 Investments continued
The Company has the following investments in subsidiaries:

Country of 
incorporation 

Percentage 
of ordinary 
shares held 
2020 

Percentage  
of ordinary  
shares held 
2019

Trading companies 

Anchor International BV
Registered office: Voltastraat 12, 3281 NG Numansdorp, The Netherlands 

Anker Play Products, LLC
Registered office: 5555 Glenridge Connector, Suite 300, Atlanta, GA 30342, USA 

Netherlands 

100(a) 

100(a)

USA 

50(a) 

50(a)

Berwick Management LLC
Registered office: Bomboy Lane & Ninth Street, Berwick, PA 18603, USA 

Berwick Offray Hong Kong Limited
Registered office: 31/F., 148 Electric Road, North Point, Hong Kong 

Berwick Offray LLC
Registered office: 2015 West Front Street, Berwick, Pennsylvania 18603, USA 

BOC Distribution Inc
Registered office: Corporation Trust Center, 1209 Orange Street, Wilmington,  
Delaware 19801, USA 

C.R. Gibson, LLC
Registered office: Corporation Trust Center, 1209 Orange Street,  
Wilmington, Delaware 19801, USA 

British Trimmings Limited
Registered office: 1 Coronation Point, Coronation Street,  
South Reddish, Stockport, Cheshire, SK5 7PL, UK 

C.R. Gibson Pacific Rim Limited
Registered office: 31/F., 148 Electric Road, North Point, Hong Kong 

CRG Distribution, Inc
Registered office: Corporation Trust Center, 1209 Orange Street,  
Wilmington, Delaware 19801, USA 

Greetings Ningbo Business Consulting Limited
Registered office: 13-8, Building 003, No 3, 5 and 6 of Century  
Oriental Business Plaza, Yinzhou, Ningbo, China 

CSS Industries, Inc
Registered office: Corporation Trust Center, 1209 Orange Street,  
Wilmington, Delaware 19801, USA 

CSS Pacific Rim Limited
Registered office: 31/F., 148 Electric Road, North Point, Hong Kong 

IG Design Group Americas, Inc
Registered office: 5555 Glenridge Connector, Suite 300, Atlanta, GA 30342, USA 

IG Design Group Australia Pty Limited
Registered office: 121 Rayhur Street, Clayton, South Victoria 3169, Australia 

IG Design Group BV
Registered office: Industrieweg 62, 7903 AK Hoogeveen, The Netherlands 

IG Design Group UK Limited
Registered office: No 7 Water End Barns, Water End, Eversholt MK17 9EA, UK 

IG Design Group S.p.z.o.o
Registered office: Jędrzychowice 116A, 59-900 Zgorzelec, Poland 

India Trimmings Private Limited
Registered office: Tamil Nadu, Coimbatore, India 

International Greetings Asia Limited
Registered office: 21F, 69 Jervois Street, Sheung Wan, Hong Kong 

USA 

100(a) 

Hong Kong 

100(a) 

USA 

100(a) 

USA 

100(a) 

USA 

100(a) 

Great Britain 

100(a) 

Hong Kong 

100(a) 

USA 

100(a) 

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

China 

100(a) 

100(a)

USA 

100(a) 

Hong Kong 

100(a) 

USA 

100 

Australia 

50 

—

—

100

50

Netherlands 

100(a) 

100(a)

Great Britain 

100(b) 

100(b)

Poland 

100(a) 

100(a)

India 

100(a) 

Hong Kong 

100 

—

100

148

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Trading companies 

Impact Innovations, Inc
Registered office: 233 SE 1st Avenue, Clara City, Minnesota 5622, USA 

Impact Innovations Asia Limited
Registered office: Flat 11A, Eldex Industrial Building, 21 Ma Tam Wai Road,  
To Kwa Wan Kowloon, Hong Kong 

Lion Ribbon Company, LLC
Registered office: Corporation Trust Center, 1209 Orange Street,  
Wilmington, Delaware 19801, USA 

McCall Distribution, Inc
Registered office: Corporation Trust Center, 1209 Orange Street, 
Wilmington, Delaware 19801, USA 

McCall Pattern Company Limited
Registered office: 3rd Floor, Condor House, 5-10 St. Paul’s Churchyard,  
London, EC4M 8AL, UK 

Paper Magic Group, Inc
Registered office: 54 Glenmaura National Blvd., Suite 200, Moosic,  
Pennsylvania 18507, USA 

Paper Magic Distribution, Inc
Registered office: Corporation Trust Center, 1209 Orange Street,  
Wilmington, Delaware 19801, USA 

Paper Magic Group (Hong Kong) Limited
Registered office: 31/F., 148 Electric Road, North Point, Hong Kong 

Simplicity Creative Corp
Registered office: Corporation Trust Center, 1209 Orange Street,  
Wilmington, Delaware 19801, USA 

Simplicity Limited
Registered office: PO Box 367, Coronation Street, Stockport,  
Cheshire, SK5 7WZ, UK 

Simplicity Pty Limited
Registered office: Derham Houston Lawyers, Suite 12 Level 12,  
37 Bligh Street, Sydney NSW 2000, Australia 

The Huizhou Gift International Greetings Company Limited
Registered office: Fuda industrial Zone, Futian Town, Bolao,  
Huizho City, Guangdong, China 

The Lang Companies, Inc
Registered office: 5555 Glenridge Connector, Suite 300, Atlanta, GA 30342, USA 

The McCall Pattern Company Inc
Registered office: Corporation Trust Center, 1209 Orange Street,  
Wilmington, Delaware 19801, USA 

Wrights Commercial (Shanghai) Co Limited
Registered office: Unit E, 12th Floor, Building 1 N, 107, South Zhongshan Er Road,  
Xuhui District, Shanghai, China 

Non-trading and dormant companies 

Anker International plc
Registered office: No 7 Water End Barns, Water End, Eversholt MK17 9EA, UK 

Belgrave Graphics Limited
Registered office: No 7 Water End Barns, Water End, Eversholt MK17 9EA, UK 

Country of 
incorporation 

Percentage 
of ordinary 
shares held 
2020 

Percentage  
of ordinary  
shares held 
2019

USA 

100(a) 

100(a)

Hong Kong 

100(a) 

100(a)

USA 

100(a) 

USA 

100(a) 

Great Britain 

100(a) 

USA 

100(a) 

USA 

100(a) 

Hong Kong 

100(a) 

USA 

100(a) 

Great Britain 

100(a) 

Australia 

100(a) 

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

China 

100(a) 

100(a)

USA 

100(a) 

100(a)

USA 

100(a) 

China 

100(a) 

—

—

Great Britain 

100(a) 

100(a)

Great Britain 

100 

100

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

149

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

4 Investments continued

Country of 
incorporation 

Percentage 
of ordinary 
shares held 
2020 

Percentage  
of ordinary  
shares held 
2019

Non-trading and dormant companies 

Britesparks Limited
Registered office: No 7 Water End Barns, Water End, Eversholt MK17 9EA, UK 

Great Britain 

100 

100

British Trimmings (1997) Limited
Registered office: 1 Coronation Point, Coronation Street, South Reddish,  
Stockport, Cheshire, SK5 7PL, UK 

British Trimmings (Leek) Limited
Registered office: 1 Coronation Point, Coronation Street, South Reddish,  
Stockport, Cheshire, SK5 7PL, UK 

British Trimmings (Reddish) Limited
Registered office: 1 Coronation Point, Coronation Street, South Reddish,  
Stockport, Cheshire, SK5 7PL, UK 

Concorde Industries Limited
Registered office: No 7 Water End Barns, Water End, Eversholt MK17 9EA, UK 

Copywrite Designs Limited
Registered office: No 7 Water End Barns, Water End, Eversholt MK17 9EA, UK 

Credit Collection Consultants Limited
Registered office: No 7 Water End Barns, Water End, Eversholt MK17 9EA, UK 

Dominion Simplicity Patterns Limited
5240 Finch Avenue East, Scarborough, Ontario M1S5A2, Canada 

Hoopack Hoogeveen BV
Registered office: Industrieweg 62, 7903 AK Hoogeveen, The Netherlands 

Howard Industries Limited
Registered office: No 7 Water End Barns, Water End, Eversholt MK17 9EA, UK 

IG Design Group (Lang), Inc
Registered office: 5555 Glenridge Connector, Suite 300, Atlanta, GA 30342, USA 

IG Design Group Europe BV
Registered office: Industrieweg 62, 7903 AK Hoogeveen, The Netherlands 

IG Employee Share Trustee Limited
Registered office: No 7 Water End Barns, Water End, Eversholt MK17 9EA, UK 

Impact Paper Products, LLC
Registered office: 233 SE 1st Avenue, Clara City, Minnesota 5622, USA 

Impact Paper Hong Kong Limited
Registered office: Flat 11A, Eldex Industrial Building, 21 Ma Tam Wai Road,  
To Kwa Wan Kowloon, Hong Kong 

Great Britain 

100(a) 

Great Britain 

100(a) 

Great Britain 

100(a) 

Great Britain 

99(a) 

Great Britain 

100 

Great Britain 

50(a) 

Canada 

100(a) 

—

—

—

99(a)

100

50(a)

—

Netherlands 

100(a) 

100(a)

Great Britain 

100(a) 

100(a)

USA 

100(a) 

100(a)

Netherlands 

100 

100

Great Britain 

100(b) 

100(b)

USA 

100(a) 

100(a)

Hong Kong 

100(a) 

100(a)

LR Texas Corp
Registered office: 350 North St. Paul Street, Suite 2900, Dallas, Texas 75201, USA 

USA 

100(a) 

McCall Pattern Service NZ Limited
Registered office: Simpson Grierson, 88 Shortland Street, Auckland Central,  
Auckland, 1010, New Zealand 

McCall Pattern Service Pty Limited
Registered office: Derham Houston Lawyers, Suite 12 Level 12, 37 Bligh Street,  
Sydney NSW 2000, Australia 

Paper Magic de Mexico, SA de CV
No registered address 

New Zealand 

100(a) 

Australia 

100(a) 

Mexico 

100(a) 

—

—

—

—

Polaris Plastics Limited
Registered office: No 7 Water End Barns, Water End, Eversholt MK17 9EA, UK 

Great Britain 

100(a) 

100(a)

150

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Non-trading and dormant companies  

Philadelphia Industries, Inc
Registered office: 1105 North Market Street, Wilmington, Delaware 19801, USA 

School Supplyline Limited
Registered office: No 7 Water End Barns, Water End, Eversholt MK17 9EA, UK 

Scoop Designs Limited
Registered office: No 7 Water End Barns, Water End, Eversholt MK17 9EA, UK 

Simplicity Creative Group Limited
Registered office: 1 Coronation Point, Coronation Street, South Reddish,  
Stockport, Cheshire, SK5 7PL, UK 

Tom Smith Christmas Crackers Limited
Registered office: No 7 Water End Barns, Water End, Eversholt MK17 9EA, UK 

Tom Smith Crackers Limited
Registered office: No 7 Water End Barns, Water End, Eversholt MK17 9EA, UK 

Tom Smith Group Limited
Registered office: No 7 Water End Barns, Water End, Eversholt MK17 9EA, UK 

Tom Smith Limited
Registered office: No 7 Water End Barns, Water End, Eversholt MK17 9EA, UK 

Tom Smith Online Limited
Registered office: No 7 Water End Barns, Water End, Eversholt MK17 9EA, UK 

Variety Accessories, LLC
Registered office: 233 SE 1st Avenue, Clara City, Minnesota 5622, USA 

Weltec BV
Registered office: Industrieweg 62, 7903 AK Hoogeveen, The Netherlands 

Wendy A. Cushing Limited
Registered office: 1 Coronation Point, Coronation Street, South Reddish,  
Stockport, Cheshire, SK5 7PL, UK 

Wendy Cushing Trimmings Limited
Registered office: 1 Coronation Point, Coronation Street, South Reddish,  
Stockport, Cheshire, SK5 7PL, UK 

W.J.S. Furniture, Inc
Registered office: Corporation Trust Center, 1209 Orange Street,  
Wilmington, Delaware 19801, USA 

(a)  Indirect holding.
(b)  50% direct/50% indirect holding.

Country of 
incorporation 

Percentage 
of ordinary 
shares held 
2020 

Percentage  
of ordinary  
shares held 
2019

USA 

100(a) 

—

Great Britain 

100(a) 

100(a)

Great Britain 

100(a) 

100(a)

Great Britain 

100(a) 

—

Great Britain 

100(a) 

100(a)

Great Britain 

100 

100

Great Britain 

100(b) 

100(b)

Great Britain 

100 

100

Great Britain 

100(a) 

100(a)

USA 

100(a) 

100(a)

Netherlands 

100(a) 

100(a)

Great Britain 

100(a) 

Great Britain 

100(a) 

USA 

100(a) 

—

—

—

Class of shares held are ordinary shares for companies incorporated in Great Britain or the equivalent for the overseas 
subsidiaries.

Concorde Industries Ltd and Credit Collection Consultants Ltd are dormant companies that have never traded and both 
have net assets of £2.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

151

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

5 Deferred tax asset

Accelerated capital allowances 

Tax loss carried forward 

Other timing differences 

2020 
£000 

72  

1,168  

873  

2,113  

2019 
£000

81

760

1,157

1,998

Deferred tax is presented net on the balance sheet in so far as a right of offset exists. The net deferred tax asset is 
£2.1 million (2019: £2.0 million). Deferred tax assets and liabilities are treated as non-current as it expected that they will 
be recovered or settled more than twelve months after the reporting date. 

A total tax credit of £132,000 (2019: £457,000 credit) has been recognised through the statement of changes in equity in 
respect of share-based payments (consisting of a deferred tax credit and current tax credit of £12,000 (2019: £275,000 debit) 
and £120,000 (2019: £732,000) respectively). There are no deferred tax balances with respect to cash flow hedges.

6 Debtors – due within one year

Trade receivables 

Amounts owed by Group undertakings 

Other debtors 

Prepayments 

Financial assets designated at fair value through hedging reserve (restated) 

Loan arrangement fees (restated) 

The deferred tax asset has been moved to a separate line on the face of the balance sheet.

Derivative financial assets previously shown on the face of the balance sheet are now included above.

Loan arrangement fees previously shown as debit balances in Creditors have been reclassified above.

7 Debtors – due after more than one year

Amounts owed by Group undertakings(a) 

Loan arrangement fees (restated) 

(a)  Attracts interest at market rate and is repayable on 31 July 2021.

Loan arrangement fees previously shown as debit balances in Creditors have been reclassified above.

8 Cash at bank and in hand

Cash at bank and in hand 

Bank overdrafts 

Cash and cash equivalents per cash flow statement 

2020 
£000 

2  

98  

—  

127  

198 

450  

875  

2019 
£000

17 

1,065 

757 

134 

110

31 

2,114 

2020 
£000 

2019 
£000

26,849  

26,849 

525  

— 

27,374  

26,849 

2020 
£000 

2019 
£000

18,588 

58,093

(10,446) 

—

8,142 

58,093

152

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
9 Creditors: amounts falling due within one year

Bank loans and overdrafts 

Trade creditors 

Amounts owed to undertakings 

Other creditors including taxation and social security 

Accruals and deferred income 

Note 

8 

2020 
£000 

10,446  

1,393  

8,398  

91  

2,872  

23,200  

Restated(a) 

2019 
£000

— 

130 

1,533 

203 

3,534 

5,400 

Refer to note 15 to the Group’s financial statements for more details of the terms of the bank borrowings.

(a)  Loan arrangement fees previously shown as debit balances in Creditors have been moved into Debtors.

10 Provisions for liabilities – other provision

Balance at 1 April 

Reclassified from other creditors 

Provisions made in the year 

Provisions released in the year 

Provisions used during the year 

Unwinding of discounted amount 

The provision relates to dilapidations of a property lease that expires in August 2021. 

11 Called up share capital

Allotted, called up and fully paid   

96,366,799 (2019: 78,365,046) ordinary shares of 5p each 

2020 
£000 

115  

—  

8  

(53) 

(26) 

14  

58  

2019 
£000

104 

43 

7 

—

(71)

32 

115 

2020 
£000 

2019 
£000

4,818 

3,918

Of the 96.4 million (2019: 78.4 million) shares in the Company, 31,000 (2019: 31,000) are held by the International Greetings 
Employee Benefit Trust.

Refer to note 20 to the Group’s financial statements for details of movements in share capital.

12 Share-based payments
Refer to note 23 to the Group’s financial statements for details of share-based payments.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

153

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

13 Financial instruments
(a) Carrying amount of financial instruments
The carrying amounts of the financial assets and liabilities include:

Assets measured at fair value through the hedging reserve 

Assets measured at amortised cost   

Liabilities measured at amortised cost 

2020 
£000 

198  

2019 
£000

110

45,633  

86,781

(20,237) 

(1,663)

25,594  

85,228

(b) Financial instruments measured at fair value
Derivative financial instruments
The fair value of forward exchange contracts is assessed using valuations models taking into account market inputs such as 
foreign exchange spot and forward rates, yield curves and forward interest rates. 

(c) Hedge accounting
The following table indicates the periods in which the cash flows associated with cash flow hedging instruments are 
expected to occur as required by FRS 102.29(a) for the cash flow hedge accounting models, which is in line with when they 
are expected to affect profit and loss.

Forward exchange contracts: 

Assets 

Carrying 
amount 
£000 

2020 

Expected 
cash flows 
£000 

One year 
or less 
£000 

Carrying 
amount 
£000 

2019

Expected 
cash flows 
£000 

One year 
or less 
£000

198  

9,565  

9,565  

110 

5,799 

5,799

The Company uses cash flow hedge accounting in line with FRS 102.12, by entering into forward exchange contracts 
to hedge foreign exchange exposure. Fair value at 31 March 2020 was £198,000 (2019: £110,000) recognised in other 
comprehensive income.

The amount recognised in the profit and loss account for the year was £nil (2019: £nil).

(d) Fair values
The amounts for all financial assets and financial liabilities carried at fair value are as follows:

Forward exchange contracts: 

Assets  

Fair value 
2020 
£000 

Fair value 
2019 
£000

198  

110

14 Contingencies
The Company has given, together with certain of its subsidiary undertakings, an unlimited composite joint and several 
guarantee in respect of the Group facility provided by HSBC, NatWest, BNP Paribas, Sun Trust and PN of itself and its 
subsidiaries. At 31 March 2020, the Company had cash of £18.6 million (2019: £58.1 million) which offset net borrowings 
elsewhere in the Group of £25.0 million (2019: £65.9 million). Therefore, the total of this guarantee at the year end, in relation 
to the Company only, was £25.0 million (2019: £65.9 million).

The Company has given HSBC Bank (China) Company Ltd a guarantee of RMB15.4 million (£1.8 million) and $3.8 million 
(£3.1 million) on behalf of its subsidiary The Huizhou Gift International Greetings Company Limited.

As part of the Group refinancing completed in June 2016 the Company provided guarantees to HSBC banks in the 
Netherlands of €1.2 million (£1.1 million), the USA $5.9 million (£4.8 million) and in Hong Kong $18.5 million (£14.9 million) 
on behalf of the Group’s trading subsidiaries in those countries.

154

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
15 Related parties
Identity of related parties with which the Company has transacted:

Group undertakings:

International Greetings Asia Limited;

IG Design Group UK Limited;
• 
IG Design Group Americas, Inc;
• 
• 
Impact Innovations, Inc;
•  The Lang Companies, Inc;
• 
•  The Huizhou Gift International Greetings Company Limited;
• 
IG Design Group BV;
•  Anchor International BV;
• 
• 

IG Design Group S.p.z.o.o; and
IG Design Group Australia Pty Limited.

Related party transactions – transactions with key management

Short term employee benefits 

Post-employment benefits 

Share-based payment   

Related party transactions – transactions with Group undertakings

Management recharges 

Receivables outstanding 

Creditors outstanding 

2020 
£000 

1,407 

8 

(17) 

1,398 

2020 
£000 

1,703  

26,947  

(8,398) 

2019 
£000

1,835 

12 

1,937 

3,784 

2019 
£000

2,613

27,914

(1,533)

During the year the Company paid £71,000 (2019: £56,000) for marketing services to Mattr Media Ltd, a company controlled 
by Joshua Fineman, who is the son of the Group CEO, and had an outstanding unpaid balance of £25,000 (2019: £nil).

16 Accounting estimates and judgements
Management does not consider that there are any significant accounting estimates or judgements other than those showing 
in note 1 to the Group financial statements.

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

155

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2020

17 Dividends paid and proposed
A final dividend for year ending 31 March 2019 of 6.00p (for year ending 31 March 2018: 4.00p) was paid on 16 September 2019. 
An interim dividend of 3.00p was paid on 17 January 2020 (2019: 2.50p). The Directors are recommending the payment of a 
final dividend of 5.75p in respect of the year ended 31 March 2020 (2019: 6.00p). If approved it will be paid in November 2020 
to shareholders on the register at the close of business on 2 October 2020.

Dividends paid in the year 

Final equity dividend for prior year 

Interim equity dividend for current year 

Dividends paid in the year 

Proposed for approval at Annual General Meeting 

Final equity dividend for current year 

2020

2019

Pence
per share 

6.00 

3.00 

Pence
per share 

4.00 

2.50

£000 

4,732 

2,372 

7,104 

2020

2019

Pence 
per share 

5.75 

£000 

5,541 

Pence
per share 

6.00

£000

2,597

1,956

4,553

£000

4,702

18 Staff numbers and costs
The average number of persons employed by the Company (including Directors) during the year was 17 (2019: 17), all relating 
to management and administration.

The aggregate payroll costs of these persons were as follows:

Wages and salaries

Share-based payments – Long Term Incentive Plan charge 

Social security costs

Other pension costs

2020
£000

1,844  

20  

246

101 

2019 
£000

2,321 

2,064 

317

96

2,211  

4,798 

For information on Directors’ remuneration please refer to the section titled ‘Directors’ remuneration’ within the Directors’ 
remuneration report (pages 71 to 76) and Long Term Incentive Plan (page 127), which form part of these audited financial 
statements. 

19 Operating leases
Non-cancellable operating lease rentals are payable as follows:

Less than one year

Between one and five years

More than five years

Operating lease expense in the income statement 

2020
£000

56

28

—

84

54

2019 
£000

49

69

—

118

49

20 Non-adjusting post balance sheet event 
There were no known material non-adjusting events which occurred between the end of the reporting period and prior to the 
authorisation of these financial statements on 27 July 2020.

156

IG Design Group plc  ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2020

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
ADVISERS

Financial and nominated adviser 
and broker
Canaccord Genuity Limited 
88 Wood Street 
London EC2V 7QR

Independent Auditor
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
1 Embankment Place 
Charing Cross 
London WC2N 6RH

Public relations
Alma PR 
71‑73 Carter Lane  
London EC4V 5EQ

Registered office
No 7, Water End Barns  
Water End  
Eversholt MK17 9EA

IG Design Group plc  
is registered in  
England and Wales,  
number 1401155

Share registrar
Link Asset Services 
The Registry  
34 Beckenham Road  
Beckenham BR3 4TU

By phone:  
UK 0871 664 0300,  
Overseas +44 (0) 371 664 0300

By email: enquiries@linkgroup.co.uk

Visit us online at 
thedesigngroup.com

Designed and produced by  

www.lyonsbennett.com

The paper used in this report is produced using virgin wood fibre from 
well‑managed forests with FSC© certification. All pulps used are elemental 
chlorine free and manufactured at a mill that has been awarded the ISO 14001 
and EMAS certificates for environmental management. The use of the FSC© logo 
identifies products which contain wood from well‑managed forests certified in 
accordance with the rules of the Forest Stewardship Council.

Printed by CPI Colour, an FSC© and ISO 14001 accredited company, who is 
committed to all round excellence and improving environmental performance as 
an important part of this strategy.

 I

G

D

e

s

i

g

n

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

N

N

U

A

L

R

E

P

O

R

T

A

N

D

F

I

N

A

N

C

I

A

L

S

T

A

T

E

M

E

N

T

S

2

0

2

0

IG Design Group plc
No 7 Water End Barns
Water End
Eversholt MK17 9EA
T +44 (0)1525 887 310

thedesigngroup.com